DNVGL-ST-0377 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances · 2016. 5. 19. · 9.6 Hydraulic systems...

The electronic pdf version of this document available free of chargefrom httpwwwdnvglcom is the officially binding version

DNV GL AS

STANDARD

DNVGL-ST-0377 Edition May 2016

Standard for shipboard lifting appliances

FOREWORD

DNV GL standards contain requirements principles and acceptance criteria for objects personnelorganisations andor operations

copy DNV GL AS May 2016

Any comments may be sent by e-mail to rulesdnvglcom

This service document has been prepared based on available knowledge technology andor information at the time of issuance of thisdocument The use of this document by others than DNV GL is at the users sole risk DNV GL does not accept any liability or responsibilityfor loss or damages resulting from any use of this document

Cha

nges

- c

urre

nt

Standard mdash DNVGL-ST-0377 Edition May 2016 Page 3Standard for shipboard lifting appliances

DNV GL AS

CHANGES - CURRENT

This is a new document

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

CONTENTS

Changes - current3

Section 1 General information 811 Introduction812 Services 1613 Certification procedure 1814 Type of services20

Section 2 Documentation and certification 2221 Documentation to be submitted2222 Certification 23

Section 3 Materials2631 General 2632 Selection of materials2633 Manufacture and testing2834 Materials for welded components 3035 Materials for hydraulic cylinders3536 Forgings3737 Steel castings 3938 Bolts and nuts 41

Section 4 Design and calculation principles 4341 General 4342 Design principles 4343 Calculation principles5044 Proof of structural safety 5645 Proof of safety against overturning 5846 Proof of fatigue strength 5947 Proof of suitability for use7348 Joints 7449 Special structural elements 81

Section 5 Cranes and supporting structures 9951 General 9952 Crane groups 10053 Design loads 102

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

54 Hoist load coefficients 10855 Load combinations and partial safety factors 11256 Proofs 11757 Requirements for design and equipment 120

Section 6 Special lifting appliances and means of transport 12961 General 12962 Rope and chain hoists 12963 Ramps and car decks13364 Lifting appliances for research work13765 Industrial cargo-handling vehicles13866 Means of conveying persons139

Section 7 Loose gear and interchangeable components14271 General 14272 Loose gear 14273 Interchangeable components15374 Marking of loose gear and interchangeable components16075 Wear damage repair 163

Section 8 Ropes and rope accessories 16581 General 16582 Wire ropes 16583 Fibre ropes17184 Rope-end attachments17385 Tests and examinations 17486 Documentation176

Section 9 Mechanical parts 17891 General 17892 Design criteria and operational requirements17993 Power drives18094 Slewing gears and slew rings 18095 Winches 18296 Hydraulic systems18597 Protective measures and safety devices 18798 Examination of drawings and supervision of construction 18799 Documentation189

Section 10 Electrical equipment192

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

101 General 192102 Design criteria and operational requirements193103 Drives and brakes193104 Cables and lines195105 Switches196106 Protective measures and safety devices 197107 Examination of drawings and supervision of construction199108 Documentation200

Section 11 Construction of steel components 201111 General 201112 Requirements for manufacturers 201113 Design details 205114 Types of welds209115 Workmanship and testing of weld joints214116 Examination of drawings and supervision of construction217117 Documentation218

Section 12 Technical and operational safety requirements 220121 General 220122 Design requirements220123 Equipment225124 Safety devices226125 Passive protective measures228126 Stowage and lashing devices229127 Operational requirements 230

Section 13 Testing and examination of shipboard lifting appliances 232131 General 232132 Supervision of construction 233133 Initial test and examination 239134 Periodic tests and examinations 242135 Extraordinary tests and examinations 246136 Wear damage repair 247137 Lifting appliance documentation252

Appendix A Calculation of dynamic forces due to motions of the ship257A1 General 257A2 Dynamic forces generated by ships and similar floating bodies 257A3 Dynamic forces due to pontoons or barges260

Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

Appendix B Detail classification for fatigue strength analysis (FAT classes) 261B1 261

Appendix C Wind loads form and sheltering coefficients275C1 General 275C2 Form coefficients c 275C3 Sheltering coefficients η 275

Appendix D Rigging plan279

Changes ndash historic 280


DNV GL AS

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

11 Introduction

111 Objective

1111 This standard provides requirements for certification and verification of lifting appliances intendedfor load handling within and outside vessel while in the harbour or in sheltered waters and within the vesselwhile at sea

Guidance noteFor lifting appliances intended for load handling outside vessel while at open sea and load handling onboard offshore unitsinstallations see DNVGL ST 0378 Standard for Offshore and Platform Lifting Appliances

---e-n-d---o-f---g-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

112 Scope

1121 This standard covers the design materials fabrication installation testing and commissioning ofshipboard lifting appliances and industrial lifting appliancesThe categorization of lifting appliances is based on installation and intended function for the lifting appliance

a) Shipboard lifting appliances

mdash lifting appliances on board ships intended for load handling within and outside ships while in theharbour and within ships while at sea

b) Industrial lifting appliances

mdash lifting appliances onshore and offshore not covered by a) and DNVGL ST 0378Guidance noteThe main purpose of the lifting appliance will define the category of the lifting appliance and relevant applicable standard


1122 Each lifting appliance has its separate intended functions Examples of intended functions are butnot limited to

mdash loading and discharging of shipsmdash handling of provision store and spare parts cargo hoses gangways and ammunitionmdash handling of Suez Canal boats and search lightsmdash conveyance of personspersonnelmdash handling of ramps and moveable cargo decks etc

1123 Requirements presented herein are minimum requirements to be satisfied although subject toacceptance by the Society other minimum requirements may be agreed eg based on new technologyavailable at the time of application for certification

1124 The requirements of this standard may be supplemented with additional requirements whereinstallation of specific design or assessment shows that standards that provides equivalent or higher level ofintegrity and safety are more appropriate

1125 The standard consists of a three level hierarchy of documents

mdash Sec1 and Sec2 provides principles and procedures of the Societys classification certification verificationand consultancy services


DNV GL AS

mdash Sec3 through Sec13 provides technical provisions and acceptance criteria as well as the technical basisfor the services stated in the first two sections

mdash Appendices provides proven technology and sound engineering practice as well as guidance for the higherlevel documents mentioned in this document

1126 This standard distinguishes between

mdash information and description of servicesmdash requirements

Consequently these two subjects are separated and the standard is divided into three parts

mdash Sec1 - Sec2 General information application definitions and references Description of applicableservices and relations to rules and regulation from institutions other than the Society

mdash Sec3 - Sec13 Requirements and technical provisionsmdash Appendices

113 Application

1131 This standard shall be applied for certification of shipboard lifting appliances for vessels with classnotation Crane This standard may also be applied as voluntary basis for verification and certification oflifting appliances that are not classed with the Society

Guidance noteThe standard may also be applied to industrial cranes


1132 The requirements presented herein should be applied consequently from concept design through thefinal construction including major modifications

1133 Specifications of the services provided by this standard are given in [12] and [14]

1134 The standard does not apply to launching appliances for LSA launching gear for diving equipmentand ROVs structural parts of ramps and car decks dredging appliances which are no loading gear personnellifts (elevators) jacks overhead drilling equipment fork lifts portable hoisting gear etc

1135 Personnel lifting with cranes otherwise designed for lifting of loadscargo may be covered uponagreement

1136 Without prejudice to [1124] deviations from the requirements given in this standard may onlybe substituted where shown to provide an equivalent or higher level of integrity or safer than under thisstandard

1137 At the Societyrsquos discretion equivalent solutions and exemptions from the requirements given in thisstandard may be accepted

1138 In case of conflict between requirements given in this standard and a reference document therequirements given in this standard shall prevail

1139 Where reference is made to codes other than the Societys documents the valid revision shall betaken as the revision which was current at the date of issue of this standard unless otherwise noted

Standard mdash DNVGL-ST-0377 Edition May 2016 0Standard for shipboard lifting appliances

DNV GL AS

114 Relation to the Societys other documents

1141 For lifting appliances covered by the class notation Crane see RU SHIP Pt6 Ch5 Sec3Permanently installed cranes ndash Crane

115 Definitions abbreviations symbols and references1151 AccessoriesLoad-bearing not rigidly attached interchangeable parts which may be integral components of liftingappliances and loose gear as well as employed individually such as Hooks blocks shackles swivels ringschains claws clamps pliers load fastening ropes (slingsstrops) lifting straps etc

1152 Active cable tensioning system (ACT)System keeping the tension of the hoisting wire to a given set point value

Guidance noteA supply of external energy is required


1153 Active heave compensation system (AHC)System that maintains the position of the load to a given set point value



1154 Actual hook loadThe static weight of the load attached to the hook includes the useful load lifted plus any loose gear usedsuch as slings lifting beams etc

1155 Additional class notationsCode used by the classification societies to confirm that a vessel possesses certain systems equipment orfeatures covered by the classification (Examples are HELDK Crane E0 and F-AMC)

Guidance noteE0 means that the vessel complies with requirements for having unattended machinery space and F-AMC means that the vesselcomplies with requirements for additional fire protection in this case both for accommodation machinery space and cargo space


1156 Ship type notationCode used by the classification societies to define a type of vessel related to its most typical service (Tankerfor oil Passenger ship and Crane vessel are typical examples)

1157 Automatic overload protection system (AOPS)A system that automatically safeguards and protects the crane against overload and ldquoover-momentrdquo duringoperation by allowing the hook to be pulled away from the crane in order to avoid significant damage

1158 Certificate of conformityA document attesting that a product or service is in conformity with specific standards or technicalspecifications (ISO ldquoCertification - Principles and practicerdquo 1980) Issued by manufacturer or vendor

1159 Competent personbodyPerson or body possessing knowledge and experience required for performing thorough examination and testof lifting appliances and loose gear and who is acceptable to the competent authority


DNV GL AS

11510 Crane stiffnessCoefficient defined as the weight attached to the hook necessary to obtain a unit deflection at the hook level

11511 CustomerAgreement (contract) holder with the Society Signifies the party who has requested the Societyrsquos service

11512 Dead loadsDead loads are the weights of all the fixed and mobile components of lifting appliances and loose gearpermanently present during operationFor the purpose of marking the dead loads of loose gear are designated as weight by the ILO The unit isspecified in tons (t) or kilograms (kg)

11513 DesignerSignifies a party who creates documentation submitted to the Society for approval or information

11514 Design approvalVerifying that a design represented by a drawing or set of drawings is found to comply with all requirementgiven in a specified Society standard or Society regulation

Guidance noteIn the Societys business procedures design approvals are valid for one order only One order however may include a specifiednumber of units for specified locationsvessels


11515 Design approval letterWritten confirmation of a design approval

11516 Design assessment for type approvalExamination and acceptance of a design for type approval The type approval will be assigned first after aprototype test also has been successfully carried out

11517 Design dynamic factorThe dynamic factor applied to the working load for a specific SWL

Guidance noteFor an offshore crane the design dynamic factor is normally referred to the still water condition for determining the SWL at still waterThe design dynamic factor may however be defined also to refer to a specified significant wave height


11518 Design verification report (DVR)Formalized report confirming the result of a completed design verification assignment

11519 Dynamic factorA variable factor representing the dynamic effects that the working load is exposed to Also named dynamiccoefficient

11520 Dynamic loadThe working load when subjected to (multiplied with) a dynamic factor

11521 Dynamic load chartDiagram or table showing rated capacity depending on sea state and on radius or boom angle

11522 Engineered liftSafe lift planned by qualified engineers with basis in thorough information with respect to crane capacitycrane functions and performance rigging crane support as well as weather and sea conditions


DNV GL AS

11523 Heavy lift craneCrane with SWL above 2500 kN

11524 ILOInternational Labour Organization

11525 Inertia forcesThe forces induced by change of velocity

11526 Inspection certificate 31A document issued by the manufacturer which contains the results of all the required tests It shall certifythat the tests have been carried out by the manufacturer on samples taken from the delivered productsdirect Ref EN 10204 and ISO 10474

11527 Inspection certificate 32A document prepared by both the manufacturers authorized inspection representative independent of themanufacturing department and either the purchasers authorized representative or the inspector designatedby the official regulations and in which they declare that the products supplied are in compliance with therequirements of the order and in which test results are supplied Ref EN 10204 and ISO 10474

11528 Lifting applianceMachine or appliance used for the purpose of lifting goods and materials or in special modes personnel

11529 Lifting equipmentGeneral expression including lifting appliances lifting gear loose gear and other lifting attachments usedseparately or in combination

11530 Lifting gearRef also Accessories ([1151]) and Loose gear ([11533])Load carrying accessories used in combination with a lifting appliance however that are not necessarily apart of the permanent arrangement of the lifting appliance such as

mdash attachment rings shackles swivels balls pinsmdash sheaves hook-blocks hooks load cellsmdash loose gear

Guidance noteLifting gear considered as separate components shall be designed and tested in accordance with the provisions for loose gear


11531 Load chartDiagram or table showing rated capacity depending on radius or boom angle

11532 Loose gearMeans by which loads can be attached to lifting appliances but which do not form part either of thelifting appliance or of the load They include devices and steel structures such as but not limited tograbs spreaders lifting magnets traverses etc as well as Accessories (ref[1151]) which are integralcomponents of the loose gear

11533 Machinery componentsRotating components transferring torque for drivingbraking purpose Examples are gearboxes wheels andshafts

11534 Man riding winchDevice specially designed for hoistinglowering of a person


DNV GL AS

11535 Manual overload protection system (MOPS)System activated by the crane operator protecting the crane against overload and ldquoover-momentrdquo byreducing the load-carrying capacity and allowing the hook to be pulled away from the crane

11536 Mean time to failure (MTTF)The mean value of service time until failure occurs

11537 MechanismDevices needed to cause or to stop a relative motion between two rigid parts of a crane between the craneand its foundation or between the crane and the lifted load Thus motors brakes transmission systems andsimilar components are defined as mechanisms

11538 Mobile deck craneA mobile deck crane is a cable-controlled crane mounted on crawlers or rubber-tired carriers or a hydraulic-powered crane with a boom mounted on truck-type carriers or as self-propelled types

11539 Nominal loadNominal load is the designation for the maximum permissible useful load of lifting appliances and loose gearLifting appliances and loose gear can have different nominal loads depending on varying equipment conditionor operational conditions cable tackle systems or load radii

11540 OverloadLoad which exceeds the safe working load (SWL)

11541 Over-momentLoad moment which exceeds the maximum load moment (safe working load (SWL) multiplied by radius)

11542 Passive cable tensioning system (PCT)System keeping the tension of the hoisting wire between predefined limits using stored energy

11543 Passive heave compensation system (PHC)System that maintains the position of the load between predefined limits using stored energy

11544 Probability of failure on demand (PFD)Probability of failure on demand

11545 Product certificate (general)A compliance document validated and signed by the issuing organization

mdash identifying the product that the certificate applies tomdash conforming compliance with the referred requirements

It is required that

mdash the tests and inspection s have been performed on the certified product itself or on samples taken fromthe certified product itself

mdash the tests were witnessed by a qualified representative of the organization issuing the certificate or hisauthorized representative

11546 Product certificate (the Societyrsquos)The Societys product certificate is a compliance document validated and signed by the issuing organizationand the Societys representative

mdash identifying the product that the certificate applies tomdash confirming compliance with referred requirements


DNV GL AS

It is required that


mdash that the tests were witnessed by a qualified representative of the organization issuing the certificate andthe Societys representative or in accordance with special agreements

11547 PurchaserCompany or person who orders the lifting equipment from a manufacturer This standard does not necessarilyrequire that the purchaser will need to have any direct relationship to or communication with the Society

11548 Rated capacityActual hook load that the crane is designed to lift for a given operating condition (eg boom configurationreeving arrangement off leadside lead heeltrim radius wave height etc)

11549 REPRope exit point Location on the lifting appliance where the rope is suspended - typically found at the outersheave in the crane boom tip

11550 RiskCombination of the probability of occurrence (frequency) of harm and the severity (consequence) of theharm

11551 Risk control measure (RCM)A means of controlling a single element of risk typically risk control is achieved by reducing either theconsequence or the frequencies

11552 ROVRemote operated vehicle

11553 Running riggingWire ropes passing over rope sheaves of guide rollers or wound on winches irrespective of whether or notthe ropes are moved under load

11554 Safe working load (SWL)Safe working load is the international designation for the nominal load by ILO The abbreviation SWL is usedfor marking the lifting appliance loose gear and accessoriesThe unit of SWL is specified in tons (t) or kilograms (kg)

11555 Significant wave height HsignAverage height of the highest one third of the individual wave heights in a short-term constant seastatetypically 3 hours

11556 The SocietyThe Society signifies DNVGL

11557 Standing riggingRopes that are not turned round or wound on to winches (eg guided wires pendants stays)

11558 Subsea cranesCranes intended for handling of unmanned submersibles for lowering to and retrieval from below sea level


DNV GL AS

11559 Test reportA document signed by the manufacturer stating

mdash conformity with requirements given by a relevant standardmdash that tests are carried out on samples from the current production

11560 Type approvalApproval of conformity with specified requirements on the basis of systematic examination of one or morespecimens of a product representative of the production

11561 Type approval certificate (DNV GL)A document issued by the Society confirming compliance with specified requirements is named DNV GL TypeApproval Certificate (TA)

11562 Useful loadUseful load is the load which may be directly lifted by the supporting component (eg cargo hook or grab) ofthe lifting appliance by the lift car of a lift by the platform of a lifting platform or by loose gearThe useful load consists of the load to be transported and where applicable also of the dead load of theloose gear

11563 VerificationA service that signifies a confirmation through the provision of objective evidence (analysis observationmeasurement test records or other evidence) that specified requirements have been met

11564 VesselA common term for ships craft offshore units and offshore installations

11565 Working load (suspended load)Also designated ldquoHoist loadrdquoThe static weight of the useful load lifted plus the weight of the lifting gear The working load is subjected toinertia forces

11566 Works product certificateReference is made to RU SHIP Pt1 Ch3 Sec5 [25] A document signed by the manufacturer stating

mdash conformity with rule requirementsmdash that tests are carried out on the certified product itselfmdash that tests are made on samples taken from the certified product itselfmdash that tests are witnessed and signed by a qualified department of the manufacturers

116 Crane design types

1161 Winch luffing crane a crane where the boom is controlled by wire ropes through a winch

1162 Cylinder luffing crane a crane where the boom is controlled by hydraulic cylinder(s)

1163 Knuckle boom crane a crane where the boom is hinged and the boom and knuckle angles arecontrolled by a set of hydraulic cylinders

1164 Derrick crane a simple crane consisting of a vertical mast and a hinged jib The derrick crane isprovided with devices for raising and lowering a load luffing the jib and slewing the jib about the mast

1165 Overhead travelling crane a crane which lifts the object by a trolley which normally moveshorizontally along the crane beam The crane beam ends have wheels running on rails at high level


DNV GL AS

1166 Gantry crane a crane which lifts the object by a trolley which normally moves horizontally along thecrane beam The crane beam is supported by vertical legs having wheels running on rails at ground level

1167 A-frame crane a hinged frame intended for lifting Hydraulic cylinders control the movement of theA-frame while a winch is fitted for hoisting and lowering the load

117 Design temperature

1171 Design temperature is a reference temperature used as a criterion for the selection of steel grades

1172 The design temperature TD for lifting appliances is defined as the lowest acceptable servicetemperature for the crane

1173 For shipboard lifting appliances installed on vessels with Crane notations the design temperaturesof the appliances shall be compatible with the design temperature specified for the vesselunit

1174 If not otherwise specified design temperature according to Table 1-1 shall be applied

Table 1-1 Design temperature for lifting appliances

Type of Lifting Appliance Design temperature Corresponding Extreme Low Temperature

Shipboard Lifting Appliances -10degC (-30degC)

Engine rooms and other similar spaces withcontrolled temp +10degC (0degC)

118 Extreme low temperatureThe lowest temperature estimated to appear in an area with a corresponding specified design temperature

12 Services

121 Introduction

1211 This sub-section describes possible combinations of the different services offered Furthermorevarious alternatives are described for confirmation of the various services by the Society

1212 Figure 1-1 describes the services offered and the associated documents issued by the Society toproof compliance


DNV GL AS

Figure 1-1 Alternatives for documentation that may be issued to Customers depending on typeand combination of services requested

122 Regulatory basis

1221 This standard is based on the Societyrsquos understanding and interpretation of the ILO ConventionNo152 of 1979

123 Acceptance by national authorities

1231 Regulatory bodies such as port authorities flag administrations shelf authorities and municipal orgovernmental health and safety authorities require that lifting appliances and loose gear shall be certifiedNormally the Societys certification in accordance with this standard will satisfy the authoritiesrsquo requirements


DNV GL AS

1232 In cases where requirements laid down by the pertinent body exceeds the Societys requirementsdescribed in Sec3 through Sec13 The Society may as a voluntary service include the additionalrequirements in the examination and confirm whether or not they are found to be fulfilled

13 Certification procedure

131 General

1311 The following parts components and systems are covered by this standard

mdash all load-carrying structural members and components of the lifting appliancemdash cargo hooks chains rings blocks sheaves shackles lifting beams swivels and ropesmdash structural integrity of grabs hydraulic dampers or other load transferring componentsmdash rope drumsmdash slewing bearing including fastenersmdash power systems (for hoisting derricking slewing and travelling)mdash brakes and braking systemsmdash safety equipmentmdash protection against firemdash seating and fasteners for prime movers winches and for bearings of power transmitting componentsmdash control and monitoring systemsmdash electrical installation

1312 The following activities are covered by this standard

mdash design examinationmdash survey during fabrication and installationmdash witness testing and marking

132 Design examination

1321 Load-carrying and other important components of a lifting appliance are subject to designexamination with respect to strength and suitability for its purpose A design approval is granted when thedesign examination has been concluded without detection of non-compliancesThe design examination may be substituted partly or completely by enhanced manufacturing survey andortesting In cases where the substitutions are applied for by the customer agreements shall be made betweenthe customer and the Society regarding possible reductions of documentation to be submitted for approvalinformationUpon special agreement the design examination may be substituted by a strength evaluation based upontesting until failureStrength examination of components related to power supply and safety equipment is normally not carriedout by the Society

Guidance noteThe Societyrsquos splitting of the certification process in the sequences design approval manufacturing survey (including installationsurvey) and testing shall be considered as a part of the Societyrsquos internal scheme to organize its workThe Societyrsquos reports covering the separate phases is considered internal documents and information enabling the progress of thecertification project


DNV GL AS

The Societyrsquos formal documentation of the certification to the customer will be the product certificate Form 7103a issued aftercompleteion of manufacturing process and full testing at the manufacturer and CG2 issued after installation and full testing onboardin accordance with ILO152 requirements For lifting appliances not subject to ILO 152 test report in accordance with Form OLA101may be issued after installation and full testing onboard


1322 Each lifting appliance is normally given a separate design approval

1323 The design approval may be obtained either on a case-by-case basis or as a type approvalThe type approval means that the design as approved can be applied for identical units to be fabricated ierequested documents need not be submitted for each unitThe type approval will be based on certain conditions and its period of validity will be limitedReference is made to the Societys document DNVGL CP 0338 Type approval scheme

133 Survey during fabrication and installation

1331 Normally a survey during manufacture of each separate lifting appliance shall be carried out by theSocietys surveyor in order to ascertain compliance with the approved drawings other requirements given inthis standard as well as general good workmanship

1332 As an alternative to survey during manufacture of each separate lifting appliance modified surveyprocedures and survey arrangements may be accepted provided the manufacturer operates a quality-assurance system approved and certified by the Society Acceptance shall be clearly formalized

1333 After a lifting appliance has been installed on its permanent foundation and before testing can takeplace it shall be subjected to a survey by a surveyor of the Society

134 Testing and marking

1341 Components and each completed lifting appliance shall be subjected to functional testing and load-testing as specified in Sec13

135 Extension of scope of work

1351 Upon request from the customer the scope of work may be extended beyond the subjects andaspects covered in this standard

1352 Extensions shall be agreed in writing The Society may if found necessary require that the customerpresents reference documents for the extended scope of work such as authority regulations norms andstandards

1353 In case of disputes regarding interpretations of requirements on which extended work is based thecustomer shall contact the publisherowner of the requirements and obtain their written interpretationIf the publisherowner is not willing to interpret the disputed requirement or an interpretation for otherreasons cannot be acquired the respective extension of the scope of work shall be omitted


DNV GL AS

136 Reduced scope of work

1361 For lifting appliances not to be installed on vessels classed by the Society upon request from andagreement with the customer parts of the scope of work components systems or specific aspects orrequirements may be excluded from the scope of work specified in the standard This will be annotated in thedocumentary evidence of the completed assignment (certificate)

1362 The Society will not agree to limit the scope of work or parts of the suggested services if they are ofthe opinion that this may lead to hazards or unacceptable lowering of the safety standard

14 Type of services

141 Basic certification

1411 The basic requirements presented in Sec3 through Sec13 are considered to cover the requirementsgiven in the ILO Convention No152 of 1979 specified in [1221] Lifting appliance and loose gear foundto comply with these basic requirements are qualified for the Societys product certification whereupon theproduct certificate Form 7103a may be issued based on FAT (Factory Acceptance Test) and survey Followingsuccessful testing and survey after installation onboard a DNVGL CG2 certificate will be issued for cranescovered by the ILO regime (cargo cranes) For cranes not covered by the ILO regime a test report FormOLA101 will be issued by the Society following successful onboard testing The cargo gear register (CG1 ifpublished by the Society) may be endorsed accordingly either as ILO crane or as other lifting appliances

1412 The basic requirement covers the two categories of lifting appliances a) and b) defined in [121] aswell as loose gear components allocated the same lifting appliances as well as personnel lifting as denoted in[122]

1413 Some details of the basic requirements given in Sec3 through Sec13 are different for the differentcategory of lifting appliance a) and b) Furthermore some specific requirements are stated for cranes alsoused for personnel lifting

142 Cranes included in class scope

1421 On a voluntary basis cranes installed on board vessels and offshore units classed with the Societymay be included in the scope of work covered by classification In such cases the vesseloffshore unit will beassigned the additional class notation Crane or Crane(N)In order to obtain this notation at least the main crane onboard shall have been certified in accordance withthe basic requirements given in Sec3 through Sec13 as well as having been assigned the product certificateCG2 or test report Form OLA101

1422 Some of the requirements given in this standard have been extended with additional detailedrequirements for cranes to be covered by classification

143 Assignments completed before installation

1431 Assignments completed at the manufacturersrsquo premises can be agreed Such services are normally tobe completed with monitoring of tests at the manufacturer (FAT-tests) Applicable reports or certificates maybe issued See also [1432]


DNV GL AS

1432 The reason for or purpose of such assignments may eg be

mdash completed certification of loose gear or components The Society will normally issue the product certificateCG3 after completion of the tests

mdash provisional certification after FAT-test For instance if final destination is not decided or if themanufacturer is producing for stock Or the customer has requested FAT-tests and a documentaryconfirmation of the Societyrsquos service rendered until a certain point A Manufacturing Survey ReportCertificate of Conformity may be assigned

See also Figure 1-1


DNV GL AS

SECTION 2 DOCUMENTATION AND CERTIFICATION

21 Documentation to be submitted

211 General

2111 The documentation necessary for verification assignments will depend on the scope of work agreedThe documentation and information requirements stated below are necessary for design approval andensuing certification

212 Documentation requirements

2121 Documentation shall be submitted as required by Table 2-1 as applicable for the lifting appliance

Table 2-1 Documentation requirements

Object Document type Additional description Shipboardcranes

Shipboardcranes(class

notation)

C010 - Design criteria

Load charts andor load tablesdynamic factors

Environment conditions

Category of crane see definitions [112]

Particulars of brake spring performance

FI FI

C020 - Assembly or arrangementdrawing FI FI

C030 - Detailed drawing

Crane structure and components forslewing luffing and hoisting Gears andbrakes for shipboard cranes are normallynot subject to approval Drawings of gearstransmitting braking forces should containrelevant parameters including torquecapacity

AP AP

C040 - Design analysis FI FI

C050 - Non-destructive testing (NDT)plan FI FI

Z060 - Functional description FI FI

General

Z161 - Operation manual FI FI

Power supply Z030 - System arrangement plan

Type and maker of prime mover orspecification of other main andemergency power supply

Including mechanical components

FI FI

E170 - Electrical schematic drawing Including cable list FI APElectric powersystem Z090 - Equipment list FI FI


DNV GL AS



notation)

S011 - System diagram (PampID) FI AP

S042 - Hydraulic control diagram FI AP


Hydraulicpower system

Z090 - Equipment list FI FI

Control andmonitoring

I200 - Control and monitoring systemdocumentation

Functional description of safety systemand the safety equipment to be included FI AP

2122 For general requirements for documentation including definition of the Info codes see RU SHIP Pt1Ch3 Sec2

2123 For a full definition of the documentation types see RU SHIP Pt1 Ch3 Sec3

213 Design analysis

2131 For structural parts and components specified in [212] the drawings shall be supplemented withcalculations demonstrating that the structural strength complies with the requirements

2132 A complete listing of structural components and parts subjected to strength calculations shall besubmitted The list shall include information of

mdash types of failures considered (excessive yielding buckling fatigue fracture)mdash method of analysis performedmdash permissible stress or limit state method used

See also [43]

2133 The design calculations for hydraulic cylinders shall be based on the maximum obtainable pressure(safety valve setting) Alternatively if the maximum dynamic force applied on the crane is known this maybe used as basis for the design calculations In both cases different outreach positions shall be evaluated

22 Certification

221 Certificate requirements

2211 Certificates shall be issued as required by Table 2-2 for Shipboard cranesFor certificate definitions see [115] ldquoDefinitions Abbreviations Symbols and Referencesrdquo


DNV GL AS

Table 2-2 Certificate requirements for shipboard cranes

Object Certificatetype

Issued by Certification standard Additional description

Slewing bearings PC The Society 31 if maker is DNV GL approved

Hydraulic cylinders PC The Society Applicable also for accumulators

Sheaves PC Manufacturer Plastic sheaves to be deliveredwith the Societys TA and PC

Hoisting blocks PC The SocietyCG3 alternatively ILO form No3 issued by IACS class or FlagState administration

Hooks PC The SocietyCG3 alternatively ILO form No3 issued by IACS class or FlagState administration

Chains PC The SocietyCG3 alternatively ILO form No3 issued by IACS class or FlagState administration

Swivels PC The SocietyCG3 alternatively ILO form No3 issued by IACS class or FlagState administration

Shackles PC The SocietyCG3 alternatively ILO form No3 issued by IACS class or FlagState administration

Wire ropes PC The SocietyCG4 alternatively ILO form No4 issued by IACS class or FlagState administration

Winches PC The Society

Slewing gear PC Manufacturer Works product certificate

Transmission gearsand brakes PC Manufacturer

Works product certificateApplicable when transmittingbraking forces for hoisting andluffing For personnel handlingthe Societys PC required

Hydraulic components TR Manufacturer Except mountings

Unless otherwise specified the certification standard is this standard

PC = Product Certificate MC = Material Certificate TR = Test Report


DNV GL AS

Table 2-3 Additional certificate requirements for Crane notations



Control amp monitoringsystem PC The Society

ELmotors with rating100 kW and above PC The Society

Motor starters andfrequency conver-terswith rating 100 kWand above

PC TA The SocietyThe Societys product certificatesor the Societys type approvalcertificate

Slip rings 100 kW andabove PC The Society


PC = Product certificate TA = Type approval certificate MC = Material certificate TR = Test report

For general certification requirements see RU SHIP Pt1 Ch3 Sec4For a definition of the certification types see RU SHIP Pt1 Ch1 Sec4 and RU SHIP Pt1 Ch3 Sec5


DNV GL AS

SECTION 3 MATERIALS

31 General

311 This section contains provisions for the selection manufacture and testing as well as the specification of steelmaterials for various loading gear (including their foundations) and loose gear components They are basedon RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec1 [34]

312 Materials not covered by this section see list in [3215] are as far as possible to be dealt with inaccordance with the RU SHIP Pt2 according to recognized standards or by agreement

313 Suitable standardized steels which are not covered in Table 3-2 to Table 3-4 may also be used uponagreement with the Society

314 In the following the Societys rules stated in [311] are referred to as DNV GL rules for materials andwelding

32 Selection of materials

321 Selection criteria

3211 The selection of materials shall be carried out taking all material properties into consideration andthe Societys approval is normally effected by means of approved drawings

3212 When selecting materials of normal strength high strength and extra high strength steel for thevarious lifting appliances and loose gear components the following criteria shall be applied

mdash effect of the components on the mechanical strength of the assemblymdash type and magnitude of the load (static or dynamic loading internal stresses in the component stress

concentrations direction of the stress relative to the structure of the material)mdash design temperature (see [423])mdash chemical composition and weldabilitymdash mechanical properties of the material (dimensioning of components)mdash toughness of the material (resistance to brittle fracture at design temperature as verified by the notched-

bar impact test)mdash properties of the material perpendicular to the surface of the product (resistance to lamellar fracture)

It may be appropriate to apply further criteria to the selection of materials

3213 For shipboard lifting appliance application at temperatures below -10degC and in consideration of[423] steels shall be used which have sufficient toughness at these temperatures as verified by thenotched-bar impact test at the prescribed temperatureFor crane pedestals and crane pedestal sub-structures refer to rules RU SHIP Pt3 Ch1 Sec2 [354]


DNV GL AS

3214 If a component is subject to multi-axial stresses eg on greater material thicknessrsquo and largevolume welding connections steels with improved properties in the direction of thickness shall be selected

3215 Other materials such as stainless steels cast steel aluminium alloys timber or plastics shall bechosen and used in accordance with the criteria stated in [3212] and in consideration of their properties asand when applicable

322 Categorization of components

3221 Depending on their relevance to the overall safety of the structure components shall be allocated tothe following 3 categories see Table 3-1

3222 The categorization of components according to the criteria of Table 3-1 shall take place at the designstage and be submitted with the documents for approval

3223 Components not specifically mentioned in Table 3-1 shall be categorized in accordance with theloading conditions

323 Strength categories

3231 Materials for welded components shall be subdivided into the following strength categories on thebasis of their minimum yield strength

mdash normal strength materials with minimum yield strengths up to 265 Nmm2

mdash high strength materials with minimum yield strengths over 265 Nmm2 up to 420 Nmm2

mdash extra high strength materials with minimum yield strengths above 420 Nmm2

Table 3-1 Categorization of components into categories of order

Category of order Component description Component 1) (examples)

1st order

Components essential for the totalsafety of the structure as well asits safe operation and which whereapplicable are exposed to local oralso multi-axial stresses in addition toglobal stresses

mdash crane jibsmdash crane housesmdash crane columnsmdash foundationsmdash hydraulic cylinders for lifting gear and luffing gear as

well as for telescopic crane boomsmdash derrick heel bearing and rotary bearingmdash screws for slew ringsmdash load-bearing components of loose gearmdash axlesmdash winch drumsmdash winch frames

2nd order Components essential for safeoperation and functional capability

mdash hydraulic cylinders for slewing mechanismsmdash fittingsmdash lateral wind bracingsmdash rope-sheavesmdash hoisting eyes


DNV GL AS


3rd order

Components subjected to low loads orof minor importance respectively andwhich cannot be allocated to the 1st or2nd category of order

mdash cabinsmdash stairsmdash platformsmdash reinforcementsmdash consoles

1) For fasteners such as bolts and screws the category of order of the joined components is applicable In case ofdiffering categories of the joined components the higher category shall be chosen

3232 The strength category selected for the component concerned or the material allocated to thiscategory shall be indicated in the documents for approval The same applies where the material is requiredto meet special conditionsWhen selecting materials it shall be borne in mind that a decline in the mechanical characteristics shall beexpected as the product thickness increases

33 Manufacture and testing

331 Requirements for materials and products3311 ManufacturingAll materials and products shall be manufactured in accordance with sufficiently tested procedures whichguarantee that the required properties are achieved

3312 Chemical composition and required propertiesAll materials and items manufactured from them which shall be categorized as 1st or 2nd order componentsaccording to Table 3-1 shall comply with the requirements given in this section or other applicable provisionswith respect to chemical composition and mechanical properties

3313 Supply condition and heat treatmentAll products shall be supplied in the required heat-treated condition Where the final heat treatment isonly carried out at the final manufacturer the supply condition of the pre-material shall be appropriatelydocumented in the test certificates

3314 Absence of defectsMaterials and products shall not show defects which may adversely affect the use or further processing of thematerial more than insignificantly

3315 WeldabilityMaterials intended for the manufacture of welded constructions shall be weldable in terms of applyingcustomary workshop procedures If welding is only possible under special conditions the conditions shall bedetermined in consultation with the Society and verified by a weldability test

332 Testing3321 Chemical compositionThe chemical composition of the materials shall be verified by the manufacturer by means of heat analysisand shall include all elements for which limit values are set in this section or in other applicable provisions orwhich are added on as alloys in order to achieve the required mechanical propertiesIn general the manufacturers analysis report is accepted as proof of the chemical composition


DNV GL AS

3322 Mechanical and technological properties

33221 When the mechanical and technological properties are tested the general procedures and testsamples shall be in accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec3 Test requirements and results shall bepresented in international (SI) units

3323 Dimensions and absence of defects

33231 All products shall be checked by the manufacturer for compliance with the prescribed dimensionssurveyed in respect of possible defects and if required presented to the Societys surveyorUnless specially agreed in the following sections the Societys surveyor will carry out a random examinationof the dimensions and the surface conditions as deemed necessary

33232 Where non-destructive tests are required for the various types of products they shall be performedby the manufacturer in accordance with DNVGL CG 0051The results as well as the particulars of the test procedure shall be evaluated in accordance with recognizedacceptance criteria and attested by a certificateProducts not complying with the requirements shall be set aside by the manufacturer

3324 Proof of mechanical properties

33241 The results of the required tests on materials and products of 1st and 2nd order components shallbe attested by a certificate according to RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec2 [423] eg inspection certificate 31 asper ISO10474 if not specified otherwise in this standard

33242 The material certificates of products for components of 1st and 2nd order shall include specificdetails on manufacturing method composition heat treatment mechanical properties and marking

33243 Materials and products for 3rd order components may be certified non-specifically by themanufacturer in accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec2 [424] eg test report 22 as per ISO 10474Corresponding equivalent certificates may be accepted

3325 RetestingWhere the certificates for materials or products are insufficient or their identification or correlation with thetest certificates is not properly possible the Society may ask for retests on the delivery under the SocietyrsquossupervisionType and scope of the tests will be determined case by case based on the rules for Materials

3326 Marking

33261 Materials and products shall be marked by the manufacturer in such a way that a properidentification on the basis of the material certificates can be madeMaterials and products which have been tested under the Societys supervision also receive test stampsaccording to RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec2 [41]

33262 Cast steel and forgings shall be marked with the manufacturers stamp an abbreviation for thecast type and a mark or code number for the melting charge (eg the last three digits of the melting chargenumber) Any additional markings are a matter of agreement between customer and manufacturer of thematerial


DNV GL AS

34 Materials for welded components

341 General noteThe following requirements apply to plates profiles bars and hollow sections which are intended for themanufacture of welded 1st and 2nd order loading gear and loose gear components


3421 The criteria and provisions set out in [32] are applicable Steel materials shall comply with therequirements given in [343]

3422 Products made of aluminium or aluminium alloys shall comply with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec10 or therequirements given in the relevant standards or approved material specifications respectively

3423 For design temperatures TE down to and including -10degC the normal strength high strength andextra high strength materials set out in the Table 3-2 Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 can be used taking intoconsideration the thickness-related requirements for the material toughness

Table 3-2 Suitable materials for welded components in strength category normal strength

Applicable product thickness fordesign temperatures down to 10degC

Components belonging to one of theorder categories set out in Table 3-1

Material group DNV GL rulesmaterial standard

Strength class or steelgrade respectively

1st order 2nd order 3rd order

VL-A le 125 mm le 25 mm

VL-B le 25 mm le 50 mm

VL-D le 50 mm over 50 mm

Normal strengthhull structural steels

RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2Sec2 [3]

VL-E over 50 mm

no particularprovisions

Table 3-3 Suitable materials of strength category high strength for welded components

Applicable product thickness fordesign temperatures down to -10degC





VL-A27SVL-A32VL-A36VL-A40 le 25 mm le 50 mm

VL-D27SVL-D32VL-D36VL-D40 le 50 mm over 50 mmHigh strength hull

structural steelsRU SHIP Pt2 Ch2Sec2 [4]

VL-E27SVL-E32VL-E36VL-E40 over 50 mm



DNV GL AS






VL-F27SVL-F32VL-F36VL-F40 over 50 mm

Table 3-4 Suitable materials of strength category extra high strength for welded components






VL-A420 A460VL-A500 A550VL-

A620 A690le 25 mm le 50 mm

VL-D420 D460VL-D500 D550VL-

D620 D690le 50 mm le 70 mm

VL-E420 E460VL-E500 E550VL-

E620 E690le 70 mm

Extra high strengthsteels for weldedconstructionshullstructural steels


VL-F420 F460VL-F500 F550VL-

F620 F690le 70 mm

by specialagreement

Table 3-5 Percentage limits for the chemical composition of other normal strength and higherstrength carbon and carbon manganese steels

C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Cu Ni Al Other

022 055 160 004 004 030 008 030 040 008 1

1) Nb max 005 V max 010 Ti max 002

Nb + V + Ti max 012

343 Requirements for steel materials for welded components3431 Production methodThe steels shall be produced in accordance with a method approved by the Society The steels shall be fullykilled

3432 Chemical composition

34321 For normal strength and higher strength carbon and carbon-manganese steels the chemicalcomposition shall not exceed the maximum content given in Table 3-5 in the heat analysis


DNV GL AS

34322 For evaluation of the weldability or susceptibility to cold cracking respectively the carbonequivalent Caumlq or the Pcm-value shall be determined by the following equations

1

The values determined by the above equations shall not exceed the values given in Table 3-6

34323 For extra high strength or alloyed steels above strength class 460 the provisions of the Societysapproved material specifications apply

3433 Delivery condition and heat treatment

34331 For normal strength and high strength steels the provisions of RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [33] or RUSHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [43] apply respectively

34332 Extra high strength steels shall be delivered in principle in a heat-treated condition or treated bya method approved by the Society eg thermo-mechanically formed according to RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2[53]

34333 For austenitic stainless steels the provisions of RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec3 [4] apply

Table 3-6 Weldability requirements

Carbon equivalent []Strength category Strength class

general TM-rolledPcm []

Normal strength 235 045 by special agreement

275

315036

355 038High strength

390

045

040

420 048 045

460 053 046Extra high strength

over 460 by special agreement

by special agreement

3434 Mechanical properties

34341 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [34] RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [44] and RUSHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [54] apply as well as the requirements given in the relevant standards or approvedmaterial specifications

34342 The requirements relating to tensile strength yield strength or 02 proof stress respectivelyelongation and reduction in area at fracture shall be verified by tests

1 Value for determining the preheating temperature and cold crack sensitivity


DNV GL AS

3435 Impact energy

34351 The requirements relating to impact energy depend on the category of order of the componentunder consideration see [322] the product thickness the yield strength and the design temperature Therequirements shall be determined in accordance with Table 3-7 and Table 3-8

34352 Material selection shall be made based on the material specification such that the requirementscan be met by it For design temperatures down to ndash10degC the applicable product thicknesses for normalstrength high strength and extra high strength materials are given in the Table 3-2 Table 3-3 and Table 3-4

34353 The requirements relating to impact energy of steels apply similarly to components which areunwelded tension-stressed notched or otherwise subjected to a 3-axial stress state and shall be verified asprescribed by tests with an ISO-V-specimen

3436 Characteristics in direction of thicknessWhere steel plates and wide flats are required to have enhanced properties in the direction of thickness RUSHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [6] shall be observed

3437 Test of surface finish and dimensions

34371 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec2 [211] or the requirements given in therelevant standards or approved material specifications respectively applyCompliance with the requirements shall be confirmed by the manufacturer of the material

34372 The manufacturer shall check the products with respect to their external finish and dimensionsSurface defects may be removed mechanically weld repairs are not permitted

3438 Non-destructive tests (de-lamination proof)

34381 Plates and wide flats with enhanced properties in the direction of thickness shall be subjectedto an ultra-sonic test They shall meet the requirements for Test Class 2 laid down in the Stahl-Eisen-Lieferbedingungen 072 or of Test Class S2E3 according to EN 10160The test width of the rim zone depends on the product thickness but should have a minimum width of 50mm

34382 Flats products with a product thickness of t ge 15 mm which are used for the manufacture ofconnection flanges and rings for 1st order components shall undergo an ultrasonic surface test They shallmeet the requirements for Test Class 2 laid down in the Stahl-Eisen-Lieferbedingungen 072 or of Test ClassS2 in accordance with EN 10160 The test grid used shall not exceed 100 mm

34383 Connection flanges and rings made of flat products with a product thickness t ge 40 mm shallundergo a non-destructive test according to [3636]


DNV GL AS

344 Proof of mechanical properties of pipesThe mechanical properties of pipes shall be certified in accordance with [3334]

Table 3-7 Requirements for impact energy

Impact energy KV 1) [J] minStrength category Strength class

Longitudinal Transverse

Normal strength 235 27 20

275 29 21

315 31 22

355 34 24High strength

390 41 27

420 42 28

460 46 31

500 50 33

550 55 37

620 62 41

Extra high strength 2)

over 690 69 46

1) Mean value for 3 specimens There may be one lower value but not less than 70 of the mean value2) Up to 70 mm thickness larger thicknesses upon special agreement

Table 3-8 Test temperatures for the notched bar impact test (welded components)

Test temperature Tp [degC]

Components belonging to one of the order categories set out in Table 3-1Product thickness t [mm]


t le 125 Tp = TE + 30 2) minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 10 Tp = TE + 30

25 lt t le 50 Tp = TE ndash 10 Tp = TE + 10


over 70 Tp = TE ndash 30 3) Tp = TE ndash 10

No special provisions 1)

1) The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 or in the relevant standards or approved material specifications apply2) TE = design temperature3) Generally test temperatures below -60degC are not required (-50degC for δy le 355 Nmm2)


DNV GL AS

Table 3-9 Test temperatures for the notched bar impact test (non-welded components 1- or 2-axial stress state)




t le 125 minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 20 2)

25 lt t le 50 Tp = TE + 10

50 lt t le 70 Tp = TE + 10

over 70 Tp = TE ndash 10

No special provisions 1) No special provisions 1)

1) The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 or in the relevant standards or approved material specifications apply2) TE = design temperature

35 Materials for hydraulic cylinders

351 General notes

3511 The following provisions apply to pipes intended for the manufacture of cylinder jackets of 1st and2nd order hydraulic cylinders

3512 Where cylinder jackets are manufactured from flat products by rolling and fusion welding therequirements given in this section apply as and where relevant to the basic material In addition the DNV GLrules for welding shall be observed


3521 For the selection of material the selection cri-teria and provisions laid down in [32] apply Theselected materials shall comply with the requirements given in [353]

3522 Special steels or pipes manufactured by cold rolling shall comply with a material specificationapproved by the Society

353 Requirements3531 Chemical composition

35311 For the manufacture of welded hydraulic cylinders carbon and carbon-manganese steels shallpreferably be used the chemical composition of which complies with the limit values set out in [3432] Thecarbon equivalent Ceq shall not exceed 045

35312 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 [17] or RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 [4] applyrespectively


DNV GL AS

35313 Compliance with the requirements shall be verified by the material manufacturer Where the basematerial is not molten at the pipe manufacturer the manufacturers heat analysis of the base material can beaccepted For special steels the properties stated in the approved specifications apply


35321 For welded hydraulic cylinders the provisions of RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 [18] or RU SHIP Pt2Ch2 Sec5 [4] apply

35322 For hydraulic cylinders which are not produced by welding cold-rolled pipes can be used up to awall thickness of 15 mm and design temperatures down to and including ndash10 C if the requirements relatingto impact energy set out in [3535] are achieved and elongation A is 15 as a minimum


35331 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 [19] or RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 [4] of therequirements given in the relevant standards or approved material specifications apply respectively


3534 Technological test

35341 Pipes with longitudinal weld seams and seamless pipes of UTS = 490 Nmm2 shall undergo one ofthe ring test examinations specified in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec3 [35]

35342 In the case of fusion-welded pipes with an outer diameter over 200 mm a weld seam bend test inaccordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec3 [33] shall be carried out applying a bending mandrel diameter of3 times wall thickness t

3535 Impact energy

35351 The requirements relating to impact energy depend on the order category of the component underconsideration see [322] the product thickness and the design temperature and shall be verified by ISO-Vspecimen tests

35352 For product thicknesses up to and including 25 mm RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 apply or the requirementsgiven in the other applicable standards or approved material specifications

35353 Unless otherwise specified the materials used shall have an impact energy of 41 J (longitudinalspecimen) or 27 J (transverse specimen) at a test temperature as per Table 3-10

35354 For pipes manufactured by hot rolling up to a product thickness of 10 mm the impact energy testmay be dispensed with Below 6 mm an impact energy test is not generally required


35361 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 [111] and the requirements given in therelevant standards or approved material specifications respectively applyCompliance with the requirements shall be confirmed by the manufacturer of the material


DNV GL AS

Table 3-10 Test temperatures for the notched bar impact test (hydraulic cylinders)


Order categories of componentsProduct thickness t [mm]

1st order 2nd order

t le 25 Tp = TE +30 2) minus 1)

25 lt t le 50 Tp = TE ndash 10 Tp = TE +30

50 lt t le 70 Tp = TE ndash 20 Tp = TE ndash 10


1) The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec5 or the requirements given in the other applicable standards orapproved material specifications apply

2) TE = design temperature3) Generally test temperatures below -60degC are not required (-50degC for δy le 355 Nmm2)

35362 The manufacturer shall check the products with respect to their external finish and dimensionalproperties Weld repairs are not allowed

3537 Non-destructive testAll pipes shall be subjected to non-destructive tests along their total length The success of the test shall beconfirmed by the manufacturer

3538 Tightness testAll pipes shall be tested for leaks by the manufacturer The success of the test shall be confirmed by themanufacturer


3541 Mechanical properties of pipes shall be certified in accordance with [3334]

3542 Based on a special approval diverging from [33341] proof of mechanical properties of 1st orderhydraulic cylinders may also be furnished by certifying in accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec2 [423] W(works) Certificate eg inspection certificate 31 as per ISO 10474

36 Forgings

361 General notes

3611 The provisions of this section apply to steel forgings and rolled or forged slewing rings as well as forrolled or forged bars for piston rods of hydraulic cylinders The slewing rings shall conform to a specificationapproved by the Society

3612 For rolled or forged bars for the manufacture of bolts and nuts with proof of mechanical propertiesthe requirements given in [38] apply


DNV GL AS

362 Selection of materialsFor the selection of materials the selection criteria and provisions stated in [32] apply Accordingly slewingrings are considered to be 1st order componentsThe selected materials shall comply with the following requirements


36311 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec6 applyFor special steels and slewing rings the properties in the approved specifications apply

36312 Where forgings shall be used in welded structures preference shall be given to carbon and carbon-manganese steels whose chemical composition meets the limit values stated in [3432] The carbonequivalent Ceq thereof shall not exceed 045

36313 Compliance with the requirements shall be verified by the manufacturer of the material Where thebase material is not molten at the forge shop the manufacturers heat analysis of the base material can beaccepted

3632 Delivery condition and heat treatmentThe provisions of RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec6 apply


36331 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 and the requirements given in the other relevantstandards or approved material specifications apply respectively


3634 Impact energy

36341 For design temperatures down to and including -10degC the requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2Sec6 and the requirements given in the other relevant standards or approved material specifications applyrespectively

36342 Unless otherwise specified for design temperatures below -10degC the requirements given in Table3-11 apply

36343 The requirements related to impact energy shall be verified by tests with ISO-V specimens

Table 3-11 Impact energy requirements for forgings with design temperatures below -10degC

Minimum impact energyKV 1) [J]Components belonging to one of theorder categories set out in Table 3-1 longitudinal transverse

Test temperatureTP [degC]

1st order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE ndash 10 2)

2nd order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE + 10

3rd order No special requirements 3)


DNV GL AS



1) Mean value for 3 specimens One individual value may be below the mean value but not less than the individualvalues given in brackets

2) TE = design temperature3) The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec6 or the requirements given in the other applicable standards or

approved material specifications apply


36351 The manufacturer shall check the forgings at every stage of the process with respect to theirexternal finish and dimensional properties Forging defects shall be eliminated if they are not removed by thesubsequent mechanical treatment Weld repairs are not permitted

3636 Non-destructive test

36361 Forged or rolled rings shall be subjected to an ultrasonic test by the manufacturer and whereapplicable also to a surface crack test The tests shall be carried out in accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2Sec6

36362 The results of the non-destructive tests shall be documented by the manufacturer The test reportsshall be presented to a the Societys surveyor

364 Proof of mechanical propertiesThe mechanical properties of forgings shall be certified in accordance with [3334] Diverging from thisproof of the mechanical properties of slewing rings of ships cranes of groups A or B and of bars for pistonrods may be attested by a certificate in accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch1 Sec2 [423] W (works)Certificate eg inspection certificate 31 as per ISO 10474

37 Steel castings

371 General notesThe provisions in this section apply to steel castings for use in welded constructions

372 Selection of materialsFor the selection of materials the selection criteria and provisions stated in [32] apply The selectedmaterials shall comply with the following requirements


37311 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec8 applyCompliance with the requirements shall be verified by the manufacturer of the material by means of heatanalyses


DNV GL AS

37312 Where steel castings shall be used in welded structures preference shall be given to carbon andcarbon-manganese steels whose chemical composition meets the limit values stated in [3432] The carbonequivalent Ceq thereof shall not exceed 045

37313 For alloyed steel castings the properties stated in the approved specifications apply

3732 Delivery condition and heat treatmentThe requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec8 apply


37331 The requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec8 and the requirements given in the otherrelevant standards or approved material specifications apply respectively


3734 Impact energy

37341 For design temperatures down to and in-cluding -10degC the requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2Ch2 Sec8 and the requirements given in the other relevant standards or approved material specificationsapply respectively

37342 For design temperatures below ndash10degC the requirements given in Table 3-12 apply unless otherwisespecified



37351 The manufacturer shall check the steel castings with respect to their external finish anddimensional properties Casting defects shall be eliminated if they are not removed by the subsequentmechanical treatment RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec8 shall be observedRepair of defects by means of welding requires approval by the Society

3736 Non-destructive testSteel castings for 1st order components shall be subjected to an ultrasonic test by the manufacturer andwhere applicable also to a surface crack testThe tests shall be carried out in accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec8 The test reports shall bepresented to a the Societys surveyor during the inspection of the steel castings

374 Proof of mechanical propertiesThe mechanical properties of the steel castings shall be certified in accordance with [3334]

Table 3-12 Impact energy requirements for steel castings for design temperatures below -10degC

Components belonging to one of theorder categories set out in Table 3-1 Minimum impact energyKV 1)[J] Test temperatureTP [degC]

1st order 27 (19) TE ndash 10 2)

2nd order 27 (19) TE + 10

3rd order no special requirements 3)


DNV GL AS





38 Bolts and nuts

381 General noteThe provisions of this section apply to bolts and nuts and to non-alloyed and alloyed steel bars used in theirmanufacture The scope includes all bolts and nuts with nominal tensile strengths of gt 600 Nmm2 for whicha quality certificate is required

382 Manufacture

3821 Bolts and nuts can be produced by hot or cold forming or by machining Hot-formed and cold-formed bolts and nuts shall undergo heat treatment

3822 Heat treatment can be dispensed with in the case of hot-formed bolts and nuts made of non-alloyedsteels if they shall be used at normal ambient temperatures in accordance with Table 3-13 and a uniformstructure is brought about by the hot-forming process

383 Requirements

3831 Bolts and nuts shall comply with the requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec6 [92] or with therequirements given in recognized standards

3832 Notwithstanding [3831] machining steels with enhanced S- P- or Pb contents may be usedfor bolts and nuts provided that no requirements relating to heat resistance or impact strength at lowtemperatures exist

3833 Chemical compositionFor the chemical composition the requirements given in RU SHIP Pt2 Ch2 Sec6 [94] apply In additionthe carbon content of the steels shall not exceed 055 as established by product analysis

3834 Elongation at fractureThe elongation at fracture A shall conform to the characteristic values for the strength class or steel grade Itshall in any case not be less than 8 for ferritic steels or 30 for austenitic steels

3835 Impact energyThe impact energy shall conform to the characteristic values of the steel grade but shall at a minimummeet the requirements given in Table 3-13

3836 Expansion (of nuts)The expansion of ferritic steel nuts shall be at least 4 with non-machining forming processes and atleast 5 with machining methods The expansion requirements for austenitic steel nuts shall be speciallyspecified Proof of expansion is subject to random tests


DNV GL AS

3837 Non-destructive testBolts used for the assembly of 1st order components shall be subjected to a crack test by the manufacturerThe results of the non-destructive tests shall be documented by the manufacturer

384 Proof of mechanical propertiesThe mechanical properties of bolts and nuts shall be certified in accordance with [3334]

Table 3-13 Impact energy requirements for bolts and nuts

Minimum impact energyService or designtemperature 1)

Steel grade or nominaltensile strength KV [J] KU [J]

Test temperatureTp [degC]

lt 800 Nmm2 32 30

ge 800 Nmm2 32 30

ge 1000 Nmm2 25 25Ferritic

ge 1200 Nmm2 18 20

-10degC

Austenitic 41 minus

Alloyed and tempered 41 minus

Non-alloyed 41 minus

+20degC

Below -10degC to -55degC All 41 minus 10degC below lowestdesign temperature

1) At increased temp gt +50degC

Alloyed and tempered KV 52 J ndash Tp +20degC


DNV GL AS

SECTION 4 DESIGN AND CALCULATION PRINCIPLES

41 General

411 This section contains provisions of general validity governing the design and calculation of lifting applianceson seagoing shipsThe special provisions contained in the following sections of this standard shall be observed additionally orwith priority respectively

412 Calculations according to established calculation principles or standards eg according to EN 13001 or EN13852 may be accepted if the particular properties of seagoing ships as stated in these rules have beentaken into consideration

42 Design principles

421 General notes4211 Prerequisites for the design

42111 Determination and specification of the operating and seagoing conditions on which the designis based are in principle the responsibility of the customer and the manufacturer The shipyard shall beconsulted as well The specifications decided upon are of considerable importance for the reliable operationand expected service life

42112 The intended use of ships and lifting appliances the shipping routes and the operational area highship speeds and the shape of the ships hull shall be considered as required

4212 Design criteria for operating lifting appliancesEssential design criteria in addition to the statements in [422] to [425] are in particular

mdash the total service life ie the number of loading cycles within the expected service lifemdash the loading condition ie the relative or percentage frequency at which the various hoist loads are

reached or exceeded in the total service lifemdash the type of service eg handling containers general or palletized cargo grabs or provision under harbour

or sea conditions

4213 Design criteria for the status out of operation

42131 Essential criteria for the design are in relation to [4212] increased inclinations of the supportingstructure and increased wind loads as well as ship accelerations

42132 In particular cases loads caused by vibrations shall be considered which may be generated eg byship machinery or seagoing influences


DNV GL AS

422 Environmental conditions

4221 Special attention shall be given to the operation site weather conditions humidity dust aggressivemedia oil and salt-bearing air exhaust gases and exhaust gas heat vibrations etc if known or specified bycontract

4222 Machinery and electrical installations shall be dimensioned with respect to temperature and humidityat least for the following limit values if no stricter limit values are specified

a) in enclosed spaces

mdash air temperature 0degC to +45degCmdash relative air humidity 80

b) on the open deck

mdash air temperature

mdash lifting appliances in operation -10degC to +45degCmdash lifting appliances out of operation -25degC to +45degC

mdash relative air humidity 80 and influence of salt spray

4223 Vibrations are in general not part of dimensioning of the shipboard lifting appliances Whereshipboard lifting appliances are prone to vibrations vibration analyses shall be performed

4224 Where necessary manufacturer ship yard or operator shall specify the environmental conditions inparticular

423 Design temperature4231 Definitions

42311 The design temperature is the mean value of the lowest daily average temperature in theoperational area of a lifting appliance The definitions of [42312] to [42314] apply

42312 The daily average temperature is the mean value of day and night temperature

42313 The lowest daily average temperature is the lowest value of daily average temperature measuredduring one yearWhere the duration of operation is limited with respect to seasons of the year the lowest value of dailyaverage temperature measured during the period of operation shall be used

42314 The mean value of the lowest daily average temperature is the statistical mean value measuredduring an observation period of at least 20 years

4232 Application

42321 The design temperature of shipboard lifting appliances not operated in closed heatedcompartments shall be at least ndash10degC

42322 Where the design temperature is specified below ndash10degC this shall be explicitly stated by theshipyard or the manufacturer of the lifting appliance in the drawings or in other documents submitted to theSociety for approval It also shall be considered with respect to material selection and processing (welding)as well as with respect to dimensioning of systems sensitive to low temperatures


DNV GL AS

42323 The lowest applicable design temperature shall not be below ndash30degC

42324 In extreme cases shipboard lifting appliances may be operated at an environmental temperaturewhich is lower than design temperature In this case the following conditions shall be complied with

a) The environmental temperature shall not be less than 20degC below design temperatureb) The number nlow of the lifting operations at low temperatures is yearly to be limited as follows

nlow le N 1000

N = total number of all lifting operations in the expected life time for the lifting appliance (to betaken from load assumptions of the fatigue analysis)

If the fatigue analysis for a lifting appliance could be dispensed with then the number of liftingoperations at low temperatures shall be limited to nlow le 20 per year

c) The manufacturer of the lifting appliance shall agree on the low temperature Where necessary thesusceptibility of certain components to low temperatures |shall be considered

424 Load assumptions4241 General notes

42411 Shipboard lifting appliances are subject to other and partly greater loads than lifting appliancesonshore This includes amongst others ship inclinations seagoing accelerations as well as increased windloads

42412 For the design in principle all loads shall be considered which act upon the lifting appliance ldquoinoperationrdquo and in the out of operation state

42413 The design as well as the calculation and dimensioning of all shipboard lifting appliances shall bebased on the following load assumptions if applicable

42414 The following sections of this standard may contain further load assumptions which are then to beobserved additionally or given preference where applicable for the lifting appliance under consideration

42415 Where shipboard lifting appliances are exposed to special loads which are not stated in thisstandard then these shall be taken as a basis for design and dimensioningSpecial loads shall be indicated expressly by the shipyard or manufacturer of the lifting appliance in thedrawings or in other documents submitted to the Society for approval Regarding the proof according to[438] the partial safety factor to be considered shall be agreed with the Society

4242 Dead loads

42421 Dead loads according to [41512] shall be calculated using recognized standards such as eg EN1991-1-1 or shall be determined by weighing

42422 Dead loads are calculated by multiplying the mass by the acceleration of gravity g = 981 mssup2

4243 Dynamic forces

42431 Dynamic forces due to drives424311 The acceleration of lifting appliance components andor useful loads due to drives generatespositive or negative dynamic forces depending on definition which shall be calculated as follows

force [N] = mass [kg] acceleration [ms2]


DNV GL AS

424312 Braking forces due to drives shall be assumed as negative dynamic forces424313 Dynamic forces due to drives may normally be assumed as quasi-static loads They are specifiedin [5324] as dimensioning loads

42432 Seagoing dynamic forces424321 Horizontal dynamic forces due to motions of a floating body shall be considered for shipboardlifting appliances used in occasional sea operations in accordance with the method described in [5325]424322 Vertical dynamic forces due to motions of a floating body shall be considered if the calculation ismade in according with [53251] If AppA is applied they are included in the method used therein if Table5-2 is applied they may be ignored424323 Seagoing dynamic forces may be assumed as quasi-static loads

4244 Inclinations of the supporting structure

42441 Lifting appliances in operation424411 Lifting appliances shall be dimensioned for operation at the static minimum inclinationsaccording to Table 4-1Exceptions from this provision are defined in [24416]424412 Dynamic loads due to motions of the supporting structure shall be considered in according with[5325]

424413 Static inclinations α (= heel) and β (= trim) shall be assumed to be acting simultaneously424414 Simplifying it may be assumed that heel and trim are superimposed as follows

ε

The resulting angle ε shall be assumed to have the most unfavourable direction

Table 4-1 Static minimum inclinations

Static minimum inclinationType of floating body

Heel angle α Trim angle β

Ships and vessels having ship-shape properties plusmn 5deg plusmn 2deg

Barges of length less than 4 times breadth andcatamarans plusmn 3deg plusmn 2deg

Floating docks plusmn 2deg plusmn 2deg

Semi-submersibles plusmn 3deg plusmn 3deg

424415 The values of Table 4-1 assume sufficient stability of the floating body Where larger inclinationsshall be expected during operation of the lifting appliance then these shall be taken as the basis424416 In special cases to be proven by measurements or calculations the values may be lower thanthose in Table 4-1For dimensioning the inclinations which are determined shall be increased by 1deg heel and 05deg trim

42442 Lifting appliances out of operation424421 For the calculation of dynamic forces in the out of operation state the dynamic inclinations aswell as the respective accelerations of the floating body shall be observedFor this purpose the dynamic inclinations of the floating body according to Table 4-1 shall be assumed424422 Simplifying the calculation of dynamic forces may be performed according to AppA


DNV GL AS

4245 Wind loads

42451 General notes424511 Shipboard lifting appliances shall in general only be operated up to a mean wind speed ofapproximately 80 of the dimensioning wind speedAt higher wind speeds the loading gear shall be taken out of operation and to be stowed in the stowingposition424512 Simplifying the statements in [42452] and [42453] are based on a constant mean windspeed acting in any assumed direction and height424513 Static or dynamic calculations of wind loads in accordance with recognized rules or standards orcalculations with suitable wind load parameters may be accepted by the Society

42452 Calculation of wind loadThe wind load LW acting on a structure shall be assumed to have the most unfavourable direction and shallbe calculated using the following formula

[N]

q = v216 [Nm2] (dynamic pressure)v = wind speed according to [42453] [ms]cf = form coefficient according to [42454] [-]Aw = wind area [m2]

42453 Wind speeds424531 The determination of wind load shall be based on the wind speeds according to Table 4-2

Table 4-2 Wind speeds

Wind speedMode of operation of the lifting appliance

in operation out of operation

Shipboard lifting appliances harbour operation 20 ms 50 ms 1

Shipboard lifting appliances sea operation 25 ms 50 ms 1

1) Not to apply for topped cranes

424532 For topped shipboard lifting appliances out of operation the wind speed shall be calculated as afunction of height according to the following formula

hL = height of the centre of area of the boom above waterline [m]

424533 The wind speed v is assumed to be constant along the height

424534 Floating cranes shall be treated like shipboard lifting appliances


DNV GL AS

42454 Form coefficientsThe form coefficients may be determined according to AppC or simplified as follows

cf = 16 for rolled profiles and box girderscf = 13 for rectangular areas of closed super structures like eg engine housescf = 12 for cylindrical structural elements

42455 Wind areas located behind one anotherThe wind loads of areas located behind one another may be determined according to AppC or simplified asfollowsFor wind loads of areas located behind one another the wind load of the respective area lying behind may beassumed to be 75 of the area lying in front From the 9th area onwards the wind load remains constant at10

42456 Wind load on the useful load424561 The wind load acting on the useful load shall be calculated according to [42452] based onthe largest wind area of the useful load and acting in the most unfavourable direction

424562 Where a more precise information on the useful load is not available the wind load may becalculated using the following values for cf ∙ Aw

LN = useful load [t]

4246 Snow and ice loads

42461 The manufacturer has to specify by agreement with the client if and to what extent snow and iceloads shall be considered for individual operating conditions Generally lifting appliances with ice accretionshall not be operated

42462 Where ice accretion shall be considered and no empiric or specified values are available simplifieda general ice accretion of 3 cm thickness may be assumed for all parts of the construction which are exposedto the weather conditions

42463 The specific weight of the ice is assumed to be 700 kgm3 The specific weight of snow is assumedto be 200 kgm3

42464 In the case of ice load the wind load shall be related to the area increased by ice accretion

4247 Loads due to temperatureParts of the structure or other structural elements which cannot expand or contract freely shall be avoided ifpossible Otherwise the lower and upper temperature shall be agreed with the Society and the temperatureloads shall be considered in the calculated strength analyses


DNV GL AS

425 Special provisions4251 Conveyance of persons in the harbourThe following provisions imply safety devices which are required in principle in [99] and Sec13 such as eg

mdash emergency shut-down switches or buttonsmdash control elements return automatically to the neutral positionmdash load and load moment reducing motions when safety devices apply

42511 The nominal load (LNe) of shipboard lifting appliances for the conveyance of persons shall be atleast twice the sum of the dead load and nominal load for the means of conveyance of persons used

42512 The maximum lowering and hoisting speed for the conveyance of persons shall not exceed 05 msThe control system shall be capable of observing this speed limitation

42513 At a lowering speed of more than 03 ms the control system shall be capable of setting-downgently the means of conveying persons

42514 The minimum lowering and hoisting speed for the conveyance of persons shall not be less than005 ms

42515 Means of conveying persons shall be attached to the loading gear by secured shackles or otherapproved fixed connections Cargo hooks with seawater-resistant safety latch are permitted if compatiblewith the master link of the meansAutomatically release hooks for life-saving appliances are also not permissible

42516 Hoisting and luffing winches of shipboard lifting appliances for conveying persons shall be equippedwith a mechanical second brake The second brake shall be independent of the primary brake

42517 If hydraulic cylinders are used for luffing knuckling or telescoping of a boom they shall beequipped with hydraulic restriction systems Alternatively two independent hydraulic cylinders can be usedof which each single one shall be capable to hold the nominal load resulting from the conveyance of persons(SWL (M)) if the other hydraulic cylinder failsSafety against failure shall then be verified for loading condition III5 as per [552]

42518 Special devices shall be provided to rescue passengers from a means of conveying persons in caseof the failure of the drive

4252 Conveyance of personnel at seaFor the conveyance of personnel at sea the provisions of [4251] apply with the exception of [42512]and [42513] In addition the following provisions shall be observed

42521 Aside from an emergency the following environmental conditions shall be adhered to unlessdeviating conditions are agreed upon

mdash average wind speed le 10 msmdash significant wave height le 2 mmdash visibility conditions daylight or sufficient illumination

42522 Shipboard lifting appliances for occasional operations at sea shall be equipped with a manualswitch which allows switching between normal operation and conveyance of personnel if provided for theconveyance of personnel


DNV GL AS

42523 Shipboard lifting appliances according to [42522] shall comply with the following conditions inthe conveyance of personnel mode if applicable

mdash automatic de-activation of safety systems for release of the cargo runner (emergency system for hookingon of cargo hooks)

mdash automatic de-activation of active or passive heave compensatorrsquos These are however permissible for thehandling of work boats if they are adjusted to these boats

mdash in addition to the main power supply an emergency power supply shall be available to ensure mainfunctions of the lifting appliance (lifting luffing slewing telescoping and knuckling) at a minimum speedof 10 of the nominal operational speed in the mode conveyance of personnel Exceptions (eg verylarge cranes) are individually to be agreed with the Society

4253 Sea lashing

42531 All mobile parts of shipboard lifting appliances such as derricks crane booms trolleys gantriesetc shall have a special park and stowage position where they can be lashed to be seaworthyExceptions like eg free hanging or topped booms require approval by the Society case by case

42532 Special stowage positions shall be provided for mobile lifting appliances They shall be selectedsuch that the prospective loads like eg ship accelerations wind and wash are minimized

42533 The lifting appliances as well as their support and lashing devices shall be sufficiently dimensionedfor the loads in the out of operation state

43 Calculation principles

431 Basic requirements

4311 All strength analyses shall correspond to generally recognized rules of statics dynamics and strengthof materials

4312 Details on system measurements sections materials used etc in the drawings shall agree with thecorresponding calculations

4313 Mobile loads shall be assumed in the most unfavourable positions for the structural elementconsidered

4314 Where non-linear relations inherent to the system exist between loads and stresses the stressdetermination shall be performed according to the 2nd order theory for γpfold loads with consideration ofdeformations

4315 Calculations according to 2nd order theory shall be based on a reduced value for dimensioning theYoungs modulus

Ed = Ek γm

Ed = dimensioning value of Youngs modulusEk = significant value of the Youngs modulusγm = partial safety factor for resistance values according to [43743]

Explanations on this can be found in [4371] and [4372]


DNV GL AS

432 Proofs required

4321 Normally the following proofs shall be submitted for all lifting appliances

mdash proof of structural safety according to [44]mdash proof of stability according to [45]mdash proof of fatigue strength according to [46]mdash proof of suitability for use according to [47]

4322 The following sections of this standard may contain more detailed andor additional information onproofs required for the lifting appliance considered there

433 Materials4331 General notes

43311 The materials intended for use shall be indicated in the calculation

43312 Table 3-2 to Table3-4 show a selection of steels generally approved by the Society for plates andprofilesOther steels may be approved

43313 Regarding the materials for machinery elements axes shafts bolts etc as well as for non-ferrousmetals the DNV GL rules for materials apply

43314 Regarding bolts and nuts the provisions in Sec3 [38] apply

4332 Calculated yield strength

43321 General notes433211 The strength analyses according to this standard refer as a failure criterium to the yield strengthof the material433212 For metallic materials without significant yield strength ReH the yield strength Rp02 is usedinstead433213 To avoid brittle fracture the materials used shall be sufficiently ductileThis means that the failure of a structural element due to overload may possibly be indicated sooner by largeplastic deformations433214 For less ductile materials with a small ratio of tensile strength Rm over yield strength ReHadditional safety against reaching or exceeding the tensile strength is stipulatedThis is achieved in strength analyses by taking into consideration a reduced value for the yield strength ndash thecalculated yield strength fyr

43322 Steels433221 The calculated yield strength fyr is determined as follows

fyr = 083 ∙ Rm le ReH (or le Rp 02)

Rm = tensile strength [Nmm2]ReH = yield strength [Nmm2]Rp02 = 02-yield strength [Nmm2]

433222 Where austenitic steels are used with a ratio Rp02Rm le 05 subject to special approval by theSociety for dimensioning the 1-yield strength Rp10 may by applied instead of Rp02


DNV GL AS

43323 Aluminium alloys433231 If aluminium alloys suitable for seawater stated in the DNV GL rules for materials are used theyield strength is calculated as follows

fyr = 037 ∙ (Rp 02 + Rm) le Rp 02

Rm = tensile strength [Nmmsup2]Rp02 = 02-yield strength [Nmmsup2]

433232 In the case of welded connections the respective mechanical properties in the welded conditionshall be assumed If these values are not available the corresponding values in the soft condition shall beassumed

434 4341 Hole weakening by bolts

43411 The sections to be considered are the net sections (including hole deduction) for all structuralelements stressed by tension

43412 A calculated deduction due to holes may be dispensed with for all sections stressed by pressure andshear if

mdash the maximum hole clearance is 1 mm andmdash the deformations of the structure shall not be limited

43413 Where the conditions according to [43412] are complied with the section values of sectionswhich are subject to bending may be determined simplified as followsFor the tension side the net section and for the compression side the gross section shall be taken For thecentre of gravity the centre of gravity of the gross section shall be assumed

43414 Elastic deformations are normally to be determined using the gross sections

4342 Effective breadth of platingWhen determining section values the effective breadth of plating shall be taken into consideration ifnecessary The calculation of the effective breadth of plating may eg be conducted in according withEurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-5)

435 Particularities4351 Local stressesThe local stresses in the area of force transmissions and discontinuities such as eg diversions of forcesteps of a section cut-outs etc see Figure 4-1 shall be proven separately and superimposed on the globalstressesNotes regarding local stresses due to wheel loads may be taken from [495]

4352 Tie rodsTie rods which may be subject to compressive stresses due to small deviations from the regular loadassumptions shall be proven in the same way as compression members


DNV GL AS

436 Verification procedures4361 General noteIn this standard the methods of partial safety factors and permissible stresses are allowed to be used forverification

4362 Partial safety factor methodThe partial safety factors method is generally applicable It enables weighting of different loads and is thestandard proof of this standard

4363 Method of permissible stressesThe method of permissible stresses is not generally applicable and therefore shall not be used if one or moreof the following structural characteristics exist

a) non-linearity between loads and stresses (compression-stressed structural elements with major defor-mations requiring proof according to 2nd order theory)

b) dead loads with a favourable effect (counter- weightsoverhanging engine houses)c) pre-stresses due to

mdash weights (besides b) in particular mobile weights)mdash ropestension elementsmdash bolts (in general only relevant in special cases)

d) lifting appliance is not fixed and stability against turn-over has not been proven by tests

437 Proof by the method of partial safety factors4371 General notesThe method of partial safety factors distinguishes between safety factors γm relating to resistance values andsafety factors γP relating to loads

4372 Definitions

43721 Loads437211 Loads is the term for all external influences which impact on a structure437212 Loads can eg be dead loads hoisting loads dynamic loads temperature changes or enforceddeformations437213 The loads to be considered in each individual case are regulated in the following sections for therespective lifting appliance

43722 Stresses437221 Stresses is the term for the effects of loads on a structure437222 Stresses can eg be stresses and deformations437223 Stresses are marked by the index Sldquo

43723 Load bearing capacities437231 Load bearing capacities is the term for the permissible limit values of a stress437232 Load bearing capacities are marked by the index Rldquo

43724 Resistance valuesResistance values are material properties like eg yield strength tensile strength and Youngs modulus bywhich eg load bearing capacities and stiffness of cross-sections are calculated


DNV GL AS

43725 Characteristic values437251 Characteristic values of loads or resistance values do not include safety factors437252 Characteristic values are marked by the index k

43726 Dimensioning values437261 Dimensioning values of loads L are the characteristic values increased by the partial safetyfactor γP

Ld = γP ∙ Lk

437262 Dimensioning values of resistance values WG are the characteristic values reduced by thepartial safety factor γm

WGd = WGk γm

437263 Dimensioning values are marked by the index dldquo

4373 General proof formatIn general the degree of utilization (stressutilization ratio) shall be calculated The proof is demonstrated ifthe degree of utilization is not larger than 100

As an alternative stress and utilization can be compared directly The proof is demonstrated if the stress isnot larger than the utilization

Sd Rd le 1 or Sd le Rd

Sd = dimensioning value of load determined from the impacts multiplied by varying partial safety factorsγP

Rd = dimensioning value of load bearing capacity determined from the resistance values divided by thepartial safety factor γm

4374 Partial safety factors

43741 For the calculation the loads which lifting appliance is exposed to are increased by partial safetyfactors of varying magnitude

43742 The partial safety factors for loads are given in Sec5 together with the load combinations to beverified

43743 The partial safety factor for resistance values γm is always

γm = 110unless stated otherwise in individual cases

4375 Load combinations

43751 Loads acting simultaneously according to [424] shall be increased by the partial safety factorsaccording to [4374] and to be superimposed in load combinations

43752 Notes and explanations regarding load combinations are given in the following sections inconnection with the required proofs


DNV GL AS

438 Proof by the method of permissible stresses4381 General notes

43811 The method of permissible stresses is only applicable under certain prerequisites It is regarded tobe a special case within the method of partial safety factors see [4362] and [4363]

43812 Depending on the type of design differing results are possible with the two methods of proofTherefore the Society reserves the right in individual cases to apply a proof using the method of partialsafety factors

4382 Proof formatsWithout partial safety factors the following proof formats exist

Figure 4-1 Examples for local force transmissions and discontinuities

fyr = calculated yield strength according to [4332]γS = global safety factor depending on the load combinations according to Table 5-4 and Table 5-5

load combination I γS = 148

load combination II γS = 134

load combination III γS = 122


DNV GL AS

44 Proof of structural safety

441 General notes

4411 The following statements shall be observed for proofs load bearing structural elements made of steeland aluminium as well as for proofs of special machinery elements according to the method of partial safetyfactors

4412 Calculation and dimensioning of machinery elements which are not dealt with may be performedusing recognized standards or generally recognized technology rules

442 Scope of proofs4421 General notes

44211 The ultimate strength analysis consists of two partial proofs

mdash the general stress analysis according to [4422] andmdash the proof of stability according to [4423]

44212 The internal forces and moments on which the proof of the structural element being consideredcross-section or a weldbolt are based shall include all impacting static and dynamic load components

44213 The proofs of structural safety shall be shown in each case for the most unfavourable loadcombination according to [4375]

44214 If load combinations are not taken into consideration or proofs not carried out this shall besubstantiated in writing unless the reasons for doing so are obvious

4422 General stress analysisThe general stress analysis is the proof of safety against reaching the calculated yield strength according to[4332]

44221 General notes442211 The designations of axes of structural elements used in this standard as well as forces andmoments which may have an impact on a structural element are illustrated in Figure 4-2

Figure 4-2 Axes of structural elements and possible loads


DNV GL AS

Fxyz = Force in direction of the respective axis [N]Mxyz = Moment around the respective axis [Nmm]σxy = Normal stress in direction of the respective axis [Nmm2]τ = Shear stress [Nmm2]

44222 Equivalent stresses442221 Where normal and shear stresses act simultaneously in a cross-section the equivalent stress σvshall be calculated from the respective allocated stresses Spatially oriented stresses shall be broken down tothe co-ordinate system according to Figure 4-2442222 Generally the equivalent stress σv shall be calculated according to the distortion energy theory(von Mises) as follows

442223 In the case of biaxial stresses the calculation of σv is simplified as follows

442224 In the case of uniaxial stresses the calculation of σv is simplified as follows

44223 Format of the strength analysis442231 The strength analysis shall be performed for both the individual stress components as well asthe equivalent stresses analogous to [4373] as follows

σSd σRd le 1 σSd le σRd

τSd τRd le 1 τSd le τRd

σvSd σRd le 1

or

σvSd le σRd

σSd

τSd

σvSd

=dimensioning values of the stresses basedon the loads multiplied by partial safetyfactors γP

= dimensioning values of the permissiblestresses (load bearing capacity)


DNV GL AS

fyr = calculated yield strength [4332]

γm = partial safety factor according to[43743]

442232 Where more accurate strength analyses according to recognized calculation methods egaccording to the method of finite elements are conducted or where test results exist the Society maydepending on the facts agree to an increase of the locally permissible stresses

4423 Proof of stability

44231 Proof of calculated safety against lateral buckling lateral torsional buckling or buckling shall beconducted according to a recognized calculation principle or standard for all essential combinations of loads

44232 Proofs of stability for steel constructions may be conducted according to Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1EN 1993-1-3 EN 1993-1-5 EN 1993-1-7)

44233 Proofs of stability for aluminium alloy constructions may be conducted according to Eurocode 9 (EN1999-1-1 EN 1999-1-4 EN 1999-1-5)

44234 Proofs of stability for constructions made of austenitic steel may be conducted according toEurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-4)

44235 When applying Eurocodes for stability proofs the following shall be taken into consideration

mdash Instead of safety factor γM1 according to the Eurocode the value γm according to [43743] shall beused

mdash Instead of the yield strength the calculated yield strength fyr according to [4332] shall be used

45 Proof of safety against overturning

451 General notes

4511 Lifting appliances and parts of lifting appliances not connected integrally to the residual structureshall be sufficiently safe against overturning at all timesFor mobile lifting appliances also whereat operating on a circular track safety against overturning shall beproven in all cases

4512 Safety against overturning of lifting appliances is a measure of its resistance to overturning anddrifting eg by wind andor inclinations of the supporting structureThe many factors which influence safety against overturning in the longitudinal and transverse directionsinclude dead load and dead load distribution track gauge wheel base Safe Working Load and load radiusmotor and braking power and the deformations which occur under load

4513 Lifting appliances which travel on rails shall be equipped with devices to prevent overturning andshall generally be stable even without such devices

4514 Proof of safety against overturning ensures safe working if the equipment is normally and carefullyoperatedIt should be noted that the danger of overturning arising from inexpert or incorrect operation cannot beprecluded no matter how stringent the conditions for proof of safety against overturning


DNV GL AS

452 Proof of safety against overturningWith regard to safety against overturning a distinction is made between lifting appliance on rails and fork lifttrucksWhere the danger of overturning exists for parts of non-mobile lifting appliances the proof shall bedemonstrated analogously to [4521]

4521 Lifting appliances on rails

45211 Mathematical proof is regarded as sufficient for the safety against overturning of lifting applianceson railsThis proof shall be conducted using the method of partial safety factors according to [437]Thereby the partial safety factors for loads according to [437] are generally to be considered

45212 Lifting appliances are deemed to be sufficiently safe against overturning if - relative to therespective most unfavourable tilting edge - in the most unfavourable proof and in consideration of the partialsafety factors the sum of restoring moments is larger than the sum of overturning moments

The following condition shall be observed

= sum of restoring moments

= sum of overturning moments

45213 Where desirable or necessary eg in the case of existing lifting appliances proof of safety againstoverturning may also be provided by a special loading testThis test shall in each case be agreed with the Society who will also determine the magnitude of the testload and the nature of the test (static andor dynamic)

45214 Devices to prevent overturning shall be dimensioned for the overturning moment which wouldresult from twice the static hoist load or where lifting appliances without prevention devices are not safeagainst overturning in accordance with the forces occurring in operation

4522 Fork lift trucksThe safety against overturning of fork lift trucks shall be determined on an inclinable platform for each newtypeOn the basis of the results obtained from these measurements the manufacturer shall on demand reviseand certify the conditions ensuring stable operation on inclined planes (due to inclinations of the ship or thecamber and sheer of decks)

46 Proof of fatigue strength

461 General notes

4611 The proof of sufficient fatigue strength i e the strength against crack initiation under dynamic loadsduring operation is useful for judging and reducing the probability of crack initiation of structural membersduring the design stage


DNV GL AS

Due to the randomness of the load process the spreading of material properties and fabrication factors andto the effects of ageing crack initiation cannot be completely excluded during later operation Thereforeamong other things periodical surveys are necessary

4612 The fatigue strength analysis shall be conducted according to requirements as given in this sectionor subject to agreement with the Society according to another recognized basic calculation principle

462 Application

4621 The fatigue strength analysis is in principle required for all structural elements connections andsupporting structures of lifting appliances which are exposed to dynamic loads for the states in operationand out of operation and may be demanded by the Society for any type of lifting appliance and operationalcondition

4622 The provisions stated here are applicable to constructions made of normal and high-strength hullstructural steels austenitic steels as well as aluminium alloys Other materials such as extra high-strengthstructural steel and cast steel can be treated upon agreement with the Society in an analogous manner byusing appropriate design S-N curves

4623 Low cycle fatigue problems are not subject to the following rules and shall be specially consideredwhere applicable

463 Definitions

Figure 4-3 Dynamic load cycle

Δσ = applied stress range [Nmm2] (see also Figure 4-3) defined asΔσ = σmax ndash σmin

σmax = maximum upper stress [Nmm2] of a stress cycleσmin = maximum lower stress [Nmm2] of a stress cycleΔσmax = applied peak stress [Nmm2] range within a stress range spectrumσm = mean stress [Nmm2] defined asσm = (σmax + σmin) 2Δσp = permissible stress range [Nmm2]Δτ = Corresponding range [Nmm2] for shear stress


DNV GL AS

n = number of applied stress cyclesN = number of endured stress cycles according to S-N curve (= endured stress cycles under constant

amplitude loading)ΔσR = fatigue strength reference value of S-N curve at 2 middot 106 cycles of stress range [Nmm2]

(= FAT class according to Table B-1)fn = factor considering stress spectrum and number of cycles for calculation of permissible stress

rangeΔσRc = corrected fatigue strength reference value of S-N curve at 2 middot 106 stress cycles [Nmm2]D = cumulative damage ratio

464 Quality requirements (fabrication tolerances)

4641 The detail classification of the different welded joints as given in Table B-1 is based on theassumption that the fabrication of the structural detail or welded joint respectively corresponds in regard toexternal defects at least to quality group B according to DIN EN ISO 5817 and in regard to internal defects atleast to quality group C

4642 Relevant information shall be included in the manufacturing document for fabrication If it is notpossible to comply with the tolerances given in the standards this shall be accounted for when designingthe structural details or welded joints respectively In special cases an improved manufacture as stated in[4641] may be required eg stricter tolerances or improved weld shapes see also [46924]

4643 The following stress increase factors km for considering significant influence of axial and angularmisalignment are already included in the fatigue strength reference values ΔσR Table B-1

km = 115 butt welds (corresponding type A1 A2 A11)km = 130 butt welds (corresponding type A3 ndash A10)km = 145 cruciform joints (corresponding type D1 ndash D5)km = 125 T-joints (corresponding type D1 ndash D3)km = 125 fillet welds on one plate surface (corresponding type C7 C8)

Other additional stresses need to be considered separately

465 Stress range spectrum4651 Definitions

46511 The stress range spectrum of a design detail describes the frequency of the different stress rangesto be expected at that location during the lifetime of the lifting appliance

46512 The standard stress range spectrum of lifting appliances describes the frequency of the differentuseful loads to be handled during the lifetime of the lifting appliance

46513 Regarding the fatigue strength analysis it shall be taken into consideration that the standard stressrange spectrum of lifting appliances and the stress range spectrum of a design detail may be different interms of form of spectrum and particularly in terms of number of load cycles or stress cycles respectively


DNV GL AS

4652 Stress range spectrum for the condition in operation

46521 Regarding the fatigue strength analysis for the condition in operation lifting appliances arenormally to be categorized in groups corresponding to the standard stress range spectra S0 to S7 accordingto Figure 4-4

46522 Where the operating conditions are precisely known individual clearly separated from each otherstructural groups or elements may or must be categorized differently

46523 The number nmax of stress cycles during operation shall be provided by the manufacturer

46524 The stress spectra S0 to S6 are defined by the following equation (see Figure 4-4)

Δσ = stress rangeΔσmax = maximum stress range of the spectrum according to [464]n = number of stress cyclesnmax = total number of stress cycles

κ =

p = coefficient according to Table 4-3

For p = 0 κ = 15 shall be assumed

Table 4-3 Coefficients for the calculation of the κ-value

Spectrum S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

p 07 17 27 37 47 57 67

46525 Applicable for the stress range spectrum S7

= 1 = constant


DNV GL AS

Figure 4-4 Standard stress range spectra

46526 Where the operating conditions of shipboard lifting appliances are exactly known individuallydetermined stress range spectra may be used for the fatigue strength analysis based on calculatedcumulative damage ratios The individual stress range spectra shall be proven by the manufacturer

4653 Stress range spectra for the condition out of operationThe fatigue strength analysis for the condition out of operation shall be conducted for the straight-linespectrum A according to Figure 4-4 and a total number of stress cycles nmax = 5 middot 107

466 Calculation of the maximum stress range

4661 The fatigue strength analysis is depending on the detail considered based on one of the followingtypes of stress

mdash for notches of free plate edges the notch stress σk determined for linear-elastic material behaviour isrelevant The fatigue strength is determined by the FAT class (ΔσR) according to Table B-1 type E2 and E3

mdash for welded joints the fatigue strength analysis is normally based on the nominal stress σn at the structuraldetail considered and on an appropriate detail classification as given in Table B-1 which defines the FATclass (ΔσR)

mdash for those welded joints for which the detail classification is not possible or additional stresses occur whichare not or not adequately considered by the detail classification the fatigue strength analysis may beperformed on the basis of the structural stress σS in accordance with [468]

4662 The maximum stress range for a construction detail shall be calculated from the highest maximumstress σmax and the lowest minimum stress σmin in this detail

Δσmax = σmax- σmin

4663 The maximum upper stress σmax and the minimum lower stress σmin shall be determined each fromloads of the most unfavourable magnitude location and direction acting on the lifting appliance in the mostunfavourable position

Thereby all partial safety factors shall be set γp = 1


DNV GL AS

467 Fatigue strength analysis for free plate edges and for welded jointsusing detail classification4671 Definition of nominal stress and detail classification for welded joints

46711 Corresponding to their notch effect welded joints are normally classified into detail categoriesconsidering particulars in geometry and fabrication including subsequent quality control and definition ofnominal stress Table B-1 shows the detail classification based on recommendations of the InternationalInstitute of Welding (IIW) giving the FAT class (ΔσR) for structures made of steel or aluminium alloys (Al)It shall be noted that some influence parameters cannot be considered by the detail classification and that alarge scatter of fatigue strength has therefore to be expected

46712 Details which are not contained in Table B-1 may be classified either on the basis of local stressesin accordance with [468] or else by reference to published experimental work or by carrying out specialfatigue tests assuming a sufficiently high confidence level (see [4691]) and taking into account thecorrection factors as given in [46926]Details contained in Table B-1 produced by improved manufacturing technology may be classified bycarrying out special fatigue tests as described above Such classification of details shall be agreed upon withthe Society case by case

46713 Regarding the definition of nominal stress the arrows in Table B-1 indicate the location anddirection of the stress for which the stress range shall be calculated The potential crack location is alsoshown in Table B-1 Depending on this crack location the nominal stress range shall be determined by usingeither the cross sectional area of the parent metal or the weld throat thickness respectivelyBending stresses in plate and shell structures shall be incorporated into the nominal stress taking thenominal bending stress acting at the location of crack initiation

Guidance noteThe factor Ks for the stress increase at transverse butt welds between plates of different thickness (see type A5 in Table B-1) canbe estimated in a first approximation as follows

t1 = smaller plate thickness

t2 = larger plate thickness

Additional stress concentrations which are not characteristic of the FAT class itself eg due to cut-outs in the neighbourhood of thedetail shall also be incorporated into the nominal stress


46714 In the case of combined normal and shear stress the relevant stress range shall be taken as therange of the principal stress at the potential crack location which acts approximately perpendicular (withinplusmn45deg) to the crack front as shown in Table B-1 as long as it is larger than the individual stress components

46715 Where solely shear stresses are acting the largest principal stress σ1 = τ may be used incombination with the relevant FAT class

468 Fatigue strength analysis for welded joints based on local stresses

4681 Alternatively to the procedure described in the preceding paragraphs the fatigue strength analysisfor welded joints may be performed on the basis of local stresses For common plate and shell structures inships the assessment based on the so-called structural (or hot-spot) stress σs is normally sufficient


DNV GL AS

The structural stress is defined as the stress being extrapolated to the weld toe excluding the local stressconcentration in the local vicinity of the weld see Figure 4-5

Figure 4-5 Structural stress

4682 The structural stress can be determined by measurements or numerically eg by the finite elementmethod using shell or volumetric models under the assumption of linear stress distribution over the platethickness Normally the stress is extrapolated linearly to the weld toe over two reference points which arelocated 05 and 15 times plate thickness away from the weld toe In some cases the structural stress can becalculated from the nominal stress σn and a structural stress concentration factor Ks which has been derivedfrom parametric investigations using the methods mentioned Parametric equations should be used with dueconsideration of their inherent limitations and accuracy

4683 For the fatigue strength analysis based on structural stress the S-N curves shown in Figure 4-6apply with the following reference values

ΔσR = 100 (resp 40 for Al) for the butt welds types A1 ndash A6 and for K-butt welds with fillet welded endseg type D1 in Table B-1 and for fillet welds which carry no load or only part of the load of theattached plate type C1 ndash C9 in Table B-1

ΔσR = 90 (resp 36 for Al) for fillet welds which carry the total load of the attached plate eg type D2 inTable B-1

In special cases where eg the structural stresses are obtained by non-linear extrapolation to the weld toeand where they contain a high bending portion increased reference values of up to 15 can be allowed

4684 In addition to the assessment of the structural stress at the weld toe the fatigue strength withregard to root failure shall be considered by analogous application of the respective FAT class eg type D3 ofTable B-1In this case the relevant stress is the stress in the weld cross section caused by the axial stress in the plateperpendicular to the weld It shall be converted at a ratio of t (2 middot a)

469 Design S-N curves4691 Description of the design S-N curves

46911 The design S-N curves for the calculation of the cumulative damage ratio according to [46101]are shown in Figure 4-6 for welded joints at steel and in Figure 4-7 for notches at plate edges of steel platesFor aluminium alloys (Al) corresponding S-N curves apply with reduced reference values of the S-N curves(FAT classes) according to Table B-1 The S-N curves represent the lower limit of the scatter band of 95 ofall test results available (corresponding to 975 survival probability) considering further detrimental effectsin large structures


DNV GL AS

To account for different influence factors the design S-N curves shall be corrected according to [4692]

Figure 4-6 S-N curves for welded joints at steel

Figure 4-7 S-N curves for notches at plate edges of steel plates

46912 The S-N curves represent section-wise linear relationships between log (Δσ) and log (N)

log(N) = 70 + m middot Q


DNV GL AS

Q = coefficient defined as

Q = log(ΔσR Δσ) - 069897 m0

m = slope exponent of S-N curve see [46913] and [46914]m0 = inverse slope in the range N le 1 middot 107 defined asm0 = 3 for welded jointsm0 = 35 divide 5 for free plate edges (see Figure 4-7)

The S-N curve for FAT class 160 forms the upper limit for the S-N curves of free edges of steel plates withdetail categories 100 ndash 150 in the range of low stress cycles see Figure 4-7 The same applies accordingly toFAT classes 32 ndash 40 of aluminium alloys with an upper limit of FAT 71 see type E1 in Table B-1

46913 For structures subjected to variable stress ranges the S-N curves shown by the solid lines in Figure4-6 and Figure 4-7 shall be applied (S-N curves of type M) ie

m = m0 for N le 107 (Q le 0)m = 2 middot m0 ndash 1 for N gt 107 (Q gt 0)

46914 For stress ranges of constant magnitude (stress range spectrum S7) in non-corrosive environmentfrom N = 1 middot 107 the S-N curves of type O in Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7 can be used thus

m = m0 for N le 107 (Q le 0)m = 22 for N gt 107 (Q gt 0)

4692 Correction of the reference value of the design S-N curve

46921 A correction of the reference value of the S-N curve (FAT class) is required to account for additionalinfluence factors on fatigue strength as follows

ΔσRc = fm fR fw fi ft fs ΔσR

ΔσR = FAT class according to Table B-1 or EN 1993-1-9fm = correction factor for material effect according to [46922]fR = correction factor for mean stress effect according to [46923]fw = correction factor for weld shape effect according to [46924]fi = correction factor for importance of structural element according to Table 4-4ft = correction factor for thickness effect according to [46925]fs = additional correction factor for structural stress analysis according to [46926]

For the description of the corrected design S-N curve the formulae given in m may be used by replacing ΔσRby ΔσRc

46922 Material effect (f)For welded joints it is generally assumed that the fatigue strength is independent of steel strength ie

fm = 10For free edges at steel plates the effect of the materials yield strength is accounted for as follows

For aluminium alloys fm = 1 generally applies


DNV GL AS

46923 Effect of mean stress (f)The correction factor fR shall be determined by the following formulae

fR = 10 for σm ge (∆σmax2) (range of tensile pulsating stresses)

fR = for ndash (∆σmax2) le σm le (∆σmax2) (range of alternating stresses)

fR = 1 + 2 c for σm le ndash (∆σmax2) (range of compressive pulsating stresses)

c = coefficient defined as

c = 0 for welded joints subjected to constant stress cycles (stress range spectrum S7)c = 015 for welded joints subjected to variable stress cycles (corresponding to stress range

spectrum A or S0divideS6)c = 030 for unwelded base material

46924 Effect of weld shape (f)In normal cases

fw = 10A factor fw gt 10 applies for welds treated eg by grinding Grinding removes surface defects such as slaginclusions porosity and crack-like undercuts to achieve a smooth transition from the weld to the basematerial Final grinding shall be performed transversely to the weld direction The depth should be about 05mm larger than the depth of visible undercutsFor ground weld toes of fillet and K-butt welds machined by

fw = 115 for disc grinderfw = 130 for burr grinder

Premise for this is that root and internal failures can be excluded Application of toe grinding to improvefatigue strength is limited to following details of Table B-1

mdash butt welds of type A2 A3 and A5 if they are ground from both sidesmdash non-load-carrying attachments of type C1 C2 C5 and C6 if they are completed with a full penetration

weldmdash transverse stiffeners of type C7mdash doubling plates of type C9 if the weld throat thickness according to Sec11 [326] was increased by 30mdash cruciform and T-joints of type D1 with full penetration welds

The corrected FAT class that can be reached by toe grinding is limited for all types of welded connections ofsteel to fw ΔσR = 100 Nmm2 and of aluminium to fw ΔσR = 40 Nmm2For butt welds ground flush the corresponding reference value of the S-N curve (FAT class) shall be choseneg type A1 A10 or A12 in Table B-1For endings of stiffeners or brackets eg type C2 in Table B-1 which have a full penetration weld and arecompletely ground flush to achieve a notch-free transition the following factor applies

fw = 14The assessment of a local post-weld treatment of the weld surface and the weld toe by other methods egultrasonic impact treatment shall be agreed on in each case

46925 Plate thickness effect (f)In order to account for the plate thickness effect application of the reduction factor ft is required for buttwelds oriented transversely to the direction of applied stress for plate thicknesses t gt 25 mm


DNV GL AS

n = exponent for additional notch effect at weld toe defined as

n = 020 as weldedn = 010 toe-ground

k = exponent for misalignment (see [4643]) defined as

k = 010 for butt welds with km = 130k = 005 for butt welds with km = 115

km = factor according to [4643]

For all other weld connections consideration of the thickness effect may be required subject to agreementwith the Society

46926 Correction factor for structural stress analysis (f)If the fatigue strength analysis for welded joints is based on local stresses according to [468] then thereference value ΔσRc of the corrected S-N curve shall be determined according to [4643] taking intoaccount the following additional correction factor which describes influencing parameters not included in thecalculation model such as eg misalignment

Δσsmax = applied peak stress range within a stress range spectrumΔσsb = bending portion of Δσsmax

krsquom = effective stress increase factor due to misalignments under axial loading defined askrsquom = km ndash 005

km = stress increase factor due to misalignments under axial loading at least km according[4643]

If the fatigue strength analysis for free plate edges and for welded joints is based on detail classificationaccording to [467] then fs = 10

Table 4-4 Influence of the importance fn of a structural element on the fatigue strength analysis

Not safe to operate structural elementAccessibility Safe to operate

structural element No hazard to persons Hazard to persons

Accessible structuralelements 10 09 083

Badly accessible structuralelements 095 087 08


DNV GL AS



Safe to operate structural elements are parts with restricted consequences of a failure ie where the local breakage ofa structural element does not result in the failure of the structure or fall-down of the load

Not safe to operate structural elements are parts where the local breakage of a structural element results in immediatefailure of the structure of fall-down of the load

4610 Proof46101 Calculation of the cumulative damage ratio

461011 Where the fatigue strength analysis is based on the calculated cumulative damage ratio thepartial damages Di caused by the operating conditions in operation and out of operation shall bedetermined as follows

K = total number of blocks of the stress range spectrum for summation (in general K ge 20)nk = number of stress cycles in block kNk = number of endured stress cycles determined from the corrected S-N curve (see [469]) taking Δσ

= Δσk

Δσk = stress range of block k

For this purpose in the condition in operation standard stress range spectra according to [46524] or[46525] or individually determined stress range spectra according to [46526] may be applied For thecondition out of operation the straight-line stress range spectrum according to [4653] shall be applied

461012 The proof of fatigue strength is demonstrated if for the total cumulative damage ratio D thefollowing condition is met

46102 Permissible stress range

461021 The fatigue strength analysis may be performed based on the permissible maximum stressranges For this purpose in the condition in operation standard stress range spectra according to[46524] or [46525] shall be applied for the condition out of operation the straight-line stress rangespectrum according to [4653]The requirements given in the following are applicable for fatigue strength analyses conducted separately forthe conditions in operation and out of operationA superposition of the damages caused by the conditions in operation and out of operation is notrequired provided that the maximum stress range caused by the condition out of operation does notexceed 10 of the maximum stress range caused by the condition in operation Otherwise the fatiguestrength analysis shall be conducted on the basis of the calculated cumulative damage ratios according to[46101] or upon agreement with the Society


DNV GL AS

Table 4-5 Factor fn for the determination of the permissible stress range for welded joints (m0 =3)

Number of stress cycles nmaxStressspectrum 2∙104 5∙104 105 3∙105 6∙105 106 3∙106 6∙106 107 5∙107 108

S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 558 409 336 291 195 167

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 232 201 137 119

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 174 151 105 092

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 116 082 072

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 093 066 058

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 056 048

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 047 041

S7 470 345 275 191 151 127 089 070 059 043 037

Table 4-6 Factor fn for the determination of the permissible stress range for free edges of plateswith (m0 = 35)


S0 9341251 1

8181019 1

739873 1

620677 1

548574 1 496 391 333 296 209 184

S1775

983 1668

787 1595

665 1485 420 372 282 238 211 151 134

S2665

809 1568

638 1497

534 1394 333 290 217 182 161 117 105

S3562

665 1475

520 1414 320 266 230 171 141 125 093 083

S4475

555 1400

430 1350 262 217 188 138 114 100 076 068

S5407

473 1340

366 1300 222 183 159 116 095 084 063 056

S6354

412 1296

317 1260 191 157 136 100 082 071 054 048

S7325

377 1270

290 1235 174 143 123 090 074 064 049 043

1) For ΔσR lt 125 [Nmm2]

(ΔσR FAT class according to legacy GL Rules for Hull Structures (I-1-1) Section 20 Table 203)


DNV GL AS



S0778

883 1

1007 2

685732 1

848 2

620662 1

745 2

528560 1

598 2473

500 1436

458 1 365 322 293 219 195

S1647

693 1

809 2

562600 1

668 2

502536 1

580 2418

443 1372

388 1 339 275 240 217 161 145

S2554

594 1

674 2

475507 1

552 2

421449 1

473 2356

363 1 304 275 217 186 168 127 115

S3467

500 1

560 2

397424 1

453 2349

372 1 285 248 224 172 146 132 101 092

S4395

424 1

470 2

333356 1

377 2291

311 1 237 205 183 140 118 106 083 075

S5339

363 1

401 2

284304 1

320 2248

266 1 201 174 154 117 099 088 069 063

S6296

317 1

349 2

247265 1

278 2215

230 1 173 150 133 101 085 075 06 054

S7270

290 1

319 2

225241 1

254 2196

211 1 158 137 120 092 077 068 054 049

1) For ΔσR lt 150 [Nmm2]2) For ΔσR lt 140 [Nmm2]




S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 314 291 230 209

S1 607 526 471 394 352 323 269 240 221 175 160

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 217 192 177 142 130

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 141 114 106

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 114 094 087


DNV GL AS


S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 079 073

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 068 063

S7 253 211 184 148 129 116 093 081 073 061 057

Table 4-9 Factor fn for the straight-line stress spectrum with nmax = 5 middot 107

Welded joints Free edges of plates

m0 = 3 m0 = 5 m0 = 4 m0 = 35

353 363 366 365

461022 The maximum stress range of the spectrum shall not exceed the permissible value Δσp

Δσmax le Δσp

Δσmax = maximum stress range according to [466]Δσp = permissible stress range according to [461023]

461023 The permissible stress ranges shall be calculated by the following formula

Δσp = fn middot ΔσRc

ΔσRc = corrected FAT class according to [46921]fn = factor for the shape and extent of the spectrum according to Table 4-5 to Table 4-9

47 Proof of suitability for use

471 General notes

4711 Shipboard lifting appliances as well as its structural elements and equipment shall be such designedand dimensioned that its safety and proper functioning is not adversely affected or endangered by one ormore of the influences stated hereafter

mdash deformations(eg formation of large amplitudes of vibration bending loads on hydraulic cylinders of telescopic beams)

mdash vibrations(eg generated by simultaneous operation of several lifting appliance drives by ship machinery orinfluences of sea state)

mdash heat(eg expansion overheating of drives or brakes)

mdash highest position of boom(see [12211])

4712 Suitability for use shall be demonstrated in the course of the initial testing on board


DNV GL AS

472 Permissible deformations4721 Compression members

47211 The uniform deflection of compression members under permissible load shall not be larger than therod length divided by 250

47212 The uniform deflection of unloaded compression members or compression members loaded by thedead load which are 1st order structural elements shall not be larger than the rod length divided by 500

47213 The uniform deflection of unloaded compression members or compression members loaded by thedead load which are 2nd order structural elements such as eg wind installations or framework stiffenersshall not be larger than the rod length divided by 350

4722 Tension membersThe uniform deflection of unloaded tension members shall not be larger than the rod length divided by 50

48 Joints

481 Proof of weld joints4811 PrerequisitesThe strength of welding consumables shall be equal to or higher than that of the structural elements to beconnectedFor further general prerequisites see Sec11

4812 General strength analysis

48121 General notesWeld thicknessrsquos which are the basis of the strength analysis are given in [114] for various shapes ofwelds

48122 Welds located in the plate planeThe permissible stress of welds located in the plate plane is the dimensioning value of the permissible stressof the adjoining plate according to [442231]

48123 Fillet weldsFor fillet welds the strength analysis may be conducted according to RU SHIP Pt6 Ch13 or according to arecognized basic principle of calculation or standard

48124 Plates loaded by tension transversely to the direction of rolling481241 Where enhanced properties in thickness direction are required for plates and wide flat bar steelthe following minimum requirements apply for the reduction of area after fracture Z which is the meanvalue of 3 tensile test samples to be taken with their longitudinal axis perpendicular to the surface of theproduct

Zmin = 25Of these one single value may be less than 25 but not less than 20481242 Where structural elements are exposed to increased loads a minimum value of 35 (lowestsingle value 25) may be required see Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-10)

4813 Proof of fatigue strengthRegarding the proof of fatigue strength the statements in [46] apply


DNV GL AS

482 Proofs for bolted connections4821 General notes

48211 Bolted connections shall be dimensioned according to recognized guidelines basic principles ofcalculation or standards which possibly also allow for a fatigue strength analysis for the bolts

48212 The approaches according to [4822] and [4823] in principle imply that

mdash connected areas are secured against distortion eg by use of at least 2 boltsmdash contacting areas are smooth and free from greasemdash the use of bolts of strength class 129 is agreed with the Society

4822 Gusset connections with fitting-bolts (fitting-bolt shear connections)

48221 DefinitionIn the case of fitting-bolt shear connections the loads to be carried are transferred by form-fitting Theseforces generate shear stresses in the bolts and bearing stresses at the gussets

48222 Construction notes482221 Figure 4-9 shows a typical gusset connection If it is intended to be constructed as a fitting-boltshear connection the following notes shall be observed

mdash The clearance between bolt and drilling hole shall correspond to the tolerance classes h13 and H11 (orless) according to ISO 286-2

mdash Bolt shafts shall be as long as the thickness of the parts to be connected Where due to the cylindric shaftlength it is not possible to tighten the bolts washers shall be used

mdash Controlled pre-stressing of bolts is not required however a suitable securing device against looseningmdash A special surface treatment of the contact areas is not requiredmdash Forces to be transferred may at the maximum be distributed over 5 (strength classes 46 and 56) or

3 (strength classes 88 109 and possibly 129) bolts per row to be arranged one after another in thedirection of force

482222 Regarding the edge and hole distances according to Figure 4-9 the limit values according toTable 4-10 apply

Table 4-10 Limit values for edge and hole distances

Min Max 1

Edge distances e1 and e2 15 middot dℓ 4 middot t + 40 mm

Hole distances p1 and p2 30 middot dℓ The lesser value of 14 middot t or 200 mm

1) t ndash thickness of the thinnest external plate

48223 Permissible stresses for bearing stress and shearing-off482231 For the bearing stress of structural elements made of steel as well as for the shearing-off ofbolts the following permissible stresses apply

σzul = (bearing stress)


DNV GL AS

τzul = (shearing-off)

ReH = yield strength of structural elements andor gussets according to material standard (nominalvalue)

ReHs = yield strength of bolts according to Table 4-11

482232 Correction coefficients ασ ατ

a) Multishear bolt connections

ασm = minimum of

mdash c1 (3 middot d ℓ) or

mdash p1 (3 middot d ℓ) minus 025 or

mdash Rms Rm or

mdash 10

ατm = 10Rms = tensile strength of bolts according to Table 4-11 [Nmm2]Rm = tensile strength of structural elements according to material standard (nominal value) [N

mm2]

b) Single-shear bolt connections

ασe = 078 middot α σm

ατe = 077

Table 4-11 Strength values of bolts

Strength class 46 56 88 109 129

ReHs [Nmm2] 240 300 640 900 1080

Rms [Nmm2] 400 500 800 1000 1200

48224 Proofs for transmissible bolt forces482241 To determine the largest bolt forces for the example in Figure 4-9 the following forces shall beadded geometrically

ΔFxd =

ΔFzd =

ΔFMd =


DNV GL AS

482242 For the most unfavourably stressed fitting-bolts on a connection or joint the following proofs forshearing-off of bolts and bearing stresses of the connected parts shall be provided

mdash bearing stresses Frd le ds middot tmin middot σzulmdash shearing-off Frd le As middot nf middot τzul

Frd = largest resulting bolt force (rectangular to the bolt axis) according to [482241]ds = shaft diameter of the fitting-bolt (nominal diameter + 10 mm)tmin = smallest effective plate thicknessAs = cross-section area of shaft of fitting-boltnf = number of effective shear areas (single-shear or multishear)

σzul τzul = permissible stresses according to [48223] [Nmm2]

482243 In the case of a dynamic shear load the fatigue strength analysis shall be conducted for themost unfavourably loaded fitting-bolt as follows

Stress spectra shall be determined according to [46]

The maximum stress range of the shear stress Δτmax shall be determined according to [46] for the shaftcross-section of the fitting-bolt

The design S-N curve for shear stress of fitting-bolts is shown in Figure 4-8

The fatigue strength analysis may be conducted on the basis of calculated damage ratios according to [46]

As an alternative the fatigue strength analysis may be conducted on the basis of permissible stress rangesfor the standard spectra S0 to S7 according to [46] as follows

Δτmax le fnmiddot fi middot ΔτR

Δτmax = maximum stress range of the shear stress for the shaft cross-section of the fitting-boltΔτR = reference value for the stress range of the shear stress at 2middot106 stress cycles

ΔτR = 100 Nmm2

fn = factor for the shape and extent of the spectrum according to Table 4-12fi = influence of the importance of the structural element according to Table 4-4

Figure 4-8 Design S-N curve for shear load of fitting-bolts


DNV GL AS

48225 Proofs for structural elements and gussetsThe strength analyses for the structural elements and gussets connected with each other shall be based onthe cross-sections designed for tension compression shear and bending according to [434]For the permissible stresses see [4422]

4823 Gasset connections with prestressed bolts (friction-grip connections)

48231 DefinitionWith friction-grip connections the forces to be sustained are submitted by friction between the contact areas(frictional locking)Fitting-bolts with the normal clearance do not effect any increase in the transmissible forces

Table 4-12 Factor fn for standard stress range spectra S0 to S7 according to [465] and design S-N curve according to Figure 4-8

Number of stress cycles nmaxStressspectrum 2middot104 5middot104 105 3middot105 6middot105 106 3middot106 6middot106 107 5middot107 108

S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 313 288 224 201

S1 607 526 471 394 351 323 269 238 218 167 151

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 216 191 173 132 119

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 138 103 094

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 113 082 076

S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 069 062

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 059 053

S7 253 211 183 147 128 116 093 081 073 053 046

48232 Construction notesFigure 4-9 shows a typical gusset connection For construction purposes the following notes shall beobserved

mdash Bolt holes shall not exceed the shaft diameter by more than 10 mmmdash The bolts shall be pre-stressed by controlled procedures and under consideration of the dispersion of the

installation force to the maximum installation force FMmax = αs middot ReHs middot Aσ where Aσ is the stress cross-section of the bolt Preferably the pre-stress coefficient is αs = 07 Well-founded deviations in the rangeof 06 le αs le 08 may be permitted

mdash Up to a thread diameter of 30 mm the pre-stress may be effected by the application of a torque Withlarger diameters hydraulic lengthening shall be applied

mdash For the contact areas a special surface treatment is required according to [48233]mdash Casting compound for compensation of unevennesses in the contact areas is not permissiblemdash Only bolts of strength class 88 109 and possibly 129 may be usedmdash The forces to be submitted may be distributed over 3 rows of bolts at a maximummdash The hole distances shall comply with the requirements according to [482222]mdash Only one plate of a gusset connection may have a plate thickness which is equal to or higher than the

bolt diametermdash Bolts of strength class 129 require a highly accurate layout in the supporting areas under the head and

nut


DNV GL AS

48233 Friction coefficient microThe friction coefficient depends on the surface treatment and shall be selected as followsmicro = 050 for surfaces

mdash of shining metal layers steel shot or sand blasted without unevennessrsquomdash steel shot or sandblasted and covered with aluminiummdash steel shot or sandblasted and metal covered by a metal cover made of a zinc material which effects a

friction coefficient of at least 05

micro = 040 for surfaces

mdash steel shot or sand blasted and coated with a 50 microm to 80 microm thick alkali-zinc-silicate layer


mdash shiny metallic cleaned with a steel brush or by flame deseaming


mdash free of rust oil and dirt

48234 Proof of transmissible forcesA sufficient slide resistance shall be proven for the most unfavourable bolt in a connection or joint seeexample in [482241] using the following condition

Frd le Fμd middot nr

Fμd =

Fμd = force transmissible by friction in 1 friction areanr = number of effective friction areaAσ = stress section-area of the bolt according to Table 4-13Fa = external tension force in the direction of the bolt axismicro = friction coefficient according to [48233]ΔFSetz = loss of pre-stress force by setting according to [49142]αA = tightening factor of the tightening procedure used αA = FMmaxFMmin

FMmax = maximum installation force in consideration of the dispersion of installation force for thetightening procedure used

FMmin = minimum installation force in consideration of the dispersion of installation force for thetightening procedure used

Additionally sufficient resistance against shearing-off and bearing pressure according to [4822] shall beproven including the calculation of the shear capability of the stress cross-section Aσ

48235 Proof of surface pressure under head and nut of the boltFor material S 235 and where applicable also for S 355 proof of the permissible surface pressure under thehead or nut of the bolt respectively shall be to carried out in the following way


DNV GL AS

If proof cannot be provided tempered washers shall be used

σp zul = permissible surface pressure in according with Table 4-14 [Nmm2]Aa = smallest contact surface of the bolt head or nut considering bore diameter and chamfers [mm2]Fad = Dimensioning value of the external tensile force in the direction of the bolt axisΦ = tensioning factor according to [49132]

Figure 4-9 Example of a gusset connection

48236 Proofs for structural elements and gussetsFor the strength analyses the statements according to [48225] apply It may be assumed that 13 of theforce Fμd transmissible by friction has already been transmitted before the bolt hole see [48234]

Table 4-13 Stress and core sections of bolts

Diameter [mm] Stress section Aσ [mm2] Core section AK [mm2]

Metric ISO thread according to DIN 13

12 843 7625

14 115 1047

16 157 1441

18 193 1751

20 245 2252

22 303 2815

24 353 3243

27 459 4271

30 561 5190

Metric thread with large clearance according to DIN 2510 Sheet 2

33 668 617

36 786 723


DNV GL AS


39 943 873

42 1083 999

45 1265 1174

48 1426 1320

52 1707 1590

56 1971 1833

64 2599 2426

72 3372 3174

80 4245 4023

90 5479 5226

100 6858 6575

Table 4-14 Permissible surface pressure under heads and nuts of bolts

Material σp zul [Nmm2]

S235 260

S355 C45N 46G2N 46Cr4N 420

C45V 46Cr4V 42CrMo4V 700

GG25 800

483 Proofs for rivet connectionsFor proof of rivetshear connections the statements in [4822] apply analogously Instead of shaftdiameter the hole diameter shall be usedOnly hydraulic riveting is permissible The clamping length of the rivet shall be restricted to the value 65 middotdrivet where drivet is the nominal diameter of the rivet

49 Special structural elements

491 Flange connections with pre-stressed bolts4911 General

49111 In the case of flange connections with pre-stressed bolts the forces to be sustained are transmittedby tensional load of the bolts and possibly by friction fitting

49112 The provisions under [4913] and [4913] do not apply to flanges for the connection of largeslewing bearings In this respect [5741] shall be observed


DNV GL AS

4912 Construction noteFigure 4-10 shows a typical flange connection For construction purposes the following notes shall beobserved

mdash Bolt holes may be larger than the shaft diameter ds by the value ΔdΔd le 01 middot ds le 30 mm

mdash In general the bolt distance s (see Figure 5-4) shall not be larger than 6 middot dsmdash In general the span length of bolts shall be at least 3 middot dsmdash At least 3 threads shall remain freemdash The bolts shall be pretensioned by controlled procedures The degree of utilization ν of the yield strength

ReHs of the bolt in the mounted condition is preferably in the range 07 le ν le 09 Well-foundeddeviations may be permitted

mdash Up to a thread diameter of 30 mm pretension may be conducted by application of a torque in the case oflarger diameters hydraulic lengthening is required

mdash The contact surfaces require a special surface treatment according to [48233]mdash Casting compound for compensation of unevennesses of the contact areas is not permissible un-less

otherwise stated by slewing bearing makersmdash Only bolts of strength class 88 109 and possibly 129 may be usedmdash Bolts of strength class 129 require a highly accurate layout in the supporting areas under the head and

nut

4913 Forces acting on a flange connection

49131 Figure 4-10 shows a typical flange connection with its essential dimensions and the proportionalexternal axial force Fa per bolt sectorThe external axial force Fa acting on the individual bolt location of the flange connection may normally bedetermined by means of elastomechanics from the operational loads of the gusset connectionIn the case of an excentric load the compensating line of action of the external axial force has the distanceaers from the bolt axis The distance aers shall be determined from the location of the zero point of thebending moment curve of the system which is the nearest to the bolt

49132 The external force Fa in the connecting parts (tension force) acts as an additional load on theprestressed bolt and reduces the surface pressure in the parting line The force ratio Φ governs the portion ofthe external axial force which acts on the bolt additionally to the prestressing force as well as the remainingportion which discharges the tensioned structural elements


DNV GL AS

Figure 4-10 Flange connection

The force ratio Φ depends on the resiliences of the bolt and the tensioned structural elements theexcentricity of the tensioning andor the external operational force as well as the leading-in of the force Thereliable determination of Φ is therefore complex and shall in principle be conducted by way of measurementtechniques or based on recognized calculation procedures

Provided that the bending of the bolt due to the excentricity of the tensioning and the bending of the bolt dueto the excentricity of the external axial force Fa do not superimpose each other in the same direction Φ maybe approximately calculated as follows

Φ = α for proofs in [49141] [49143] [49151] and [48235]

= 0 for proofs in [49142] and [4915]


DNV GL AS

δs = axial resilience of the bolt [mmN]δp = axial resilience of the tensioned structural elements [mmN]lk = clamping length [mm]ds = shaft diameter of the bolt [mm]Es = Youngs modulus of the bolt [Nmm2]Ep = Youngs modulus of the tensioned structural elements [Nmm2]dw = head bearing diameter [mm]g = flange dimension according to Figure 4-10 [mm]f = bolt distance [mm]

4914 Proofs for the external tension force F of the boltThe proofs described in the following apply to bolt connections with an external axial force Fa according to[49131] provided that

mdash Tensioned structural elements form simple prismatic bodiesmdash The load on the bolt is proportional to the external axial forcemdash Where external loads are absent the surface pres-sure in the parting line of the prestressed bolt

connection is to a large extent evenly distributed

A surface pressure in the parting line of the prestressed bolt connection to a large extent evenly distributedmay normally be assumed if the dimensions of the parting line are as follows

g lt dw+tf

tf = thickness of the thinner flange plate

Bolt connections which are in addition to an external axial force or solely loaded by an external bendingmoment shall be proven separately

49141 Proof of yield strength of the boltIn the mounted condition the following condition shall be observed

FMmax le FMzul

Where torsion-free tightening procedures are applied the permissible installation force FMzul is as follows

FMmax = maximum installation force


DNV GL AS

FMzul = permissible installation forceReHs = yielding strength of the boltν = predefined degree of utility of the yield strength in the mounted conditionAσ = stress cross-section of the bolt according to Table 4-13dσ = stress diameter of the boltd2 = effective diameter of the boltP = pitch of threadμG = friction coefficient in the thread

If there is no information about the friction coefficient μG in the thread the friction coefficient shall beestimated conservatively eg according to VDI-Richtlinie 2230 Blatt 2 with consideration of surfaceproperties and lubricants used

In service the equivalent stress of the bolt shall not exceed the permissible value

In the case of torsion-free tightening procedures or in the case of complete reduction of torsion stresses inthe thread in service proof of operational stress of the bolt may be conducted as follows

σvd = design value of the maximum equivalent stress of the bolt in operationσzd = design value of the maximum tensile stress of the bolt in operationτredd = design value of the reduced maximum torsion stress of the bolt in operationFSd = design value of the maximum bolt force in operation


DNV GL AS

49142 Proof against open gapThe following condition shall be met for the proof against open gap (see Figure 4-10)

FVmin = FMmin ndash ΔFSetz

FMmin = FMmaxαA

FVmin = lowest pre-stressing force of the boltFMmin = smallest installation forceαA = tightening factor of the tightening procedure used (see [48234])ΔFSetz = loss of pre-stressing force due to setting [N]

A 2-fold pre-stressing with time-lag reduces the setting to a residual value which may possibly bedisregarded

δs δp = resilience of the bolt and the tensioned structural elements according to [49132] [mmN]aers = distance between the compensating line of action from Fa and the bolt axis according to

[49131]feff = the smaller value of f or (dw + tf)geff = the smaller value of g or (dw + tf)

z = the smaller value of 0 or ((geff 2) - e) for g le dw + tf

the smaller value of 0 or (g - (geff 2) - e) for g gt dw + tf

In the case of through-bolt connections for tf the thickness of the thinner gusset plate shall be assumed inthe case of screw-in connections the thickness of the gusset plate with the through-bore

Minor one-sided gapping of the parting line is accepted in the above condition Large-area gapping of theparting line may be accepted if the bolt connection by means of measurement techniques or based onrecognized calculation procedures while considering the progressive increase of the bolt stress due toremoval of tensioned structural elements is proven separately

49143 Proofs of fatigue strengthIn the case of dynamic loads proof of fatigue strength of the bolts shall be conducted as stated in thefollowing

Stress range spectra shall be determined according to [46]

The maximum stress range of the normal stress Δσmax shall be determined according to [46] for the stresscross-section of the thread of the bolt

For a proof of fatigue strength of gaping bolt connections eg by numeric calculation methods Δσmax shallbe determined for the lowest prestress force of the bolt FVmin


DNV GL AS

When the stress range of the normal stress Δσmax is calculated tensile and bending stresses in the stresscross-section of the thread of the bolt shall be taken into consideration For the bending stress in the cross-section of the threads stress cross-section the following applies

σb = bending stress in the stress cross-section of the thread of the boltds = shaft diameter of the bolt

The design S-N curves for proofs of fatigue strength of prestressed bolts are shown in Figure 4-11

The proof of fatigue strength may be conducted on the basis of calculated cumulative damage ratiosaccording to [46]

Alternatively the proof of fatigue strength may be conducted based on permissible stress ranges for thestandard spectra S0 to S7 according to [46] as follows

Δσmax le fnmiddot ksmiddot fimiddotΔσR

ks = 1 for d le 30 mm(30d)025 for d gt 30 mm

Δσmax = maximum stress range of the normal stress in the stress cross-section of the boltΔσR = reference value of the stress range of the normal stress at 2 middot 106 stress cyclesΔσR = 71 Nmm2 for bolts either tempered or rolled as final treatmentΔσR = 50 Nmm2 for all other boltsfn = factor for shape and extent of the spectrum according to Table 4-15fi = influence of importance of structural element according to Table 4-4ks = influence factor for sized = nominal thread diameter

Figure 4-11 Design S-N curves for prestressed bolts


DNV GL AS

Table 4-15 Factor fn for standard stress range S0 to S7 according to [465] and design S-N curveaccording to Figure 4-11


S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 555 406 333 287 182 151

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 229 195 123 103

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 172 146 089 076

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 114 068 058

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 092 054 046

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 045 037

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 039 031

S7 467 345 273 189 151 127 088 070 059 035 028

4915 Proof of transmissible forces in the clamping gapThe statements in [48234] apply where nr = 1Normally this proof shall not be conducted for the connection of large diameter slewing rings

49151 Proof of surface pressure below head and nut of boltThe statements in [48235] apply

49152 Construction and calculation of flanges491521 Construction

The dimensions a b and c in Figure 4-10 shall comply with the following requirements

mdash a mdash not larger than necessary for clamping toolsmdash b mdash sufficiently large for generating the supporting forcemdash c mdash sufficiently large for the weld including the excess length required for the welding process

ba ge 075

The workmanship of the weld next to the connecting bolts requires special diligence

491522 Calculation of flange thickness

The gusset thickness tf may simplified be calculated as follows

αe = coefficient for the construction of the wall50 for cylindric walls60 for flat walls

σw = existing stress in the wallσFzul = permissible stress in the flange according to [4422]


DNV GL AS

492 Hydraulic cylinders4921 General notesFor compression and tension loaded hydraulic cylinders the following proofs shall be conducted for theoperating conditions loading gear in operation and loading gear out of operation

mdash proof of structural safety according to [44]mdash proof of fatigue strength according to [46]mdash proof of suitability for use according to [47]

4922 Simplified dimensioning of cylinder pipes

49221 For thin-walled cylinder pipes the required wall thickness twerf may be calculated as follows if therequirement according to [49222] is complied with

Da = outer diameter [mm]pc = setting pressure of the relief valves according to [10622] [bar]fyr = calculated yield strength according to [4332] [Nmm2]

49222 The formula in [49221] for the required wall thickness is based on the shear stress hypothesisTherefore the following condition shall be complied with if the cylinder pipe is dimensioned using thisformula

σ ℓ = longitudinal stress in the cylinder pipe (characteristic value without partial safety factor γp)

49223 The wall thickness tw of the cylinder pipe shall comply with the following requirement

tw = wall thickness of the cylinder pipetwerf = required wall thickness according to [49221]

49224 Cylinder pipes not complying with the condition according to [49222] shall be proven accordingto [44]In this case the partial safety factor for the internal pressure (= setting pressure pc of the safety valves) is

γp = 134

49225 A calculated strength analysis shall be conducted for the connecting welds of the pipes


DNV GL AS

49226 In order to avoid local bending stresses the head and bottom plate of the cylinder pipes shall notfall below the following minimum thickness

tp = thickness of head or bottom plate respectivelytw = wall thickness of the cylinder pipe

4923 Notes regarding the proof of stability

49231 The proof of stability is according to [4423] to be conducted for the most unfavourablecombination of buckling length ℓki and respective pressure (depending on the kinematics of the loading gear)

49232 The dimensioning force shall include the partial safety factors γp as well as any dynamic coefficients(ψ) and shall be calculated for the most unfavourable load combination

49233 As an imperfection for the proof of stability a distortion of the hydraulic cylinder of ℓki 300 shall betaken into consideration

49234 At the ends of the cylinder the following moment shall be assumed due to friction of the carrierbolts

Nd = dimensioning force (pressure) in the hydraulic cylinder including the partial safety factors γp

micro = 008 (= friction coefficient)dB = bolt diameter

4924 Notes regarding the tensile stressesIn the case of tensile-stressed hydraulic cylinders particular attention shall be paid to the thread of thepiston rod during strength analysis


DNV GL AS

493 Large cylindric pipes4931 Dimensions and loadsFigure 4-12 shows the dimensions and loads of circular cylinder shells

Figure 4-12 Dimensions and loads of circular cylinders

rm = radius related to the middle of wall thickness [mm]tw = Wall thickness [mm]

r = pipe length [mm]Da = outer diameter (nominal diameter) [mm]σx = longitudinal stress [Nmm2]τ = shear stress [Nmm2]σφ = circumferential stress [Nmm2]

49311 The longitudinal and shear stresses are calculated as follows

σx = longitudinal stress [Nmm2]τ = shear stress [Nmm2]Fx = force in x-direction [N]Fz = force in z-direction [N]Mz = bending moment [Nmm]Mx = torsional moment [Nmm]


DNV GL AS

4932 Proofs of stability

49321 Proofs against buckling shall be performed according to [4423] Proofs against shell buckling maybe conducted according to EN 1993-1-6

49322 Regarding the application of the proofs of stability according to EN 1993-1-6 the following shall beobserved

mdash Instead of safety factor γM1 according to the Euro-code the value γm according to [43743] shall beused


49323 Proofs against shell buckling need not be conducted if the following requirements are compliedwith

a) pipes loaded by stress in circumferential direction 2

E = Youngs modulus [Nmm2]206 middot 105 Nmm2 for steel

ReH = yield strength according to material standards [Nmm2]

b) pipes loaded by compression in longitudinal direction

c) pipes loaded by shear

d) very long pipes loaded by compression

ℓki = buckling length of the pipe [mm]

49324 The requirements according to a) to d) apply provided that the imperfections according to[4933] are not exceeded during manufacture

2 These proofs apply provided that the edges are radially undisplacable


DNV GL AS

4933 Imperfections due to manufacture

49331 CurvaturesIn the case of outward or inward curvatures caused by manufacture the depth gauge f according to Figure4-13 shall not exceed 1 of the smallest gauge length The following gauge lengths apply

mdash gauge length in longitudinal direction of the pipe [mm]

ℓm x = (in the unwelded area)

= (in the area of welds)

mdash gauge length in circumferential direction [mm]

ℓmφ = (in the unwelded area)


tmin = thickness of the thinner plate adjacent to the weld

Figure 4-13 Curvature including designations

49332 Out-of-roundness493321 The out-of-roundness is defined as follows

[]

Figure 4-14 Measurement of the diameters for determination of out-of-roundness


DNV GL AS

493322 The permissible out-of-roundness Uadm may be calculated as followsUadm le 20 for dnom le 500 mm

Uadm le [] for 500 lt dnom lt 1250 mm

Uadm le 10 for dnom ge 1250 mmProof format U le Uadm

49333 Excentricities in x-directionPlanned eccentricities or eccentricities due to manufacture located at the centerline of joints of plates withequal or differing wall thickness tw shall not exceed the following values ex

ex le 02 middot tmin le 3 mm

tmin = the smaller of the two plate thicknesses

494 Shear connection of circular structural elementsRegarding the connection of circular masts posts and crane columns with eg deck plates the requiredplate thickness of the deck plating tp and the required weld thickness a may be determined according to thefollowing formula

[mm]

tp = required minimum thickness of deck platesa = required minimum thickness of weldD = connection diameter [mm] (Da or possibly Di)fyr = calculated yield strength according to [4332] [Nmm2]γm = partial safety factor for resistance values according to [43743] [-]Fz = maximum horizontal force to be transmitted [N]Mx = torsional moment of the connection [Nmm]

The internal forces Fz and Mx are dimensioning values and include the partial safety factors γp for loadsaccording to [4374]

Regarding the designation of axes see Figure 4-12

495 Local loads due to wheel loads4951 General notes

49511 Local loads due to wheel loads occur mainly with rails girders of crane rails and girders of trolleysStructural elements which are eg loaded by wheels of fork lift trucks shall be treated analogously

49512 Local loads shall be taken into consideration when the proof of structural safety according to [44]as well as the proof of fatigue strength according to [46] are conducted


DNV GL AS

4952 Girders of crane rails

49521 For the calculation of the local compression stresses the relationships as shown in Figure 4-15apply

Figure 4-15 Pressure distribution of wheel loads

ℓd = length of pressure distribution [mm]= 2 middot hs + ℓf

hs = distance between contact area of the wheel and intersection line considered [mm]

f = length of contact area of the wheel [mm]= 02 middot rℓ le 50 mm

rℓ = running radius [mm]FR = wheel load [N]

49522 Regarding the connecting welds of crane rails made of square steel bars and welds joining web andflange it shall be assumed that the transmitted pressure takes place solely through the welds

4953 Girders of trolleys

49531 In Figure 4-16 typical local deformations are shown highly magnified


DNV GL AS

Figure 4-16 Local deformation of girders of trolleys (highly magnified) F

FR = wheel loadσx σy = local and global stresses

49532 Calculation of local stresses in the lower flanges of girders for trolleys may be conducted inaccordance with a recognized calculation method or standard

mdash Federation Europeenne de la Manutention (FEM) Section IX book 9341

49533 For general strength analysis local and global stresses shall be superimposed with the localstresses reduced to 75

49534 In the case of lower flanges welded to the web for the connecting weld a proof of fatigue strengthmay possibly be required

496 Bolt connections

4961 Bolts shall be secured against falling out Outer bearing plates and gussets shall be secured againstgapping

4962 Bolt connections shall be proven according to [482]


DNV GL AS

497 Eye plates and eye rods

4971 Proof of eye plates may be conducted according to [7343]

4972 Eye rods according to Figure 4-17 may be dimensioned as follows

F = dimensioning value of the tensile force (including partial security factor γp according to [4374])

fyr = calculated yield strength according to [4332]γm = partial safety factor for resistance values according to [43743]

Figure 4-17 Example of an eye rod

498 Joints of hollow profile girdersDimensioning of hollow profile girder joints may be performed according to EN 1993-1-8Alternatively a shape strength analysis for the joints of hollow profiles to other hollow profiles or openprofiles may be conducted based on another recognized calculation method


DNV GL AS

499 Stairs ladders platforms and railings4991 Load assumptions

49911 Accesses platforms etc shall be dimensioned for a distributed load of at least 3000 Nm2 or for amovable single load of 1500 N

49912 Guard-rails and toe boards shall be dimensioned for a lateral load in the form of a movable singleload of 300 N

49913 The loads according to [49911] and [49912] need not be considered for the global calculationof lifting appliances


49921 Proof of structural safety shall be conducted according to [44]

49922 The partial safety factor for the loads is γp = 134


DNV GL AS

SECTION 5 CRANES AND SUPPORTING STRUCTURES

51 General

511 Description of contents

5111 This section contains requirements for design and dimensioning of cranes and their supportingstructures onboard ships which are also correspondingly applicable to other lifting appliances and theirsupporting structures according to Sec1 [131]

5112 The type of design is not subject to restrictions However the requirements given in [57] shall betaken into account

5113 The dimensioning is based on Sec4 and distinguishes between the conditions in service and out ofservice for all proofs

512 Influences caused by the ship and the shiprsquos operation

5121 Apart from special tasks such as eg handling of hatch covers or offshore activities the shiprsquosinfluence shall also be considered for the design and dimensioning of cranes on board ships predeterminedeg by the form of the hull its bending and torsional stiffness or the shiprsquos operationPossible influences to be considered may be

mdash arrangement of the cranes on the shipmdash stability of the shipmdash area of operation of the shipmdash high ship speedmdash sea lashing of the cranesmdash special operating conditions

5122 The increase of load radius of cranes due to the existing heel of the ship andor the heel generatedby the lifting of load may be taken advantage of upon approval by the Society The values of Table 4-1 shallbe complied with

513 Dimensioning of cranesThe cranes listed in the following shall be dimensioned according to different criteria

5131 Shipboard cranes

51311 Cranes for harbour operation

51312 Cranes for sea operation

5132 Floating cranesDepending on their use floating cranes shall be dealt with like shipboard cranes for harbour or sea operationrespectively

5133 Lifting appliances not handling cargoShipboard lifting appliances not handling cargo shall be dealt with like shipboard cranes for harbouroperation taking into consideration their service or environmental conditions


DNV GL AS

514 Dimensioning of supporting structures

5141 The principal supporting structures are

mdash crane columnsmdash crane foundationsmdash runways for mobile cranesmdash crane boom supportsmdash structural transits into the shiprsquos hull

5142 Crane columns and crane foundations shall be dimensioned similarly like the allocated cranes whereapplicable also according to [5412]

5143 When dimensioning runways the requirements given in [495] as well as according to [5744]shall be observed

5144 Crane boom supports shall be dimensioned according to [566]

52 Crane groups

521 General notes

5211 The allocation to crane groups may be of influence on the determination of hoist load coefficientsthe main aspect however is the fatigue strength

5212 Non-distinct allocations shall be agreed with the Society This applies in particular to side andauxiliary hoists

5213 The following allocations to crane groups in each case refer to the main hoist of a crane

522 Crane group A

5221 Crane group A includes mainly cranes which do not handle cargo and which with the exceptionof hatch cover cranes and hose cranes are not always exposed to the full nominal load Such cranes arecharacterized by irregular use and longer rest periods

5222 Cranes of group A1 which also launch and recover life-saving appliances shall be dimensioned inaddition according to the LSA-Code

5223 Crane group A is further subdivided as follows

52231 Crane group A1 includes cranes for the operation of the ship in the harbour such as eg

mdash provision cranesmdash engine room cranes workshop cranesmdash hatch cover cranesmdash hose cranes

52232 Crane group A2 includes cranes for the operation of the ship at sea such as eg

mdash service cranesmdash engine room cranes (used at sea state)


DNV GL AS

52233 Crane group A3 includes floating cranes not used for cargo-handling like eg

mdash mounting cranes

523 Crane group B

5231 Crane group B primarily includes cranes used for cargo-handling and which are not always exposedto the full nominal load These cranes are characterized by regular use and longer rest periods

5232 Crane group B is further subdivided as follows

52321 Crane group B1 includes shipboard cranes for cargo-handling in the harbour using spreaders orhooks such as eg

mdash container cranesmdash general cargo cranes

52322 Crane group B2 includes cranes for cargo-handling at sea using hooks such as eg

mdash general cargo cranes

52323 Crane group B3 includes floating cranes for cargo-handling using hooks such as eg

mdash floating cargo cranes

524 Crane group C

5241 Crane group C primarily includes cranes for cargo-handling and which are regularly exposed to thefull or nearly full nominal load

5242 Crane group C is further subdivided as follows

52421 Crane group C1 includes shipboard cranes for cargo-handling in the harbour using grabs hooks orspecial loose gear such as eg

mdash grab cranesmdash pallet cranes

52422 Crane group C2 includes ship cranes for cargo-handling at sea using grabs such as eg

mdash grab cranesmdash lighter cranes

52423 Crane group C3 includes floating cranes for cargo-handling using grabs such as eg

mdash grab floating cranesmdash lighter floating cranes

525 Change of crane group

5251 In the cases of a change of crane group change to the nominal load or change to the load radiusin addition to an examination of drawings the manufacturer shall calculate the estimated residual lifetimewhere applicable


DNV GL AS

53 Design loads

531 General notes

5311 The loads acting on the structural components of cranes and their supporting structures aresubdivided as follows

mdash regular loadsmdash irregular loadsmdash special loads

5312 Cranes for the conveyance of persons shall comply with the requirements given in [4251] and[4252]

5313 If necessary loads not addressed in the following shall be properly taken into account The rating ofsuch loads and considering them in the corresponding load combinations shall be agreed with the Society

532 Regular loads5321 Dead loads LDead loads shall be determined in accordance with [4242] A distinction should be made between loadingand unloading dead loads acting on each structural element

5322 Hoist load LThe definition of hoist load (working load) is given in [11562] Regarding the crane dimensioning thenominal load shall be regarded as part of the hoist loadDepending on the type of operation the following hoist loads exist

mdash harbour operation LH = (LEA + LNe)mdash sea operation LHsee = (LEA + LNsee)

LNsee shall be calculated according to [54321]

5323 Loads from driving over an uneven runwayWhere the design conditions according to [5744] are met the application of vertical dynamic forces causedby driving over an uneven runway may be omitted Or else the application of the load shall be agreed withthe Society

5324 Dynamic forces due to drive systems

53241 General notes532411 The dynamic forces to hoist loads and to components of lifting appliances caused by drivesystems may be determined in a simplified manner using the method described in the following The set-down of a load corresponds arithmetically to the lifting of a resting load and is not mentioned explicitly in thefollowing532412 The designations vertical and horizontal refer to the coordinate system of the cranes

53242 Vertical dynamic forces due to lifting of a load532421 The acceleration forces generated by the lifting of a resting load during harbour operation areallowed for by using the hoist load coefficient ψ to be determined according to [5431]532422 The acceleration forces generated by the rising of a resting or moving load during sea operationare allowed for by using the hoist load coefficient ψsee to be determined according to [5432]


DNV GL AS

Guidance noteThe hoist load coefficients ψ and ψsee are abbreviated as DAF in GL Noble Denton guideline 0027ND - Guidelines for Marine Liftingamp Lowering Operations


53243 Vertical dynamic loads due to suspended loadGenerally for a suspended load no lifting or braking forces need to be considered This also applies forbraking a crane boom with suspended load

53244 Horizontal dynamic forces due to lifting of a load532441 In the case of lifting a resting load during harbour operation the horizontal components of theload LH middot ψ resulting from the shiprsquos heeling angle according to Table 4-1 shall be assumed as horizontaldynamic forces see also [53262]532442 In the case of lifting a resting or moving load during sea operation the horizontal componentsof the loads LHsee middot ψsee or LHu middot ψu resulting from the shiprsquos heeling angle according to Table 4-1 and thecargo runner deflection angle according to [53263] shall be assumed as horizontal dynamic forces

53245 Horizontal dynamic forces due to suspended load532451 The accelerations at the crane boom peak due to rotating slewing pivoting and telescopingmotions shall be indicated by the manufacturer

532452 If no other proof is given the radial acceleration br for rotating and slewing cranes may becalculated as follows

ω = (π middot n) 30 = angular speed [1s]

r = rotatingslewing radius [m]v = ω middot r = circumferential speed [ms]n = rpm [1min]

In the case of rotating cranes for hoists on the ship or on the installation half of the circumferential speedmay be assumed

532453 In the case of rotating or slewing cranes the tangential acceleration bt may be assumed to beequal to the radial acceleration br according to [532452] if no other proof is given

532454 The horizontal forces of the useful load and the dead load of the crane boom due to the shipacutesheeling ε and the rotating or slewing acceleration may be added vectorially For ε see [424414]

53246 Horizontal dynamic forces with mobile cranesHorizontal dynamic forces caused by starting and braking in the direction of travelling shall be indicated bythe manufacturer If such manufacturerrsquos information is not available at least 16 of the loads of powered orbraked wheels shall be assumedThe wheel loads are calculated from the dead loads of the crane and the hoist load Oscillatingly suspendedhoist loads may be disregardedIn the case of an off-center location of the center of gravity the horizontal side forces which occursimultaneously shall be considered as well


DNV GL AS

5325 Dynamic forces generated by ship motions

53251 General noteThe following requirements apply exclusively for the dead loads LE of cranes For a more accuratedetermination of the dynamic forces the requirements given in [547] apply

53252 Cranes in service532521 Vertical dynamic forcesGenerally vertical dynamic forces during operation of cranes at sea need not be allocated any loadcombination according to [552] and they also need not be explicitly proven532522 Horizontal dynamic forces due to the inclination of the crane baseFor the sea operation of cranes the horizontal forces resulting from the ship inclinations according to Table4-1 may be assumed unless not deviant indicated by the operatorThe inclination of the crane base may be considered to be an obliquely positioned system or by distribution ofthe forces into components532523 Horizontal dynamic forces due to the acceleration of the crane basisFor the sea operation of cranes in addition to the horizontal forces according to [532522] the followinghorizontal accelerations bh shall be assumed if cranes are operated at significant wave heights of H13 gt 2m

mdash barges and catamarans bh = 075 middot (H13 ndash 2) ge 0 [ms2]mdash shipsmdash bh = 05 middot (H13 ndash 2) ge 0 [ms2]mdash semi-submersibles bh = 025 middot (H13 ndash 2) ge 0 [ms2]

H13 = significant wave height [m]

53253 Cranes out of serviceIn the condition out of service at sea the vertical and horizontal dynamic forces may be calculatedaccording to AppA

5326 Diagonal pull forces due to cargo runner deflection angles

53261 General notes532611 Diagonal pull forces may be generated when a load is hoisted due to a relative shift betweenload and crane boom peak They shall be superimposed to the ship inclinations of Table 4-1532612 Cargo runner deflection angles in the longitudinal and transverse direction of a crane boom shallbe considered as occurring simultaneously in the dimensioning process

53262 Harbour operationIn general diagonal pull forces due to cargo runner deflection angles need not be taken into considerationduring harbour operation

53263 Sea operation532631 Shipboard cranes

When not determined more precisely the cargo runner deflection angle shall be assumed as

φl = φq = H13 [deg]

φl = deflection angle in longitudinal direction of the crane boomφq = deflection angle in transverse direction of the crane boomH13 = significant wave height [m]


DNV GL AS

For cranes with a slewing mechanism the deflection angle in transverse direction may be halved if therequirement given in [573212] is met

532632 Floating cranes

For floating cranes with a nominal load LNe le 60 t the requirements given in [532631] apply In the caseof higher nominal loads the requirements given in [57322] shall be met additionally

5327 Partial dropping of the useful load during normal operation

53271 When a part of the useful load LN is dropped during normal operation as eg by cranes with grabsor load magnets this may be accounted for by application of a dropping factor fa

53272 The load FSa which shall be used for dimensioning see Figure 5-1 shall be calculated as follows

FSa = fa middot LN

fa = 1 ndash (1 + φ) middot

φ = 05 for grabs or slow load dropping= 10 for load magnets or fast load dropping

Figure 5-1 Dropping of a part of the useful load


DNV GL AS

Figure 5-2 Hoist load torn off (see

53273 When the dropping factor is fa lt 0 the load FSa may become negative as well This corresponds toa load directed upwards

5328 Tie-down force of the cargo hooksWhen cargo hooks are tied-down for the load condition crane out of service this load shall be considered asthe tie-down force This load shall be indicated by the manufacturer If no information is available this loadmay be assumed to be 10 of the nominal load LNe

533 Irregular loads5331 Wind loadsWind loads shall be assumed according to [4245]The total wind load acting on a crane structure is the sum of the single wind loads acting on its variousstructural components

5332 Snow and ice loadsFor snow and ice loads the requirements given in [4246] apply

5333 Temperature loadsFor temperature loads the requirements given in [4247] apply

5334 Side forces when driving (diagonal drive)

53341 The side forces occurring when the crane or trolley is being driven shall be taken into consideration

53342 When 2 wheels or wings are mounted for 1 rail the two forces generated by one-sided guidancemay be calculated by multiplying the wheel or wing load with the side force coefficient γSk according to Figure5-3 The side force coefficient γSk depends on the ratio between span bs and wheel spacing ℓr

53343 Two-sided guidances or more than 2 wheels or wings on 1 rail shall be considered separately


DNV GL AS

Figure 5-3 Side force coefficient γ

534 Special loads5341 Dynamic test loadsThe dynamic test loads LPdyn for cranes shall be taken from Table 13-2 The hoist load coefficient ψ may bereduced using the following formula

ψP = (1 + ψ) 2

5342 Buffering forces

53421 At the ends of carriage ways of cranes and trolleys arrestors shall be mounted with buffersattached either to them or to the cranesBuffers shall be dimensioned such that they are capable to absorb 70 of the kinetic energy of the loadinggear driving at maximum speed The mass of oscillatingly suspended hoist loads are not considered

53422 The impact force on the buffer shall be determined from the buffer characteristic and - in order totake into consideration the dynamic effect of the buffering force - to be multiplied with the following factor fp

fp = 125 for buffer with linear characteristic= 160 for buffer with rectangular characteristic

53423 Lower speeds than according to [53421] may be assumed if reliable (redundant) appliancesreduce the speed in way of the runway ends

5343 Loads on stairs ladders platforms and railingsFor access loads see the requirements given in [499]

5344 Loads due to safety systemsThe loads LS due to safety systems such as eg

mdash AOPS (Automatic Overload Protection System)mdash MOPS (Manual Overload Protection System)mdash ELRS (Emergency Load Release System)

shall be indicated by the crane manufacturer

5345 Tear-off of the hoist loadIn the catastrophic case of the hoist load torn off this results in fa = - 1 according to [53272] and Figure5-2 fa and with this the calculated load directed upwards becomes minus LH


DNV GL AS

54 Hoist load coefficients

541 General notes

5411 The hoist load or the loads resulting from it shall be multiplied with an allocated hoist load coefficientfor the lifting of the resting load If the crane has several hoisting appliances or differing hoisting speedsindividual hoist load coefficients shall be allocated to each of them

5412 For the strength analysis of load-bearing structural elements as far as its fastening to the ship hullreduced hoist load coefficients may be applied if the corresponding dampening in the load-bearing system isproven by calculation or measurement

542 Hoist load coefficient ψ as a function of crane group and hoistingspeed

5421 For harbour operations the hoist load coefficient may be simplified taken from Table 5-1

5422 An individual calculation of the hoist load coefficient according to [543] may be necessary oradvisable

Table 5-1 Hoist load coefficient for different crane groups

Crane-group Hoist load coefficient ψ ψmin

A1 105 + 034 middot vh 117

B1

C1 115 + 051 middot vh 135

For descriptions of crane groups see [522] to [524]vh acc to Table 5-2


Lifting gear type and hoisting speed vhLoad combination

HD 1 HD 2 HD 3 HD 4

LK I + LK II vhmax vhF vhF 05vhmax

LK III 1 minus vhmax minus vhmax

1) For lifting gear types HD 2 and HD 4 the hoist load coefficient ψ calculated from vhmax shall be proven as loadcombination III1


DNV GL AS

HD 1 = creep hoist not possibleHD 2 = creep hoist selectable by the crane driverHD 3 = creep hoist switched on automatically until the load is lifted from the groundHD 4 = hoisting speed is infinitely variable by the crane drivervhmax = maximum constant hoisting speed of the allocated load [ms]vhF = constant creep hoisting speed [ms]

543 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient ψ as a function of the cranestiffness5431 Harbour operation

54311 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient ψThe hoist load coefficient shall be calculated as follows

ψmin = minimum value according to Table 5-1vh = hoisting speed in the course of lifting of the nominal load according to Table 5-2 [ms]cs = crane stiffness according to [5433] [kNm]LNe = nominal load [t]

54312 Simplified calculation for jib cranes with hoisting and luffing ropesIn the case of jib cranes with hoisting and luffing ropes only the hoisting and luffing ropes as well as thecrane boom need to be included in the simplified calculation The hoist load coefficient ψ is then calculated asfollows

5432 Sea operation

54321 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient ψ

vr = relative speed between load and hook in the course of lifting the load [ms] according to[54322]

cs = crane stiffness [kNm] according to [5433]LNsee = nominal load at sea [t]ψ = hoist load coefficient for harbour operation


DNV GL AS

With the exception of cranes dimensioned only for sea operation the following condition shall be observed

LNe middot ψ ge LNsee middot ψsee

54322 Relative speed between load and hookvr = 05 middot vh + vsee [ms] for LCI [55211]

vr = vh + vsee [ms] for LCIII [55231]

vh = hoisting speed in the course of lifting the respective nominal load LNsee according to Table 5-2 [ms]

The minimum hoisting speed according to [57311] shall be taken if larger than vh

vsee = speed induced by seastate according to Table 5-3

Table 5-3 Speed induced by seastate v

From thelocationof thecrane(va)

to the cargo deck or to the sea surface (vd)

Fixedinstallation

Semi-submersible FSO FPSO Large barge Small barge Supply ship Sea surface

Fixedinstallation 0 025middot(H13)

075 032middot(H13)075 038middot(H13)

075 050middot(H13)075 070middot(H13)

075 085middot(H13)067

Semi-sub-

mersible025middotH13 035middot(H13)

090 040middot(H13)088 047middot(H13)

087 060middot(H13)083 073middot(H13)

080 090middot(H13)070

FSOFPSO 040middotH13 045middotH13 053middot(H13)

088 062middot(H13)090 070middot(H13)

090 080middot(H13)087 (H13)

078

Largebarge 060middotH13 065 middot H13 070middot(H13)

094 075middot(H13)094 085middot(H13)

094 090middot(H13)094 120middot(H13)

080

Smallbarge 110middotH13 111 middot H13 116middot(H13)

094 118middot(H13) 097 120middot(H13)

097 130middot(H13) 094 140middot(H13)

091

va = vertical speed of the crane boom peak [ms]

vd = vertical speed of the cargo deck or sea surface [ms]


5433 Calculation of the crane stiffness cs

54331 Principals of calculation544311 The stiffness of a crane depends on the load radius and the height of the load hook


DNV GL AS

544312 For calculation of the crane stiffness besides the ropes all load-bearing structures as far asthe fastening of the crane column or the crane base shall be taken into consideration with the exception of[54312]544312 Regarding the approach of the rope stiffness the Youngacutes modulus indicated by the ropemanufacturer shall be taken

54332 Permissible simplification for the calculation543321 For round strand ropes without a more precise proof a Youngrsquos modulus of 10 middot 105 Nmm2based on the gross cross-section may be taken543322 Curve-shaped load gradingIn the case of a uniform curve-shaped useful load vs load radius diagram the crane stiffness shall becalculated at least for the end points and the one-third points of the regarded range of load radius Based onthese values a continuous curve may be determined543323 Step-shaped load gradingIn the case of a step-shaped grading of the useful load vs load radius diagram the stiffness shall becalculated for each load level according to [543322] As an alternative the stiffness may be calculated forthe minimum load radius of each load level These values apply then for the whole range of one level543324 Height of the cargo hookFor operations in harbour conditions it may be assumed that the cargo hook is at the altitude of the craneboom pivot point For operations in seastate conditions it may be assumed that the cargo hook is 6 m abovethe water surface except for underwater operations

544 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient for hoists onboard the shipFor hoists onboard the ship the simplified hoist load coefficient for sea operations may be assumed to be

ψsee = 115 + 051 middot vh ge ψ

vh = hoisting speed in the course of lifting the nominal load according to Table 5-2 [ms]ψ = hoist load coefficient for harbour operation

545 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient for auxiliary hoistsThe hoist load coefficient for auxiliary hoists is calculated (simplified) to be

ψ = 120 + 068 middot vh ge ψmin = 145

546 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient by means of hydrodynamicanalysis

5461 Using model tests or stochastic and hydrodynamic calculation methods the hoist load coefficient canbe determined more accurate These methods generally apply for all service conditions of the crane

5462 The calculation shall be performed under consideration of the motion behavior of the floating bodiesinvolved and the stiffness of the crane Influences of special appliances such as rope-spindling devices orheave compensators may be taken into account in the process

5463 The calculation shall include at least the following influences if applicable

mdash vertical and horizontal motions of the cargo deckmdash motion behavior of the floating body on which the crane is mountedmdash load-bearing structure of the cranemdash hydrodynamic properties of a floating or submerged load


DNV GL AS

mdash influence of anchoring systemsmdash environmental conditions agreed

5464 The calculation shall be submitted to the Society for the examination of the crane as a document forinformation In particular the influences listed in [5463] shall be represented clearly in the document

55 Load combinations and partial safety factors

551 General notes

5511 The load combinations regarded as essential for cranes and their supporting structures are listed inthe Table 5-4 (Cranes in service) and Table 5-5 (Cranes out of service)Further load combinations may be relevant if necessary

5512 Only those load combinations from Table 5-4 Table 5-5 and further load combinations if necessarywhich are essential or necessary for the actual structural element under consideration shall be verified

5513 Regarding load combinations for operation at sea instead of ψ the hoist load coefficient ψsee forunderwater operations the hoist load coefficient ψu shall be taken

5514 The load combinations for the proof of stability against overturning are listed in Table 5-6

5515 The partial safety factors γpi shall be taken from Table 5-4 to Table 5-6

552 Explanations regarding load combinations for cranes in serviceaccording to5521 Load combinations IThe load combinations I include regular loads in normal service

55211 I ndash Lifting and setting-down of the nominal loadAll regular loads which occur during lifting and setting-down of a load shall be superposed as required forthe load combination I1For vertical and horizontal dynamic forces the requirements given in [5324] and [5325] apply

55212 I ndash Suspended loadAll regular loads which are generated by acceleration and deceleration forces of lifting gear luffing gear andtravelling gear when a load is positioned shall be superposed as required for the load combination I2 takinginto consideration static ship inclinations and possible diagonal pull

5522 Load combinations IIThe load combinations II include regular loads during normal service combined with non-regular loads

55221 II ndash Load combination I with wind loadsLoad combination II1 results from load combination I1 plus appropriate wind loads Snow ice oretemperature loads are only to be assumed upon agreement



DNV GL AS

55223 II ndash Constant drive including diagonal pullFor load combination II3 all loads shall be superimposed as required which occur at constant drive includingdiagonal pull Snow ice or temperature loads are only to be assumed upon agreement

5523 Load combinations IIILoad combinations III include special load combinations

55231 III ndash Hoisting of the nominal load at maximum hoisting speedComplementing load combination I1 load combination III1 includes operating errors during hoisting of theload The hoist load coefficient shall be determined for the maximum possible hoisting speed relative speedbetween load and hook and the respective load level

55232 III ndash Test loadsLoad combination III2 includes hoisting of the dynamic test load at 20 wind load

55233 III ndash Buffer forcesLoad combination III3 comprises the impact of a crane with hoist load against the end buffers

55234 III ndash Safety systemsLoad combination III4 comprises loads which may result from activated safety systems

55235 IIIndash Failure of hydraulic cylinderLoad combination III5 contains special load combinations covering a cylinder failure of a lifting applianceconveying persons

553 Explanations regarding load combinations for cranes out of serviceaccording to5531 Load combination ILoad combination IA includes regular loads for cranes out of service

55311 I ndash Combination of regular loadsFor load combination IA1 all regular loads shall be superimposed as required

5532 Load combination IIILoad combination IIIA includes special load combinations for cranes out of service

55321 III ndash Special load combinationFor load combination IIIA1 the wind loads out of operation shall be superimposed with the regular loads asrequired Snow ice or temperature loads are only to be assumed as non-regular loads upon agreement

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 114


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5

Table 5-4 Load combinations and partial safety factors for cranes in service

Load Combinations

I II IIILoadcate-gories

Loads i Reference

γpi I1 I2 γpi II1 II2 II3 γpi III1 III2 III3 III4 III5

Dead loads LE (including inclination ofcrane base) 1 4 321 122 1 10 10 116 1 10 10 10 1101 102 10 10 10 10

Hoist load LH 6(including inclination of

crane base) 2 4 322 134 ψ 10 122 ψ 10 10 110 mdash mdash 10 mdash 10

Dynamic forces due to drives 3 3 4 324 134 mdash 10 122 mdash 10 mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash

Regu

lar

load

s

Diagonal pull 4 4 326 134 ψ 10 122 ψ 10 mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash

Wind loads in operation 5 4 331 122 10 10 10 110 mdash 02 mdash mdash 10

Snow and ice loads 6 4 332 122 10 10 10 mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash

Temperature loads 7 4 333 116 10 10 10 mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash

Non

-reg

ular

load

s

Side forces during drive

8 4 333 116 mdash mdash 10 mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash mdash

Hoisting of hoist load at vhmax 9 4 Table5-2 110 ψmax mdash mdash mdash mdash

Dynamic test load Lpdyn(includinginclination of crane base) 10 4 341 110 mdash ψp mdash mdash mdash

Buffing forces 11 4 342 110 mdash mdash 10 mdash mdashSpe

cial

load

s

Loads caused by safety systems 4 5 12 4 344 110 mdash mdash 10 mdash

Drag coefficient γm 110 110 110

Global safety coefficient γs 148 134 122

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 115


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5

Load Combinations


Loads i Reference


1) When load components have a favourable effect γpi = 095 If masses and centres of gravity are determined by weighing 095 middot γpi may be assumed2) Components caused by inclination of crane base may be neglected3) Applicable for load components from dead load and hoistload4) Emergency stop shall be verified by a practical test with a test load of LPdyn see Sec11 [24223]5) Loads which may be generated by activated safety systems shall be indicated by the manufacturer6) For load combination III5 LH = SWL (M)


DNV GL AS

554 Explanations regarding load combinations for the proof of stabilityagainst overturning according to5541 Load combination ILoad combination I includes regular loads under normal operation

55411 I- Combination of regular loadsFor load combination I1 all regular loads shall be superimposed as necessary

5542 Load combination IILoad combination II includes regular loads in normal operation together with non-regular load

55421 II - Load combination I with wind loadsLoad combination II results from load combination I plus allocated wind loads

5543 Load combination IIILoad combinations III comprise special load combinations

55431 III - Test loadsLoad combination III1 considers the hoisting of the dynamic test load at a 20 wind load

55432 III - Buffer forcesLoad combination III3 comprises the impact of a crane with hoist load against the end buffers

Table 5-5 Load combinations and partial safety factors for cranes out of service

Load combinations

IA IIIALoadcategories Loads i Reference

γpi IA1 γpi IIIA1

Dead loads LE 1 4 321 122 1 10 110 1 10

Dynamic forces due to ship motions 2 4 3253 134 10 110 10Regular loads

Tie-down force of the cargo hook 3 4 328 122 10 110 10

Snow and ice loads 4 4 332 110 10Non-regularloads Temperature loads 5 4 333 105 10

Special loads Wind loads out of operation 6 3 331 110 10

Drag coefficient γm 110 110

Global safety coefficient γs 148 122

1) Where load components have a favorable effect γpi = 095


DNV GL AS

Table 5-6 Load combinations and partial safety factors for proof of stability against overturning

Load combinations

I II IIILoadcategories Loads i Reference

γpi I1 γpi II1 γpi III1 III2

Dead loads LE (including inclinationof the crane base) 1 4 321 110 1 10 110 1 10 110 1 10 10

Hoist load LH (including inclinationof the crane base) 2 4 322 134 10 122 10 110 minus 10

Dynamic forces due to drives 2 3 4 324 134 10 122 10 110 minus 10

Regular loads

Diagonal pull 4 4 326 134 10 122 10 minus minus minus

Non-regular loads Wind loads in operation 5 4 331 122 10 110 02 10

Dynamic test load Lpdyn (includinginclination of the crane base) 6 4 341 116 10 minus

Special loads

Buffer forces 7 4 342 110 minus 10

1) Where load components have a favourable effect γpi = 0952) Applicable for load components from dead load and hoist load

56 Proofs

561 General

5611 The following proofs shall be conducted for all structural elements connections and supportingstructures of cranes for the conditions in service and out of service

mdash strength analysis according to [44] and [48]mdash proof of stability according to [44]mdash fatigue strength analysis according to [46]

5612 The following proofs shall be conducted for a complete crane as required

mdash proof of stability against overturning according to [45]mdash proof of suitability for use according to [47]

5613 For the proof of crane boom supports and rectan-gular crane columns the requirements given in[566] and [567] apply

562 Strength analyses and proofs of stability

5621 Strength analyses and proofs of stability shall be conducted using the partial safety factors of Table5-4 or Table 5-5 respectively for the load combinations of [55]


DNV GL AS

563 Fatigue strength analyses

5631 In general fatigue strength analyses shall be conducted for the load combination I of Table 5-4 andTable 5-5 with the partial safety factors γpi = 10As a basis for dimensioning regarding fatigue strength analyses the crane manufacturer shall provide loadcycles and the respective load spectrum (see also Table 5-7)

Table 5-7 Load spectra and load cycles (examples for a service life of 20 years) for ships andfloating cranes in harbour operation

Crane groupacc to [52] Crane type

Load spectrumacc to Sec4

[465]No of load cycles

Hatch cover crane

Engine roomworkshop crane

Provision crane

S6

S2

S2

20000

10000

20000

A1

Cranes operatingon ships

Hose crane S6 50000

A3

Floating cranes

Mounting crane SWL le 60 t

Mounting crane 60 t lt SWL le 500 t

Mounting crane SWL gt 500 t

S2

S3

S4

80000

50000

20000

B1

Ship cranes

Container crane SWL le 60 t

General cargo crane SWL le 60 t

General cargo crane 60 t lt SWL le 250 t


General cargo crane SWL gt 500 t

S3

S2

S3

S4

S4

350000

250000

100000

70000

50000

B3

Floating cranes

Cargo-handling crane SWL le 60 t

Cargo-handling crane 60 t lt SWL le 250 t


Cargo-handling crane SWL gt 500 t

S2

S3

S4

S4

300000

125000

80000

60000

C1

Ship cranes

Grab crane SWL le 60 t

Gab crane SWL gt 60 t

Pallet crane

S5

S5

S6

600000

450000

600000

C3

Floating cranes


Grab crane SWL gt 60 t

Lighter crane

S5

S5

S5

700000

500000

2000000

5632 For cranes with load cycle numbers le 20000 a fatigue strength analysis may be dispensed with

5633 The fatigue strength analysis for the condition out of service shall be conducted for a load cyclenumber of 5 middot 107 This assumes a straight-line spectrum A according to Figure 4-3

5634 Superposition of in service and out of serviceA superposition of the fatigue damage due to the conditions in service and out of service is not necessaryas long as the maximum stress in the condition out of service does not exceed 10 of the maximum stress


DNV GL AS

in the condition in service Or else the load spectrum applicable for the analysis and the allocated load cyclenumbers shall be agreed with the Society

564 Proof of stability against overturning

5641 The proof of stability against overturning shall be conducted with the partial safety factors and loadcombinations according to Table 5-6 unless not shown in practice see [45213]

565 Proof of suitability for use5651 Proof procedures

56511 Proofs of suitability for use may be performed in the course of the initial testing on boardmathematically or as a combination of both procedures

56512 In general the mathematical proof of suitability for use shall be conducted for the load combinationI according to Table 5-4 and Table 5-5 using partial safety factors γpi = 10

5652 Proof of permissible deflection of crane boomsThe maximum deflection of pressure-loaded crane booms shall correspond to the crane boom length dividedby 350 if the dead weight alone is considered and to the crane boom length divided by 250 if dead weightplus hoist load are consideredThe peak of crane booms under bending stress which are held by luffing cylinders shall in general not exceeda vertical lowering of the maximum crane boom length divided by 100

5653 Proof against remaining in the highest crane boom position

56531 Where no restoring or warning devices according to [1221122] are provided a proof ofsuitability for use shall be shown for crane booms handled by luffing ropes under the following boundaryconditions

mdash dead load coefficient φe = 095 for all load components of the crane boom unless they are confirmed byweighing Else φe = 10

mdash static ship inclinations according to Table 4-1mdash hoist load coefficient ψ = 10mdash wind load acting unfavourably calculated from 80 of the mean dimensioning wind speed in service

according to [4245]mdash consideration of all friction and guide losses

56532 For crane booms handled by cylinders the requirements given in [122113] apply

566 Proof of crane boom supportsCrane boom supports shall be proven for the load combinations in Table 5-5 and the allocated partial safetyfactors In addition the following shall be observed

mdash The dead load also includes the dead load component of the crane boommdash Where a relative movement is possible between the crane boom and the crane boom support additionally

an alternating friction force shall be considered with a friction coefficient of at least μ = 015mdash tie-down force of a cargo hook (see [575])


DNV GL AS

567 Proof for rectangular crane columnsA general strength analysis shall be conducted regarding the maximum corner stress This is done byallocating the maximum crane moment MKmax to the main axes of the crane column in the most unfavourabledistribution

57 Requirements for design and equipment

571 General noteThe following statements complement the requirements given in this and other sections of this standardStructural elements details of equipment and design which are not covered shall be dealt with according tothe Generally recognized rules of good practice

572 Supporting structures5721 Design requirements for crane columns

57211 Access to cranesRegarding the accesses to cranes inside or outside of crane columns the statements in [10622] and[12214] apply

57212 Notes on design and calculation572121 In the case of tapered transition components which transit from a cylindrical crane connectionto a rectangular column special attention shall be paid to the knuckle line between the cambered parts andthe plane gussets If necessary thicker plates shall be provided572122 In way of connections of tapered or trapezoid transitions of crane columns knuckle linesespecially of even plates shall be stiffened if necessary by bulkheads in order to absorb the deviation forces572123 The transition parts and their connection areas described above require special care regardingfabrication and suitable mathematical proofs572124 The connection of container supports to crane columns requires special care regarding designand calculation

57213 Execution of cylindrical crane columns weldsIn the case of cylindrical crane columns all transverse and longitudinal welds shall be the full penetrationtype

57214 Execution of rectangular crane columns weldsAll transverse welds of rectangular crane columns shall be the full penetration type Regarding longitudinalwelds the following applies

a) Longitudinal welds in the plates shall be the full penetration typeb) The connecting welds at the corners may be dimensioned for the maximum shear force and may be

executed as fillet welds

57215 Connection to the ship hull572151 Wherever possible crane columns should be linked to the hull over a full deck height ifnecessary eg in the case of crane columns located at the shiprsquos side even to a greater depth into thestructure of the ship572152 Supporting structures interrupted by decks shall have well aligned connections If necessarycontrol bores shall be provided which shall be welded up after the control


DNV GL AS

572153 For the shear connection of inserted cylindrical crane columns the required plate thickness ofthe connecting deck or of the connecting weld may be calculated according to [494]572154 Crane columns which due to their location act as stiffness-discontinuities in the longitudinal andtransverse structures of ships such as eg laterally arranged crane columns with outer longitudinal wallswhich are attached to the shell plating of the ship shall have suitable taper brackets as required572155 Crane columns shall not be connected to hatch coamings if possible Where the connection tohatch coamings cannot be avoided suitable measures are required like eg tapered brackets and strengthanalyses for the additional loads

5722 Requirements for the design of the stowage trough of crane boom supports

57221 If possible the stowage trough shall embrace the stowage spur or a stowage holm without majorclearance (10 to 20 mm at maximum) and be lined with wood or other suitable material

57222 The gripping effect in the stowage trough caused by torsion of the shiprsquos hull in particular withcrane booms which are not stowed lengthwise shall be counteracted by a suitable design

57223 Where a luffing rope operated crane boom is not fixed downwards by tying-down of the cargo hooklocking devices shall be provided in way of the stowing trough in order to prevent of the crane boom comingoffThese devices shall not restrain the relative motions between stowing trough and crane boom

57224 Each stowing trough shall be accessible by means of ladders or climbing irons and locally provide asuitable area for operating control andor maintenance purposes

573 Hook speeds when operating under sea state5731 Minimum hoisting speed

57311 Cranes with a nominal load le 60 t573111 When operating under sea state conditions the hoisting speed shall be high enough to avoidrepeated contact between load and cargo deck after hoisting573112 The uniform minimum hoisting speed vhmin shall not fall below the following value

mdash multiple- reeved cargo runnervhmin ge 03 middot vsee [ms]

mdash single-reeved cargo runner

vhmin ge 05 middot vsee [ms]

vsee = sea state-induced speed according to Table 5-3 [ms]

57312 Cranes with a nominal load gt 60 tWhen operating under sea state conditions the hook speed resulting from superimposing the hoisting andthe luffing speed as well as the ballast speed of the floating body shall be high enough to avoid damage tothe crane or the load from repeated contact between load and cargo deck

5732 Horizontal hook speed

57321 Revolving cranes with a nominal load le 60 t573211 During loading and unloading of floating bodies it is important that the crane hook is capable offollowing the horizontal movement of the cargo deck


DNV GL AS

573212 The uniform slewing speed vω at the crane boom peak at about frac34 of the maximum load radiusshall not fall below the following value

vω ge 060 middot vsee [ms]


57322 Revolving cranes with a nominal load gt 60 t573221 The luffing speed and luffing acceleration shall be sufficient to ensure control of transverse loadoscillation573222 Load arresting ropes which limit the swinging of the load may be taken into considerationaccording to their effectiveness

5733 Luffing speedThe uniform vertical luffing speed vW at the crane boom peak at about frac34 of the maximum load radius shallnot fall below the following value

vW ge 010 middot vsee [ms]

574 Design details5741 Connection of slewing bearings

57411 Proof of bolts574111 The bolt connection shall be dimensioned according to recognized guidelines calculationprinciples or standards according to which if need be also a fatigue strength proof for the bolts can beconducted eg VDI-Guideline 2230The global safety factors according to [4382] shall be proven574112 Special care shall be taken over the determination of the maximum bolt force as eg anopening of the gap increases the bolt force non-linear574113 The stiffness of the slewing bearing can have a significant influence on the stress distribution inthe connecting structure The sector force Fa for the maximum loaded bolt according to Figure 5-4 shall bedetermined according to a recognized calculation procedure (eg FEM calculation under consideration of theconnecting structures stiffness) or by measurement574114 A simplified bolt proof according to [57412] can be conducted on condition the restrictions forapplication according to [74121] are complied with

Figure 5-4 Bolt sector and sector force


DNV GL AS

57412 Simplified bolt proof574121 Restrictions for application

The simplified bolt proof can be applied if

mdash the outer bolt circle diameter does not exceed 35 mmdash stiffness of connecting structures (eg crane house crane pedestal) is approximately equal over the

circumferencemdash foot bearings of jibs and if applicable bearings of hydraulic cylinders on the crane house sufficiently

distant from the base plate of the crane housemdash the bolts of the standing and of the rotating ring are even distributed over the circumference and their

quantity per ring is not less than 12mdash the following relations are kept

a le 2 middot dℓ

b ge 15 middot dℓ

ba ge 075

a b dℓ according to Figure 5-6

d = thread diameter of bolt

574122 Format of proof

The following relations shall be kept

Zmax Zlimit le 1 or Zmax le Zlimit

Zmax = maximum tensile force in bolt according to [574123] [kN]Zlimit = limit value of tensile force in bolt according to [574128] [kN]

574123 Maximum tensile force in bolt

The maximum tensile force in the bolt is calculated as follows

Zmax = f middot Znom [kN]

Znom = nominal tensile force of the highest loaded bolt of a multiple bolt connection according to[574127] [kN]

f = form factor according to Table 5-8 [-]

574124 Forces on a large slewing bearing

For the terms and forces in Figure 5-5 the following abbreviations are valid which apply to the outer ringanalogously

Dr = roller circle diameter [mm]Dt = pitch circle diameter [mm]Dm = middle diameter of pedestal [mm]a = distance between pitch circle and middle of pedestal wall [mm]br = vertical force lever [mm]


DNV GL AS

e = distance between bolt centre and start of chamfer (constraint lever) [mm]hr = horizontal force lever [mm]tf = flange thickness [mm]tw = wall thickness of pedestal [mm]

574125 Load from the crane

The following loads shall be determined including the global safety factor γs according to [4382] for themost unfavourable load combination according to Table 5-4 and Table 5-5

MSd = tilting moment [Nmm]VSd = vertical force [N]HSd = horizontal force [N]

574126 Forces acting on the ring per bolt sector

According to Figure 5-5 the following forces are valid in case VSd is pointing in that direction shown in Figure5-5 (compressive force)

[N]

[N]

[N]

Table 5-8 Form factors

Tensile class of boltKind of flange connection

88 109 129

Tensioning procedure with torsion 13876 13592Ball bearing

Tensioning procedure without torsion 11563 1132713451

Tensioning procedure with torsion 12923 12659Roller bearing


D = lowest value of Dm Dt and Dr

ns = number of boltsFhd = Fvd middot γh [N]

Fhz = Fvz middot γh [N]


DNV GL AS

Figure 5-5 Forces on a large slewing bearing

Fhd Fhz forces between the rings with influence to the bolt forces

γh = horizontal force coefficient= 0 for multi row bearing= 0577 for single row ball bearing= 1 for single row cross roller bearing

574127 Calculation of maximum nominal tensile force

Based on the dimensions acc to Figure 5-5 and on the forces acting on the bearing ring acc to [574126]the maxi-mum nominal tensile force is calculated as follows

Znom =

574128 Limit value of tensile force of bolt

The limit value of tensile force of the bolt shall be calculated as follows

Zlimit = σlimit middot Ak 1000 [kN]

σlimit = limit stress acc to Table 5-10 [Nmm2]Ak = core section of bolt acc to Table 4-13 [mm2]


DNV GL AS

Table 5-9 Limit stresses of bolts

Tensile class 88 109 129

Limit stress σlimit [Nmm2] 560 768 912

57413 Requirements for the flange574131 Flange connection

In general the upper part of crane columns which are provided with a flange for connection to a slewingbearing shall be designed according to Figure 5-6 In the case of an inner bore circle the same conditionsapply

Figure 5-6 Upper part of crane column

574132 Dimensioning of the flange

Dt = partial circle diameterDa = outer cylinder diametertf = flange thicknessdℓ = bore diameterr = corner radius

a = external partial circle

a = internal partial circle

h = height of connection areatw1 = cylinder wall thickness in the connection areatw2 = cylinder wall thickness below the connection area


DNV GL AS

The flanges shall be designed and dimensioned according to [49152] As far as no proof by FE-computation has been conducted in addition the following conditions shall be met

tf ge 3 middot tw1

tw1 ge 15 middot tw2

574133 Facing

The flange thickness according to [574132] shall still be warranted after the facing

574134 Flange evenness

The evenness of the connecting areas on a slewing bearing shall meet the requirements given by themanufacturer of this bearing

574135 Use of compounds

The use of compounds in order to achieve the evenness required by the manufacturer of the slewing bearingis only accepted in exceptional cases for repair purposes upon agreement by the Society and slewing bearingmanufacturer

57414 Requirements for the cylinder wall in the connection area574141 DimensioningThe wall thickness t1 and the connection weld shall be dimensioned with regard to fatigue strength574142 Height of connectionAs far as no proof by FE-computation has been conducted the height of the uppermost cylinder sectionaccording to Figure 5-6 shall at least be 02 middot Da where the upper limiting point is formed either by the loweredge of the flange or by the lower edge of brackets

57415 Revolving circle diameter of the slewing bearings574151 The diameter of the revolving circle shall correspond to the mean diameter of the upper andlower connection cylinder if possible in order to avoid additional measures such as eg welding of brackets574152 Where brackets shall be attached they shall not be spaced further than two bore distances

57416 Requirements for bolts and bores574161 In general the span length of bolts shall be at least 5 middot ds574162 At least 6 thread turns shall remain free574163 The connecting bolts of slewing bearings of cranes of the groups B2 B3 and C shall have rolledthreads574164 The size of bolt bores shall be indicated by the bearing manufacturer (in general according to[4912])

5742 Doubling platesDoubling plates for the transmission of tension forces and bending moments are not permissible

5743 Cruciform jointsRegarding cruciform joints for the transmission of forces perpendicular to the roll direction the requirementsgiven in [48124] apply

5744 Joints of runwaysRunways shall be welded continuously and the welds shall be executed such that no vertical dynamic forcescan be induced when travelling


DNV GL AS

575 Securing of the hook in the condition crane out of serviceThe swinging of cargo hooks in the condition crane out of service shall be prevented by design unless theyare tied-down The tie-down force may exceed 10 of the nominal load LNe only in cases where this was abasis for the dimensioning


DNV GL AS

SECTION 6 SPECIAL LIFTING APPLIANCES AND MEANS OFTRANSPORT

61 General

611 This section deals with the requirements for the design and dimensioning as well as for the manufacture andoperation of special lifting appliances and means of transport

612 As regards requirements for the materials to be used as well as for manufacture and welding therequirements given in Sec3 and Sec11 apply

613 Calculation and dimensioning shall be based on Sec4 and Sec9 as well as further sections as requiredDeviating requirements given in this section shall be observed

614 For machinery components and the electrical fittings on special lifting appliances and means of transport therequirements given in Sec9 and Sec11 shall be complied with if applicable

615 Accessories shall be selected using recognized standards The dimensioning of non-standard accessories canbe carried out in accordance with Sec7

62 Rope and chain hoists

621 General notes

6211 The requirements that follow apply to rope and chain hoists regardless of drive mode which are notused for handling cargo They only apply to manually operated devices however where relevant

6212 Handling of goods for ship operation is not regarded as cargo handling

622 Manufacture6221 MaterialsIn addition to the steels and materials generally used for machinery components special steels aluminiumplastics and other materials can be used if they are appropriate for the intended use

6222 DimensioningThe requirements given in [613] also apply to foundations or runway girders of rope and chain hoistsproduced in series


DNV GL AS

623 Equipment and safety regulationsFor all types of drive the requirements given in Sec12 shall also be observed if applicable In addition thefollowing applies

6231 Overload protection

62311 Series production623111 For hydraulic pneumatic and electrical hoist drives effective overload protection devices shall beprovided623112 In the case of hydraulic hoist drives pressure relief valves are permissible up to a nominal loadof 1000 kg623113 As regards response limits and response tolerances of overload protection devices the settingsor parameters given by the manufacturer apply

62312 Individual productionFor rope and chain hoists manufactured by individual or special production the requirements given in[12411] apply

6232 Hook travel limits

62321 General requirements623211 Rope and chain hoists shall have limit switches for the upper and lower hook position623212 In the case of power-operated rope and chain hoists the limit switches shall act mechanicallyandor electrically on the hoist drives

62322 Series production623221 For hydraulic pneumatic and electrical hoist drives effective limit switches for the hook travelshall be provided

62323 Individual productionFor rope and chain hoists manufactured by individual or special production limit switches for the upper andlower hook position shall be provided which function electrically

6233 Runway limitAs regards runway limit the requirements given in [5342] and [1242] apply if applicable

6234 Slack rope limitIn special cases slack rope monitoring and limitation may be required eg at high hoist speeds withmultiple coils or if required by the mode of operation

6235 Eye plates for load testsIt is recommended suitable eye plates be fitted to the shiprsquos hull for load tests on hoisting ropes and hoistingchains located below deck For this kind of load test the application of the test load shall be conducted with aseparate manual hoist only but not with the power drive of the rope or chain hoist itself

624 Means of suspension6241 Hoisting ropes

62411 General notes624111 Hoisting ropes and their end attachments are covered by the requirements given in Sec8624112 Wire-ropes made of stainless materials as well as fibre ropes may be allowed for specialpurposes if suitable and if the design of the hoist rope is verified accordingly


DNV GL AS

62412 Safety against fracture624121 Safety against fracture is defined by the coefficient of utilization γ D1 or γ F according to Table8-2 and Table 8-4 and this shall be applied to the maximum static hoisting rope force

624122 When using rope hoists below deck γD1 may be le 40624123 For the use of rope hoists above deck the following applies

a) In the case of rope hoists manufactured by series production γD1 may be le 40 unless nationalregulations dictate otherwise

b) For rope hoists manufactured by individual or special production the values in Table 8-2 and Table 8-4shall be used without limitation of γD1 or γF

6242 Hoisting chains

62421 General notes624211 Hoisting chains shall comply with recognized standards624212 Chain wheels of hoisting chains as well as their end links or fasteners for leading-in the towchain shall conform to standards

62422 Safety against fractureThe breaking load of hoisting chains shall be at least the γK-fold of the chains maximum static towing forceThe following coefficients of utilization γK shall be applied

γK ge 50 (power-driven)

γK ge 40 (operated manually)

6243 Accessories

62431 Accessories such as eg cargo hooks shackles and rope sockets shall comply with recognizedstandards and shall be dimensioned for test loads according to Table 7-4

62432 The dimensions of the eye plates on normal strength and high strength shackles shall comply withthe Tables in Sec7

62433 Regarding the use of detachable rope end attachments (rope sockets or rope clamps) therequirements given in [8423] apply

625 Examination of drawings and supervision of construction6251 Series production

62511 Manufacturers of rope and chain hoists made by series production are permitted to produce undertheir own responsibility and to certify their products themselves if the manufacturing processes and productsare certified in a legally-binding and recognized manner eg by type approvalFor those in addition to drawings of foundations or runway girders including fastenings the followinginformation at a minimum shall be submitted if applicable

mdash designation of manufacturer and typemdash nominal load(s) and dead weight(s)mdash hoist speed and operating speed if applicablemdash type of drivemdash type(s) of electrical protection see [10617]mdash further information as required


DNV GL AS

62512 For the Societys type approval see DNVGL CP 0338 applies

6252 Individual production

62521 Rope and chain hoists manufactured by in-dividual or special production are subject to examinationof drawings and supervision of construction by the Society

62522 For the examination of drawings the list of documents to be submitted for examination inSec2 shall be applied as and where relevant In addition the following drawings and information shall besubmitted if applicable

mdash housingmdash rollers including fastening to housingmdash form-locking drive devices such as eg rack bars and pinionsmdash runway limitsmdash details of hoisting ropes and hoisting chains including end attachmentsmdash rope-sheaveschain wheelsmdash foundations or runway girders including fasteningsmdash stowage position including fastening devicesmdash further documents as required

62523 For supervision of construction the requirements given in [132] apply

626 Tests and examinations on board

6261 For the initial test and examination the requirements given in [133] apply

6262 For the periodic testing and examinations the requirements given in [134] apply

627 Documentation6271 IdentificationFor the identification of rope and chain hoists the requirements given in [132421] [1325] and [1326]and [1335] apply

6272 Certificates

62721 Certificates for production627211 Series productionRope and chain hoists manufactured by series production shall be delivered with a test report as well as withtest reports for all means of suspension such as ropes chains and accessories627212 Individual productionFor rope and chain hoists manufactured by individual or special production the Societys product testcertificate Form 2092a based on an examination before delivery is requiredThe Societys test certificates shall be submitted for all means of suspension such as ropes chains andaccessories

62722 Certificate for load tests627221 Certificates to be issued after every load test due to national regulations are described in[137]627222 For rope and chain hoists which shall not be subjected to ongoing control by the Society theSociety may recognize deviating forms or certificates not issued by the Societys surveyor


DNV GL AS

6273 Register book

62731 All certificates for means of suspension and load tests investigation reports as well as informationfor operation (manuals maintenance protocols etc) where applicable shall be compiled in a register bookand stored For details see [137]

63 Ramps and car decks

631 General notes

6311 Testing investigation and certification of ramps and car decks fixed to the ship is part of theclassification of the ship

6312 As regards naval-architectural concerns such as ships strength water-tightness impact stress bythe sea etc the requirements given in RU SHIP Pt3 apply

6313 The following requirements relate to mobile shipboard ramps and car decks operated under load

632 Production6321 MaterialsIn addition to ship structural steels other steels and aluminium may also be used for load-bearingconstructions if they are suitable for the intended purposeFor machinery components materials shall be selected in accordance with the DNV GL rules

6322 Dimensioning

63221 The dimensioning of steel or aluminium ramp or car deck construction shall comply with therequirements given in [6312]

63222 For the dimensioning of structural or machinery components of rope or chain drives a hoist loadcoefficient of ψ = 115 shall be applied to moved masses

633 Equipment and safety regulations6331 Scratch boards railings and barriers

63311 Ramps and car decks shall be fitted with scratch boards railings and barriers as necessary For thedimensioning of railings [4992] appliesScratch boards for motor vehicles shall be designed to meet the line loads according to Table 6-1

Table 6-1 Loading scratch boards

Vehicle type Line load Height of load application

Passenger vehicles 2 kNm 03 m

Trucks 5 kNm 05 m

63312 The construction of scratch boards railings and barriers including their associated safety devicessuch as eg colour markings photoelectric barriers and warning signals are subject to drawing examinationby the Society


DNV GL AS

6332 Anti-slip safeguardsRamps shall be fitted with welded-on or bolted-on anti-slip safeguardsIn special cases anti-slip paint may be permitted in lieu

6333 Ramp inclinationRamp inclination shall not in general exceed the ratio 110

6334 Permissible deflection

63341 The permissible deflection of ramps and car decks under nominal load in the stowed position shallnot exceed

f =

where

f = deflection (depth gauge)bs = spacing of supports (span)

63342 In the stowed position the deflection may not endanger either the water-tightness of the ship orany cargo (eg vehicles) underneath

6335 Stowage positions

63351 In the stowage positions provided ramps and car decks shall not be hung on ropes or chains butshall have mechanical supports and locks

63352 Supports and locks shall be dimensioned according to the requirements given in [6312] andsafeguard the water-tightness of the ship where ramps are part of the shell

634 Means of suspension6341 Hoisting rope and suspension rope

63411 General notes634111 For hoisting ropes and suspension ropes and their end attachments the requirements given inSec8 apply634112 Wire ropes of stainless materials as well as fibre ropes may be permitted for special purposes inindividual cases if they are suitable and if the design of the rope drive is adjusted accordingly634113 Fibre ropes for the transport of persons are only permitted under special conditions

63412 Safety against fracture634121 Safety against fracture is defined by the coefficient of utilization γD1 or γD2 according to Sec8Table 8-2 and shall be applied to the maximum static towing rope force634122For hoisting ropes the following safety factors shall be applied depending on the mode of operation inaccordance with Table 8-2

mdash operation without useful load = γD1 ge 36mdash operation with useful load = γD1mdash operation involving persons = γD1 middot 20


DNV GL AS

634123 Ramps which are not supported at their free end when used by vehicles may apart from chainsalso be fixed by hoisting ropes or special suspension wires In this case the following safety factors shall beused

mdash hoisting ropes or guided suspension ropes = γD1 middot 20mdash suspension ropes not guided = γD2 middot 20

6342 Hoisting chains and suspension chains

63421 General notes634211 Hoisting chains and suspension chains shall comply with recognized standards634212 Chain wheels as well as their end links or fasteners for leading in the tow chain shall be selectedin conformance with standards

63422 Safety against fractureThe breaking load of hoisting chains and suspension chains shall be at least the γK-fold of the chainsmaximum static towing force Depending on the mode of operation the following coefficients of utilization γKshall be applied

mdash operation without useful load = γK ge 28mdash operation with useful load = γKge 40mdash operation involving persons = γK ge 80

6343 Accessories

63431 The requirements given in [62431] and [62432] shall be observed

63432 Detachable rope end attachments (rope sockets or rope clamps) are not permitted for rope drivesof ramps and car decks

6344 Hydraulic cylindersHydraulic cylinders shall be dimensioned in accordance with [492]

635 Examination of drawings and supervision of manufactureRamps and car decks are subject to examination of drawings and supervision of manufacture

6351 Examination of drawingsFor the examination of drawings the list of documents to be submitted in [21] shall be applied as and whererelevant In addition the following drawings and information shall be submitted if applicable

mdash overview drawing with layout and numbering of ramps and car decks where applicablemdash complete rope drives and chain drivesmdash guide blocks including fasteningsmdash scratch boards barriers and railingsmdash rigging plansmdash additional documents as required

6352 Supervision of manufactureFor the supervision of manufacture the requirements given in [132] apply


DNV GL AS

636 Tests and investigations on board6361 Initial test and investigation

63611 For the initial test and investigation the requirements given in [133] apply

63612 The load tests with test loads according to Table 13-2 shall be performed statically in the stowagepositions and dynamically for the movable installations

6362 Periodic testing and investigations

63621 As part of the shiprsquos Classification ramps and car decks are subject to annual Class surveys and 5-year Class Renewal surveys Instead provision is made for annual performance tests but not for 5-year loadtests

63622 Where required by national regulations ramps and car decks shall be treated like cargo gear Therequirements given in [134] apply in this case During the 5-years load tests [63612] shall be observed

637 Documentation6371 IdentificationFor the identification of ramps and car decks the requirements given in [1325] [1326] and [1335]apply

6372 Certificates

63721 Manufacturing certificates637211 The manufacturer of ramps and car decks shall supply the Societys test certificates for allmeans of suspension such as ropes chains accessories and hydraulic cylinders as well as for winches637212 As confirmation of investigation before deli-very the Societys test certificate Form 2092a isrequired for every ramp and every car deck or for every series of such ship components

63722 Certificates for load tests637221 As a confirmation of the load tests the Societys test certificate Form 208 is required for everyramp and every car deck or for every series of such ship components637222 Where due to national regulations ramps and car decks shall be treated like cargo gear therequirements given in [1336] and [1346] apply

6373 Register book

63731 All certificates for means of suspension and load tests investigation reports as well as informationabout operation (manuals maintenance protocols etc) where applicable shall be compiled in a registerbook and stored For details see [137]

63732 Confirmation of the class surveys according to [63621] is effected within the scope of shipclassification Relevant excerpts of the survey report for the ship may be added to the documentation file


DNV GL AS

64 Lifting appliances for research work

641 General notes

6411 Lifting appliances for research work are employed for the extraction of seabed samples and watersamples for towing and for general handling of research equipment In the process ropes cables or acombination of both are utilized

6412 Exceptional loads may result from large rope or cable lengths from ship movements or fromextraction devices getting caught as well as being pulled out of the sediment

6413 Lifting appliances for research work are eg

mdash stern gantry cranemdash slewing gallowsmdash lateral outriggermdash hatch beammdash loading gear with special functionsmdash A-frames

642 Treatment of loading gear for research workLifting appliances for research work is treated like lifting appliances not intended for the handling of cargoThe following specific features however shall be considered

643 Special features6431 Dimensioning

64311 Lifting appliances for research work shall be dimensioned for the breaking loads of ropes or cablesFor the dimensioning the following load combination shall be assumed following Table 5-4 load combinationIII

mdash dead loads γpi = 110mdash ropecable breaking load γpi = 110mdash diagonal pull γpi = 110mdash resistance coefficient γm = 110

In general for this purpose the diagonal pull shall be assumed for the most unfavourable direction as follows

mdash lifting 15degmdash towing longitudinally to the ship 30degmdash towing transversely to the ship 45deg

64312 Where lifting appliances for research work are also intended for handling goods for ship operationit shall also be dimensioned accordingly

64313 Accessories shall be selected in such a way that the breaking load of ropes or cables corresponds tothe test loads of the accessories stated in Table 7-4


DNV GL AS

6432 Marking

64321 When marking lifting appliances for research work the requirements given in [1325] applyInstead of SWL and a quantity in kg or t the minimum breaking load of the rope as MBLRope and a quantity[kN] shall be used

64322 Where several ropes or cables are attached to one lifting appliance marking is required on everysingle rope or cable

64323 Where lifting appliances for research work are also intended for handling goods for ship operationit shall also be marked with SWLWhen determining the quantity to be indicated the breaking load of the rope shall be divided by thecoefficient of utilization γD1 in accordance with Table 8-2 and then to be converted into kg or t

6433 Operating manual

64331 An individual operating instruction shall be prepared for every lifting appliance for research work inwhich the special features of operation and control are described

64332 Operating manuals are subject to examination and shall remain permanently on board as part ofthe lifting appliance documentation

65 Industrial cargo-handling vehicles

651 General notes

6511 The following requirements apply to industrial cargo-handling vehicles in series production which arecertified in a legally-binding or recognized manner unless otherwise provided by national regulations

6512 Prerequisites for use on board are proofs of stability against overturning see [4522] and at aminimum the existence of test reports

6513 The requirements given in [653] and [654] apply only to industrial cargo-handling vehicles whichremain in permanent employment on board

652 Safety regulations

6521 The employment of industrial cargo-handling vehicles on board presupposes that decks and hatchcovers are adequately dimensioned to be run over

6522 Where industrial cargo-handling vehicles remain permanently on board fastening arrangements(eg eye plates) for securing for use at sea shall be fitted both to the vehicle and to the hull

6523 The use of industrial cargo-handling vehicles powered by IC engines or by non-explosion-proofelectric motors is not permitted in hazardous locations and areas

6524 Industrial cargo-handling vehicles run on fuel may only be used in cargo spaces if there is adequateventilation Otherwise only battery-powered vehicles shall be employed

6525 The use of fuels with a flash point below 60degC is not permitted

6526 In general fork-lift trucks to be used on board shall have a tiltable lifting frame


DNV GL AS

653 Control measures6531 Initial controlBefore start of operation the following measures are required at a minimum

mdash check the information documents included with deliverymdash function check with nominal loadmdash test run over the operational areas with nominal load as proof the deck or hatch covers are sufficiently

strong

6532 Regular controlsIndustrial cargo-handling vehicles are subject to supervision and regular control by the ships management atintervals not exceeding 6 monthsThese controls shall be confirmed in a suitable manner and added to the documentation

654 Documentation6541 CertificationFor the control as per [6531] the Societys surveyor issues a certificate Form 2092a

6542 IdentificationFor stamping correlating to the test certificate the requirements given in [1335] apply

6543 Register book

65431 All certificates for load tests investigation reports as well as information about operation (manualsmaintenance protocols etc) where applicable shall be compiled in a register book and stored For detailssee [137]

65432 In addition to the certificate as per [6541] the manufacturerrsquos documentation shall be includedin the register book This also applies to all confirmations of control measures by the ships management see[6532]

66 Means of conveying persons

661 Shipborne working baskets

6611 Newly-manufactured working baskets shall meet the requirements given in EN 14502-1

6612 Shipborne working baskets shall be treated in all respects similarly to lifting appliances not handlingcargo Their dimensioning and testing shall however be subject to the static test loads according to Table 7-2

662 Requirements for lifting appliances for conveying personsLifting appliances for conveying persons shall comply with the requirements given in [425] with respect todimensioning operation and control


DNV GL AS

663 Landing booms6631 General notes

66311 The provision and the arrangement of landing booms (swinging booms for conveying persons) arerequired by the St Lawrence Seaway Authority

66312 Landing booms shall only be used for conveying one single person at a time

66313 Landing booms shall be treated as lifting appliances not handling cargo except where otherwisedetermined in what follows

6632 Dimensioning

66321 Landing booms together with the associated posts shall be designed for a static test load LPstat of300 kg (Table 7-1 load condition III2 without wind and hoist load coefficient)

66322 Ropes and interchangeable components shall be designed in addition to the dead loads for a staticboom load of 150 kg at a minimum

66323 The slenderness ratio of a landing boom may not exceed a value of 200

The following equations apply

IL = moment of inertia of boomAL = cross-section area of boom

6633 Construction and layout

66331 The load radius of landing booms shall be about 9 m

66332 If landing booms are equipped with several span ropes (eg a second span rope about halfwayalong the boom) the length of these intermediate span ropes shall be adjustableThe length adjustment of the intermediate span rope shall be effected in such a way that no unfavourablestress may arise under load (cantilever effect)

66333 Landing booms shall be operated exclusively by hand The lowering system shall allow gentle set-down

66334 Landing booms shall be located in the forward portion of the ship roughly at the point where thebow has widened to the full beam and shall swing forward from aft


DNV GL AS

6634 Examination of drawings and supervision of construction

66341 Landing booms together with the associated posts shall be constructed according to the drawingsapproved by the Society

66342 Because all components are normally easily accessible for subsequent controls supervision ofconstruction is not required in general Test reports shall be included in the delivery

6635 Tests and investigations on board

66351 For the tests and investigations on board the requirements given in [133] and [134] apply withthe following deviations

66352 Landing booms shall be tested before start of operation and periodically every 5 years eitherstatically by swinging a test load of 300 kg or by swinging lowering and braking a test load of 200 kg

6636 DocumentationWith respect to identification certification and documentation the requirements for lifting appliances nothandling cargo apply see Sec13


DNV GL AS

SECTION 7 LOOSE GEAR AND INTERCHANGEABLE COMPONENTS

71 General

711 This section deals with the requirements for design and calculation as well as production and employment ofloose gear and interchangeable components

712 With respect to requirements for the materials to be used as well as for production and welding theprovisions in Sec3 and Sec11 apply

713 For machinery components and electrical loose gear equipment the requirements given in Sec9 and Sec11shall be complied with where relevant

72 Loose gear

721 General notesThe following requirements apply to loose gear according to [1151] and [11531]

722 Design principles7221 General notesThe requirements given in Sec4 shall be observed as appropriate In addition the following applies

72211 Suspension ropes rope slings and their rope attachments shall comply with the requirements givenin Sec8If a test certificate (CG4) for the rope is submitted and proof is provided that the rope connections havebeen produced by manufacturers with the Societys approval then further requirements for interchangeablecomponents may be dispensed withRegarding the rope deflection the reduction of the minimum breaking load which depends on the ratio Ddshall be taken into account

72212 Suspension chains and their end attachments shall comply with recognized standards

72213 Regarding the suspension height of loose gear it shall be pointed out that the opening angle ofsuspension ropes or chains shall not exceed 120deg and of ramshorn hooks shall not exceed 90deg

72214 In order to warrant balance (safety against turn-over) of the total system or parts of it consistingof loose gear andor load it is assumed in the requirements given in this section that both the loose gear andthe loads have a positive stability height see illustration in Figure 7-1

72215 SuspensionsSuspensions are loose gear consisting of tension elements which are directly connected to the liftingappliance hook or to other loose gear (eg a traverse or frame-type traversespreader) For examples oftypical suspensions see Figure 7-2


DNV GL AS

Regarding 4-leg suspensions without load equalisation it shall be taken into consideration that these systemsare statically indeterminate The individual legs of the suspension are stressed depending on the rigidityof the load or the loose gear to be handled Where the load or the loose gear has high rigidity the loaddistribution on each leg of the suspension shall be verified by static calculation Without verification of theactual load distribution in the complete system (suspension and load or loose gear) only 2 legs shall beassumed as load-bearing

7222 Traverses

72221 Traverses may only be loaded symmetrically to the centre of gravity of the load unless they aredimensioned for asymmetric loading and marked accordinglyWhen there are more than 2 attachment points between the loose gear and the load the strength testcorresponding to the rigidity of the load (statically indeterminate system) shall be conductedAlternatively devices may be fitted which indicate the load

72222 Where longitudinal lifting beams have under-slung transverse lifting beams using tension elementsthis system shall be designed for safe operation in accordance with the static degrees of freedom Suf-ficientstrength shall be proven by a strength analysis

72223 Telescopic traverse parts shall be lockable in their working positions

7223 Frame traversesspreader

72231 In the case of adjustable container spreaders the movable beams shall either lock into the desiredworking positions or constructional measures shall be taken to ensure that the beams are accurately placedand held in these positions

72232 Container spreaders shall be equipped with indicators showing in a suitable manner whether thetwist locks are locked or unlocked

72233 Locking pins which automatically unlock when unloaded are not acceptable

7224 Grabs and lifting magnets

72241 The structural design and operating mode of grabs and lifting magnets shall be suited to theintended type of cargo

72242 The mechanical strength and electrical equipment of grabs and lifting magnets shall company withthe requirements given in this standard

72243 Closing ropes of grabs shall be protected in a suitable way against excessive wear

72244 Lifting magnets shall comply with the requirements given in EN 13155


DNV GL AS

Figure 7-1 Balance conditions


DNV GL AS

Figure 7-2 Suspending systems for typical suspensions

G1 = 3-leg suspension (statically determinate load connecting points are not in one vertical plane)G2 = 4-leg suspension symmetrical (statically indeter-minate with rigid load) The total load is carried

either by leg S1 and S3 or by S2 and S4 The center of gravity of the load (SP) is located in both ofthe planes spanned by S1S3 and S2S4

G3 = 4-leg suspension asymmetrical (statically indeter-minate with rigid load) see also notes under G2G4 = 4-leg suspension with load compensation on one side (statically determinate with sufficient

geometry of load compensation)G5 = 4-leg suspension with frame spreader (sta-tically indeterminate see also notes under G2)G6 = 4-leg suspension with two spreaders (statically determinate)

723 Calculation principles7231 General notes

72311 Calculations and dimensioning of loose gear are subject to the requirements given in Sec4 andSec6


DNV GL AS

72312 Regarding the loads to be considered and the proofs to be provided the following requirementsshall be observed

7232 Dimensioning loads

72321 General723211 The loads acting on loose gear are subdivided as follows


723212 If necessary loads not addressed in the following shall be considered additionally in a suitableway The grading of such loads and the consideration of them in the corresponding load combinations shall beagreed with the Society

72322 Regular loads723221 Dead load LEDead loads shall be determined in accordance with [4242]723222 Useful load LNThe useful load is defined in [11559] When dimensioning the loose gear this is assumed to be the nominalload723223 Dynamic forces caused by drivesRegarding the dynamic forces caused by drives the provisions of [5324] apply including the followingadditions

mdash For dimensioning in general only those vertical dynamic forces shall be considered which are covered bythe hoist load coefficient ψ Therefore the useful loads according to [723212] shall be multiplied bythe maximum hoist load coefficient ψ for this application of the allocated lifting appliances

mdash LNe shall be always relevant for dimensioning This shall be ensured by the conditions in [5432]mdash If loose gear or interchangeable components cannot be allocated to lifting appliances the following hoist

load coefficient shall be used

SWL ψ SWL ψ

le 10 t 16 le 1000 t 12

le 160 t 14 gt 1000 t 115

le 500 t 13

This is only permissible if the lifting appliance is used in harbour operations When used under seawayconditions the increased requirements given in the lifting appliance used thereby shall be considered

72323 Irregular loads723231 Wind loadsWind loads shall be assumed acc to [4245]723231 Snow and ice loadsIf snow loads shall be considered these shall be provided by the manufacturerIf ice loads shall be considered these shall be determined acc to [4246]


DNV GL AS

72324 Special loads723241 Test loadsLoose gear shall be dimensioned for a static test load LPstat acc to Table 7-2 or if more unfavourable for thedynamic test load of the lifting appliance acc to [5341] including the reduced hoist load coefficient ψP

max (LPstat LPdynmiddotψP)723242 Lateral impactFor frame-type traversesspreader a lateral impact of 110 of the maximum vertical load in the frame levelshall be assumed

HS = (LNe + Le)10


72331 General notes723311 The load combinations deemed to be essential for loose gear in operation are compiled in Table7-1723312 For the condition cranes out of operation the load combinations and partial safety factorsaccording to Table 5-5 shall be assumed regarding strength analysis723313 According to circumstances further load combinations may arise723314 From the load combinations in Table 7-1 and where required further load combinations onlythose combinations which are prevailing or necessary for the structural element being considered shall beproved

72332 Comments on the load combinations for loose gear under operating conditions723321 The load combinations I1 II1 III1 and III2 correspond to those given in [552]

Table 7-1 Load combinations for loose gear under operating conditions

Load combinations


Loads i Reference

γpi I1 γpi II1 γpi III1 III2 III3

Dead loads LE 1 7 [23221] 122 1 10 116 1 10 110 1 10 10 10Regularloads Useful load LN 2 7 [23222] 134 Ψ 122 Ψ 110 - - Ψ

Wind loads underoperating conditions 3 7 [23231] 122 10 110 - 02 -Irregular

loadsSnow and ice loads 4 7 [23232] 122 10 - - - -

Hoisting the hoistload at vhmax

5 4 Table 5-2 110 ψmax - -

Test load 6 7 [23241] 110 - ψp -Specialloads

Lateral impact 7 7 [23242] 110 - - 10

Resistance coefficient γm 110 110 110


1) Where load combinations have a favourable effect γpi = 095 may be assumed If the components masses andcentre of gravity is determined by weighing 095 middot γpi may be assumed


DNV GL AS

723322 Consideration of the deviation of the loads centre of gravityDue to an unexpected and not precisely determinable deviation in the centre of gravity stresses on the loosegear shall be considered assuming an inclined position deviating 6deg from the ideal location in relation to bothmain axes This load condition shall be examined additionally723322 III3 - Lateral impactThe load combination comprises the loads due to hoisting of the hoist load including a lateral impact

7234 Proofs

72341 GeneralThe loose gear shall be dimensioned taking into consideration the following points723411 The centre of gravity is located in the axis of symmetry of the suspension723412 Regarding frame-type traverses or spreaders the bending rigidity of the load shall also beevaluated with respect to load transfer and possibly to be included in the static strength analysis Withoutproof of the static strength of the frame-type traverse or spreader as an overall system complete with theload only two load attachment points may be assumed to be load-bearing

72342 Strength analysesRegarding the strength analyses In general the statements in [44] and [48] apply The load combinationsshall be formed using the values for the partial safety factors according to Table 7-1723421 Telescopic parts of traverses or spreadersIn the case of the telescopic parts of traverses or spreaders careful attention shall be paid to the transverseforce in the overlapping area and to the force transferred at the outlet as well as at the inner end of themovable part

72343 Proof of stability (buckling lateral torsional buckling warping)For proof of stability the statements in [44] apply in general The load combinations shall be formed usingthe partial safety factors according to Table 7-1723431 Special boundary conditions for traversesRegarding the proof of stability of traverses special boundary conditions shall be assumed for thedetermination of the critical buckling load It shall be considered that there is no fork bearing ie the proofsof stability used in the general steel engineering to determine the critical buckling load are not applicableFor the determination of the minimum potential energy due to outer and inner forces only the restoringmoments between the traverses suspension and the loads suspension can be applied which are activatedby the eigen mode of the traverse In determining the ideal lateral torsional buckling moment (Mki) theseboundary conditions shall be applied


DNV GL AS

723432 System assumptions for the determination of M

Figure 7-3 Eigenmode of the transverse


DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS

723433 Boundary conditions for the proof of tra-verses

mdash determination of the section forces and deformations in accordance with 2nd order theorymdash application of the geometrical replacement imperfections using ΔS = L150 (maximum ΔS of the eigen

mode) see Figure 7-3mdash limitation of the torsional angle Φ le 03 rad see Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5

72344 Fatigue strength analyses for loose gear723441 For fatigue strength analyses in general the statements in [56] apply Generally they shall beconducted for the load combination I of Table 7-1 using a partial safety factor of γpi = 10723442 For loose gear with stress cycles le 20000 a fatigue strength analysis may be dispensed with

72345 Proofs of suitability for useFor proofs of suitability for use in general the statements in [47] apply Generally they shall be conductedfor the load combination I of Table 7-1 using a partial safety factor of γpi = 10723451 TraverseThe maximum deformation shall be limited to le L500 related to the traversesrsquo length723452 Frame-type traversespreaderThe maximum bending deformation due to the dead weight shall be limited to le L1000 related to thespreadersrsquo length the maximum bending deformation shall be limited to le L500 related to the spreaderslength723453 Container spreaderThe maximum bending deformation (bending stiffness) of the spreader shall be limited such that the liftlocks cannot unlock under operational conditions

724 Examination of drawings and supervision of construction7241 Examination of drawings

72411 The general requirements given in Sec13 shall be observed

72412 Regarding the documents to be submitted for examination the lists in Sec13 shall be applied asand where relevant In addition the following documents shall be submitted for examination

mdash overview drawings showing all variations of functions loads and load fasteningsmdash workshop drawings of all steel componentsmdash strength analyses for all load-bearing components (static dynamic fatigue strength as required)mdash stowage and fastening devices for shipborne loose gearmdash additional documents as required

7242 Supervision of construction


72422 The supervision of construction and acceptance testing before delivery is required in principle

72423 For loose gear which is still accessible for comprehensive examination after completion supervisionof construction may be dispensed with subject to the consent of the Societys surveyor Acceptance testing isrequired in every case where appropriate together with the first load test

72424 The requirements to be met by the manufacturer are set out in [112]


DNV GL AS

725 Tests and examinations7251 Tests

72511 Before being put into use and after every major modification or repair to load-bearing parts loosegear shall be subjected to a functional and load test in the presence of the Societys surveyor

72512 Regularly repeated load testing of loose gear is not prescribed internationally by ILO It shall benoted however that various flag administrations do have regulations on this

72513 The static test loads given in Table 7-2 are applicable to loose gear according to the definition in[11531]

Table 7-2 Static test loads for loose gear

Nominal loads LNe of loose gear Static test loads 1 LPstat

up to 10 tabove 10 t up to 160 t

above 160 t

2 times SWL(104 times SWL) + 96 t

11 times SWL1if applicable to be multiplied with fd according to [7334]

7252 Examinations

72521 Before being put into use after each load test and after each modification or repair to load-bearingparts all loose gear shall be subjected to a thorough examination by the Societys surveyor and wherenecessary a functional test under his supervision

72522 In addition to the regulations according to [72521] all loose gear shall be subjected to a visualexamination by the Societys surveyor at least every 12 months as well as a thorough examination every 5years and where necessary a functional testFor due dates of examinations the provisions in [1342] are applicable

726 DocumentationFor marking see [74]

7261 Certification

72611 After each load test using the prescribed test load according to Table 7-2 the supervising theSocietys surveyor issues one of the two following certificates Functional tests are not specially certified

72612 For ships loose gear a test certificate Form CG3 will be issued For use on board more than oneship additional copies may be issued

72613 For loose gear which cannot be allocated to a particular ship a test certificate Form 2092a will beissuedFor use on board certificate Form 2092a requires to be transcribed by the Societys surveyor into FormCG3 in order to warrant international acceptance In addition the loose gear shall be stamped with the newcertificate number


DNV GL AS

7262 Register book

72621 As described in [137] the test certificates Form CG3 are added to the register book of liftingappliances carried on boardUpon request by the operator an individual register book for each piece of loose gear can be issued for useon board more than one ship

72622 For all examinations according to [7252] the Societys examination report will be compiled Inaddition the examinations are confirmed in the register book of lifting appliances

72623 Certificates Form 2092a will be handed out to the operator without a register book The operatorshall add these certificates and examination reports according to [72624] to his own documentation

72624 The confirmation of examinations of loose gear for which a test certificate Form 2092a has beenissued is effected by the examination report

73 Interchangeable components

731 General notes

7311 Accessories according to [1151] are regarded as interchangeable components

7312 Although not stated in [1151] eye plates and bolt connections shall be treated as interchangeablecomponents

732 Design and construction

7321 Block frames shall be designed in such a way that ropes cannot get caught between the sheave andthe block cheeks

7322 Cargo hooks shackles swivels and rings shall be forged Exceptions to this rule require the consentof the Society

7323 Grades of cast steel shall be selected according to recognised standards The consent of the Societyis required in every instance for other grades of cast steel

7324 Galvanization is permitted only with forged components of fully killed steels Galvanization of forgedinterchangeable components may take place only after the load testing of the componentsWhere delivery is carried out by a recognised manufacturer it shall be documented that a stress test hasbeen conducted at the manufacturer under application of the minimum test loads in accordance with DNV GLrules including crack test

7325 The galvanizing of cold-formed components is permitted only if the suitability of the material for thispurpose has been proved

733 Interchangeable components conforming to recognized standards

7331 Verification by calculation is not required in respect of interchangeable components which conform torecognized standardsDeviating from Table 3-1 and [7334] the materials of their load bearing components can be attested byinspection certificates 31 as per ISO 10474


DNV GL AS

7332 Determination of the nominal loadThe nominal load is determined depending on the location of service without partial safety factors and hoistload coefficients

mdash in the loading gear acc to Sec5 load combination Imdash in the loose gear acc to [7233] load combination I

Where applicable the nominal load determined as above shall be multiplied additionally by a dynamic factorfd acc to [7334]

7333 For interchangeable components conforming to standards a choice shall be made according to theindicated nominal sizes The nominal sizes correspond to the nominal load acc to [7332]

7334 In all cases where the hoist load coefficient ψ is greater than the value of ψzul the permissible loadon which the choice of the nominal size is based shall be increased by the following dynamic factor fd

ψ = hoist load coefficient acc to [52]ψzul = permissible hoist load coefficient acc to Table 7-3

Table 7-3 Permissible hoist load coefficient ψ

LNe ψzul

up to 60 t 16

above 60 t to 160 t

above 160 t 11

734 Basic principles for proofs for interchangeable components notcorresponding to a recognized standard7341 General notes

73411 For the calculation and the dimensioning of interchangeable components the requirements given inSec4 and Sec6 apply

73412 The load for dimensioning is determined depending on the location of service taking intoconsideration partial safety factors and hoist load coefficients

mdash using load combinations for the lifting appliance acc to [55]mdash using load combinations for the loose gear acc to [7233]

Additionally the static test load LPstat acc to Table 7-4 with a partial safety factor of γpi = 110 shall beobserved for the determination of the load for dimensioning


DNV GL AS

7342 Proofs

73421 General734211 Basis for the dimensioning is the applicable design load for dimensioning which shall bedetermined acc to [73412]734212 The calculation of non-standardized interchange-able components may be carried out usingsuitable calculation methods acc to the provisions in Sec4734213 A method to determine the strength of non-standardized eye plates is given in [7343]734214 Proof of bolt connections may be provided acc to [482]

73422 Strength analyses and proofs of stabilityFor strength analyses generally the statements in [44] and [48] apply They shall be conducted using thedesign load for dimensioning

73423 Proofs of fatigue strength734231 For the proofs of fatigue strength the statements in [46] apply In general they shall beconducted using the load combination I of Table 5-4 or Table 5-1 with the partial safety factor γpi = 10734232 For interchangeable components with load cycles le 20000 the proof of fatigue strength may bedispensed with

7343 Non-standardized eye plates

73431 The determination of the dimensioning stress for eye plates which correspond to Figure 7-6 andto the boundary conditions acc to [73432] may be performed using the following method unless a moreprecise proof is provided

Figure 7-6 Eye plate

R = outer radius of head [mm]r = bore radius [mm]c = cheek width [mm]e = change of head height [mm]t = plate thickness [mm]


DNV GL AS

β = inclination angle of flanks [deg]ϑ = angle of force attack [deg]rB = bolt radius [mm]T = clearance between bolt and bore [mm]a = head height [mm]S(γpi middot Li) = design load for dimensioning [kN]

73432 Boundary conditionsFor the dimensioning the following boundary conditions shall be adhered to

a) I) Radii ratio ρ of the eye

b) II) Clearance T boltbore

T = 2 (r ndash rB) le 02 middot r le 3 mmFor bolt diameters of 50 to 300 mm a clearance between bolt and bore of 3 to 6 mm can be permittedHowever in this case the design load shall be increased by 5

a) III) For moving bolt connections a wear of DT = 2 mm shall be taken into consideration in the strengthanalysis

b) IV) Inclination angle of flanks 0deg le β le 45degc) V) Angle of attack 0deg le ϑ le β

73433 Determination of the stress for dimensioning and stress proofThe stress for dimensioning is calculated as follows

σd max = α middot σN

α = form factor as per [73435]σN = nominal stress as per [73434]

It shall be proven that

σd max le Rd

with

73434 Nominal stress due to design loadThe nominal stress due to design load without friction component is calculated as follows


DNV GL AS

with

(see also Table 7-1)

FN = nominal load on eye plate

c = R + e sin β - r

The nominal stress component due to friction (friction coefficient micro) between bolt and bore is calculated asfollows

Consequently the nominal stress due to the design load including friction component is calculated as follows

73435 Determination of form factorIn general the form factor is calculated as follows

with

(base value)

(components due to inclination of flanks)

(components due to change of heat height)

(components due to angle of attack)

and (radii ratio)

(change of head height ratio)

73436 Connection to supporting structureThe connection to the supporting structure (see Figure 7-6 cross section ko-ck) shall be proven separately inaccordance with Sec4


DNV GL AS


73511 Examination of drawings is not required in respect of interchangeable components and eye plateswhich conform to recognized standards

73512 Details or drawings shall be submitted for examination in respect of interchangeable components oreye plates which are made of materials andor to designs which do not conform to a standard

73513 Where such interchangeable components or eye plates shall be repeatedly manufactured therelevant drawings may also be approved as works standards Where reference is made to such worksstandards in the documents submitted the date and journal number of the Societys approval shall also beindicated

7352 Supervision of constructionThe supervision of construction is not required for interchangeable components and eye plates


73611 Interchangeable components736111 Before being assembled or put into use interchangeable components in the unpainted and asfar as possible ungalvanized condition shall be subjected to a static load test in the presence of the Societyssurveyor performed on a calibrated and approved testing machine using the test loads given in Table 7-4736112 Where the origin of interchangeable components is unknown or certificates for the materialsare unavailable the Societys surveyor is entitled to demand that one specimen of the interchangeablecomponent undergo a tensile test at 4 times the permissible loadThe specimen shall withstand this load without breaking A further increase to the load until the specimenbreaks is not generally required However the Societys surveyor is entitled to demand a test to establish theactual breaking loadSpecimens which have undergone tensile testing at 4 times the permissible load are overstressed and shallbe destroyed or recycled after the test736113 After changes or repairs to interchangeable components a load test according to [736111]shall be repeated736114 Regularly repeated load testing of individual parts of interchangeable components is notprescribed internationally by ILO They are load tested together with the lifting appliance or loose gear towhich they are fastened

73612 Eye plates736121 Eye plates which are integral parts of lifting appliances and loose gear are included in the loadtests of them736122 Eye plates for assembly and maintenance work as well as for transportation purposes require astrength analysis with respect to their welding joints and the supporting structures These analyses will bechecked within the scope of examination of drawingsLoad tests with agreed static test loads may be conducted on request of the ships owner


DNV GL AS

7362 Examinations

73621 Interchangeable components736211 The manufacturer and dealer shall present all interchangeable components to the Societyssurveyor in an unpainted and if possible ungalvanized condition for examination of the dimensions andworkmanship together with the certificates covering the materials used736212 After the static load test each component is thoroughly examined by the Societys surveyor andshall if the surveyor considers it necessary be taken apart for closer scrutiny736213 After start of operation every interchangeable component shall be subjected to an examinationby the Societys surveyor at least every 12 months as well as to a thorough examination every 5 years Forhighly stressed components non-destructive tests may be carried outComponents shall if the surveyor considers it necessary be taken apart for closer scrutiny

73622 Eye plates736221 Eye plates which are integral parts of lifting appliances and loose gear are examined togetherwith them736221 Eye plates according to [736122] including their joints are examined before their firstemployment after every load test and at agreed intervals736223 Examinations of eye plates may be complemented by crack and ultrasonic tests uponagreement These examinations are mandatory if the visual inspection during the examination gives reasonto do so

737 Documentation7371 Interchangeable componentsFor marking see [74]

73711 Certificates737111 The Societys surveyor issues a certificate for each interchangeable component which hassuccessfully undergone a load test and a thorough examinationThis certificate gives details of the manufacturer or supplier the date of the test special materials (extra highstrength low temperature) the size of the test load and the permissible load737112 The Societys Form CG3 is used for shipboard lifting appliances gear or interchangeablecomponents and the Societys Form 7103a for all othersFor the transcription of Form 7103a into Form CG3 for use on board the requirements given in [72613]apply as and where relevant737113 For closer definition of tested and examined components the following details are entered onthe certificates

mdash shacklesbolt diameter where the inside width is non-standard the following dimensions shall be indicated in theorder shown diameter of the shackle in the middle of the bow bolt diameter and inside width

mdash cargo hooks and swivelsnominal size

mdash blocksgroove diameter of the sheave and the sheave pin diameter together with the type of head fitting and anindication of whether or not a becket is fitted

mdash double yoke piecesbolt diameter and length of the double yoke piece between the bolt centres

mdash rope socketsnominal size and details of the material test


DNV GL AS

mdash cable jointsnominal size

mdash rigging screwsnominal size or thread diameter and the type of bolt head (oval eye round eye or fork eye)

mdash chainsdiameter of the round steel bar external width of the chain link and length of the chain

737114 Where interchangeable components are manufactured to approved drawings the certificatesalso indicate the relevant drawing together with the date and the Societys reference number of theapproval

73712 Register book737121 In accordance with the requirements given in [137] the test certificates Form CG3 are added tothe register book of lifting appliances on board737122 Interchangeable components which are integral parts of lifting appliances or loose gear areexamined together with themFor the devices examination reports are compiled and the examinations are confirmed in the register book oflifting appliances737123 For interchangeable components which are certified by Form 2092a the requirements given in[72623] and [72624] apply as and where relevant

7372 Eye plates

7373 Eye plates in accordance with [736121] are included in the documentation of the devices statedthere

7374 The tests and examinations of eye plates in accordance with [736122] are confirmed byexamination reports

Table 7-4 Static test loads for interchangeable components

Line Interchangeable components Permissible loads SWL 1 Static test loads LPstat 2

1 chains rings hooksshackles swivels etc

up to 250 tover 250 t


2 single-sheaved blockswith and without becket



3 multi-sheaved blocksup to 250 t

over 250 t up to 1600 t

over 1600 t


11 times SWL

1) The permissible load SWL of single and multi-sheaved blocks is equal to the permissible load on the suspension2) If need be to be multiplied with fd according to [7334]

74 Marking of loose gear and interchangeable components

741 Manufacturers plateLoose gear according to [11531] shall be fitted with a manufacturers plate which shall include at least thefollowing information if applicable

mdash manufacturers name


DNV GL AS

mdash type of loose gearmdash serial numbermdash year of constructionmdash characteristics where applicable such as eg nomi-nal pressure nominal voltage filling volume etcmdash nominal load(s)mdash dead loadmdash with lifting beams traverses and spreaders a symbol for the inclination angle of the allocated suspension

ropes or chains

742 Stamping7421 General notes

74211 Stamping is regarded to be the proof of a test andor examination Loose gear and interchangeablecomponents shall therefore undergo (renewed) load testing if a certificate is required in this regard

74212 The stamp height shall be at least 6 mm

7422 Loose gear

74221 Scope of stampingAll loose gear which has successfully undergone testing and thorough examination is stamped as follows

mdash certificate number together with the code letters of the examining inspection officemdash stamp 3 with the month and year of testingmdash Safe Working Load in tonnes or kg preceded by the letters SWLmdash dead load in t or kg preceded by the letters WT

74222 The stamp shall be applied on one side in a prominent position if possible in the centre but not concealedby the marking

74223 742231 Loose gear subjected to supervision of construction at the manufacturers premises is double-stamped (see Table 7-5)742232 After periodic load tests and re-issuing of test certificates stamping is not repeated


74231 Scope of stamping742311 Each interchangeable component which has successfully undergone testing and thoroughexamination is stamped as follows

mdash certificate number together with the code letters of the examining inspection officemdash stamp 3 with the month and year of testingmdash permissible load in tonnes or kg preceded by the letters SWLmdash permissible rope hoist in tonnes or kg with blocks eg

mdash single-sheaved block without becket SWL 6 trope 3 t

mdash single-sheaved block with becket SWL 15 trope 5 t

mdash multiple-sheaved blocks SWL 64 twith 4 sheaves rope 8 t


DNV GL AS

Table 7-5 Examples of stamping and marking

Documentation Loose gear Interchangeablecomponents

CertificateForm7103a Acceptance testing L 8924 H03 3 15

StampingCertificate FormCG3 or 7103a Load test L 2429 H04 3

15SWL 30 tWT 5 t

L 6743 H02 3 15SWL15 trope 5 t(single-

sheaved block with becket)

Marking Rigging plans SWL 30 tWT 5 t ---

Abbreviations Nominal loadSWL Weight WT Permissible loadSWL

742312 With interchangeable components made of special materials the stamp is extended with thefollowing letters if applicable

mdash H for extra high strength materialmdash T for low-temperature materials

Where interchangeable components are composed of several single parts which may be disassembled suchas eg shackle hook and shackle round nut each part will get this special stamp

74232 Stamp locationThe stamp shall be applied to the following locations for the parts given below

mdash shacklesto one of the limbs close to the eye

mdash cargo hooksto the side of the hook close to the suspension

mdash swivelsto the traverse the oval eye only gets the anchor stamp

mdash blocksto the side bar if any otherwise to the side plate close to the point of suspension of the block

mdash double yoke piecesto the middle of one side

mdash rope socketsto the conical section opposite the existing stamp for material testing

mdash cable jointsto the middle of one side

mdash rigging screwson the body to every eye head fitting or double lug head fitting plus the Societys stamp

mdash suspension ropes and slingsto a permanently fastened small metal plate

mdash chainsto the last link at each end

74233 742331 With a permissible load up to 15 t the figure on the stamp shall be rounded to one decimalplace With values of 15 t and over the figure shall be rounded to a whole number742332 For the galvanization of forged interchangeable components the requirements given in [7324]apply The stamp shall still be recognizable after galvanization or where required it shall be re-stamped


DNV GL AS

742333 The stamp height shall be at least 6 mm or 4 mm for small parts742334 On small parts to which it is difficult or impossible to apply the whole stamp the month and yearof testing may be omitted followed if necessary by the certificate number and the permissible load whererequiredThe following is applicable for stamping of small parts

mdash components with a SWL of 16 t and overThese are stamped in full as described in [74231]

mdash components with a SWL between 025 t and 10 tThese only receive the Societys stamp and where required also the permissible load

mdash components with a SWL of less than 025 t SWLThese only receive the Societys stamp and where required the stamp shall be waived

743 Marking of loose gear

7431 Loose gear shall be permanently marked in a prominent position on both sides in the mannerdescribed in [7432] and [7432]The inscription shall comprise characters at least 80 mm in height the permanence of which shall be assuredby punching by applying weld seams or small metal plates adequately fastened The fatigue strength of themarked components shall not be unduly impaired by these measuresGlued-on lettering foils are not permitted

7432 Lifting beams traverses and spreaders shall be marked as follows

mdash nominal load SWL in t or kgmdash dead load WT in t or kg (mandatory if over 100 kg)mdash special types of fastening or loading

7433 Grabs and lifting magnets shall be marked as follows

mdash nominal load SWL in t or kgmdash dead load WT in t or kgmdash capacity in m3 for grabs

75 Wear damage repair

751 Loose gear

7511 With respect to tolerable reduction in the plate thickness due to rusting or wear the requirementsgiven in [1362] apply

7512 With respect to a reduction in the nominal load of loose gear covered by [11531] as an alternativeto removal from service in the event of damage inadmissible wear or other causes the requirements givenin [1369] apply


7521 Interchangeable components such as bolts chains rings etc as well as eye plates shall bereplaced if the parts are visibly deformed if the diameter is reduced by 10 at some points or if the area ofthe load-bearing cross-section is reduced by 20


DNV GL AS

7522 The use of welding to repair cracks in or worn portions of interchangeable components is generallynot permitted The same applies to bolts and other removable elements of loose gearThe Society reserves the right to approve such repairs in special cases Then the following shall be observed

75221 After repair of forged interchangeable components evidence shall be provided that heat treatmenthas been carried out

75222 After repair of interchangeable components a load test in accordance with [736111] isrequired

75223 Renewal of axes bolts and rope-sheaves in general does not require rerunning of the load tests


DNV GL AS

SECTION 8 ROPES AND ROPE ACCESSORIES

81 General

811 Scope

8111 The following requirements apply to wire and fibre ropes used as running and standing rigging forshipboard lifting appliances and loose gear as well as for rope slings

812 Approval for manufacture

8121 With regard to manufacture and quality assurance rope manufacturers shall have been approved bythe SocietyThe Societys approval is given provided that the requirements for the manufacture testing and marking ofwire ropes set out in RU SHIP Pt2 is complied with

8122 For approval the manufacturer shall amongst other things prove during a tour of the works thatthe necessary equipment is available for the proper manufacture and testing of ropes The Society reservesthe right to demand that a qualification test be performed on specimen lengths of rope

8123 Approved rope manufacturers can also be approved for testing and certificating ropes on theirown authority Upon receiving this extended approval the Society assigns the manufacturer a special codenumber

82 Wire ropes

821 General requirements

8211 Wire ropes shall conform to recognized standards such as eg EN 12385

8212 For employment on deck wire ropes for running rigging shall be drawn galvanized and wire ropesfor standing rigging shall be fully galvanizedAfter being galvanized the ropes shall be impregnated and conserved with non-thermosetting and acid-freegrease in order to avoid penetration of water and subsequent corrosion

8213 Galvanized wire ropes with diameters of less than 8 mm are not permitted for shipboard liftingappliances and loose gear exposed to the weather

8214 Free rope ends shall be sized tapered or socketed to prevent fraying of the rope ends or to preventchanges in the lay lengths of the rope and strands

8215 Special rope designs Lang lay ropes ropes with a nominal tensile grade of more than 1960 Nmm2 and ropes of austenitic or stainless materials may on application be approved provided that they aresuitable for the proposed use

8216 Wire ropes of stainless materials shall be suitable for use in marine atmospheresTo avoid crevice corrosion the materials used for the wires shall have a sufficiently high chromium andmolybdenum content


DNV GL AS

Steels are regarded as resistant to crevice corrosion in a marine atmosphere if the sum W is 29 or overwhere

W = Cr [] + 33 middot Mo [] ge 29

8217 Ropes with a nominal diameter exceeding 5 mm shall at least consist of 100 single wires runningrigging shall at least have 6 strands

822 Definitions

8221 Running rigging refers to all ropes passing over rope sheaves or guide rolls or wound on winchesirrespective of whether or not the ropes are moved under load

8222 Standing rigging refers to all wire ropes which are not turned round or wound on to winches suchas shrouds stays pendants etc Standing rigging shall be fitted with thimbles or rope sockets

8223 Rope slings refer to ropes not forming an integral part of lifting appliances or loose gear which areused to attach loads and can be employed without special adaptation or fitting operations

8224 The calculated breaking load Fr of a rope is the product of the theoretical metal cross-section and thenominal tensile strength of the wires

8225 The minimum breaking load Fmin of a rope is the product of the calculated breaking load Fr and theSpinning Factor ks

8226 The actual breaking load Fwi of a rope is the load determined by a tensile test to destruction of thecomplete rope

8227 The proven breaking load Fn of a rope is the product of the measured aggregate breaking load Feand the spinning factor ks

8228 The measured aggregate breaking load Fe of a rope is the sum of the individually determinedbreaking loads of all the wires in the rope ascertained by tensile tests

8229 The spinning factor ks is an empirical factor which takes account of the strength reduction due tostrandingThe spinning factors of established types of wire rope are given in relevant standards or manufacturersinformation

823 Dimensioning

8231 The breaking load FBr of wire ropes for loading gear and loose gear shall not be less than the productof the Rope Tension FS and one of the safety factors γDi shown in Table 8-2

FBr ge FS middot γDi

FBr = actual breaking load Fwi or proven breaking load Fn

8232 The Rope Tension FS is the maximum force calculated for load condition I1 disregarding the hoistload coefficient ψ but taking into consideration the losses due to friction and bending in the rope sheaves Inaddition the following shall be observed

82321 For the partial safety factors γpi = 10 may be applied


DNV GL AS

82322 The determination of rope tensions taking into consideration the sheave friction and bendingresistance of the ropes is based on a frictional coefficient of 5 per turn for friction bearings and 2 perturn for anti-friction bearingsWhere calculations shall be performed with smaller frictional coefficients special proof of these shall beprovided

82323 Rope deflection angles due to static ship inclinations do not increase the hoisting rope forceEnforced rope deflection angles due to acceleration forces or eg the drift of a vessel result in an increase inthe hoisting rope force They can however within the scope of this standard be ignored when dimensioninghoisting ropes or rope slings

82324 When dimensioning luffing ropes and standing rigging the deflecting angles of hoisting ropes shallbe considered in principle if they effect an increase in rope forces

82325 For shipboard lifting appliances and loose gear where an increased hoist load coefficient (gt ψzulS)shall be applied the rope tension FS shall be multiplied by the dynamic factor fds For ψzulS and fdS see[82326] and Table 8-1 This applies in particular to lifting appliances which will be dimensioned only forsea operation (see [5432]) or for lifting appliances in grab operation

82326 The factor for consideration of an increased dynamic to be used for calculation of the rope tensionshall be determined as follows

ψ = hoist load coefficient according to [54]ψzulS = permissible hoist load coefficient according to Table 8-1


LNe ψzulS

up to 10 t 16


over 160 t 15

82327 Where the efficiency of rope end joints is below 80 the loss of breaking force shall becompensated up to 80

82328 Wire ropes for multi-rope grabs shall be dimensioned in addition to the dead weight of the grabfor the following nominal loads LNe

mdash closing rope double lever control LNemdash closing rope single lever control 23 LNemdash holding cable 23 LNe


DNV GL AS

8233 Reduction in breaking load of the ropeWhere wire ropes are wound around design elements with a small diameter (eg shackle bolts crane hooksload connecting elements etc) the permissible breaking load shall be reduced

D = diameter of the slung partd = rope diameter

The breaking load of the wire rope shall be reduced for the following range of diameters

1 le Dd le 9

(Dd lt 1 is not permissible)

The reduced breaking load shall be determined according to the following formula

FBr redu = reduced breaking loadFBr = breaking load of the non-deformed rope (no rope bending)

Within spliced sections the rope shall not be slung with small radii

Alternative provisions for the dimensioning of wire ropes for ramps and car decks can be found in [6341]

824 Requirements for rope drives8241 Interaction between ropes and rope drums

82411 In determining the necessary length of wire ropes and the length of drum it shall be borne inmind that at least 3 safety turns shall remain on the drum at all timesThe requirement for 3 safety turns also applies to luffing ropes with respect to the stowing position of thecrane boom

82412 It shall be ensured that ropes are wound up properly on the rope drums The length of rope drumsshall in general be designed such that no more than 3 layers of rope may be wound on top of each otherWhere the number of layers exceeds 3 a special coiling device or other system or equipment shall beprovided


DNV GL AS

Table 8-2 Safety factors for wire ropes

Safety factors γD1 1

Nominal load (LNe) of loading gear and loose gear 2 Running rigging

up to 10 t 5


over 160 t 3


Nominal load (LNe) of loading gear and loose gear 2 Standing rigging

up to 10 t 4


over 160 t 3


Weight of load Rope slings 3

up to 10 t 6


over 160 t 36

1) If applicable to be multiplied with fdS (see [82325]2) For goods lifts lifting platforms ramps and car decks the following loads shall be applied

mdash operation without useful load dead loadmdash operation with useful load dead load + nominal load

3) Rope slings which are not turned round may be treated as wire ropes for standing rigging provided that both endsare fitted with thimbles or rope sockets

82413 Uncut rope drums may only be used with the consent of the Society

82414 Grab cranes shall have a rope-spindling guide in principle if the hoist rope drum cannot be clearlyviewed by the operator at all times Rope-spindling guides are grooved drums and rope-spindling devices andsimilar devices

82415 Design requirements for rope drums are described in [952]


DNV GL AS

82416 Wire ropes which are wound on to drums in several layers shall have a steel core For heavy loadsropes with compressed strands are recommended

82417 The first rope layer shall be tension loaded

82418 The direction of rope runout shall be coordinated with the direction of rotation of the drums toavoid twisting of the ropesThe winding direction of ropes on rope drums shall be clearly recognizable at the drums and where requiredthe winding direction shall be indicated

8242 Rope-sheaves

82421 Design features shall prevent ropes from being jammed between rope-sheaves and side plates orleaving the rope grooveThe distance between the upper edge of rope-sheaves and eg side plates shall not exceed 13 with plasticrope-sheaves 14 of the rope diameter or 8 mm at most

82422 With respect to steel materials for assembled rope-sheaves all normal strength steels with provennotch toughness are suitableFor cast rope-sheaves the steel casting type GE200 acc to EN 10293 (previously GS-38 acc to DIN 1681)or cast iron type EN-GJS-400-18-RT with proven notch toughness or EN-GJS-400-18-LT acc to EN 1563(previously GGG-403 acc to DIN 1693 or corresponding types with cast test pieces

82423 Where plastic rope-sheaves are used they shall be type-tested In the case of single layer spoolingon the rope drum at least the sheave which generates most of the alternating bends in the rope shall beproduced from steel Alternatively defined criteria for scrapping or usage periods may be approved

82424 The following requirements apply to the design of rope grooves

mdash depth of groove ge radic2 times nominal rope diametermdash diameter of groove 106 to 108 times nominal rope diametermdash opening angle 45deg to 60deg

Table 8-3 Minimum diameter of rope-sheaves and rope drums

Rope drum diameter 3Applicationcrane group 2

Rope-sheavediameter 3 minimum Ungroovedminimum Groovedminimum

Nominal tensilestrength of wire ropes 4

Wire ropes notoperated under load 9 ds 10 ds 9 ds 1570 Nmm2

A 18 ds 20 ds 16 ds 1770 Nmm2

B 20 ds not permitted 18 ds 1770 Nmm2

C1 22 ds not permitted 20 ds 1770 Nmm2

C2 + C3 25 ds not permitted 22 ds 1770 Nmm2

1) In case of rope-sheaves and machined drums measured in the bottom of the groove2) For crane group definition see [52]3) Where non-rotating or poorly-rotating ropes are used it is recommended that the diameters indicated be increased

by 104) Where ropes with a higher nominal tensile strength are used the prescribed diameters shall be increased

proportionally


DNV GL AS

8243 Diameter of sheaves and rope drumsThe required rope-sheave and rope drum diameters relative to rope diameter ds shall be as shown in Table8-3For all other types of wire ropes the ratio shall be agreed with the Society in each individual case

8244 Lateral deflection angle of the rope

82441 The lateral deflection of wire ropes relative to the plane of the groove in the rope-sheave or ropedrum shall not be greater than 114 (4deg)

82442 In the case of poorly-rotating ropes the lateral deflection angle shall not be greater than 128 (2deg)

82443 Exceptions to the above requirements are made for unwinding hoist ropes Special wear-reducingdesign measures shall be taken for lifting appliances at sea frequently

8245 Employment of swivelsSwivels shall only be employed with poorly-rotating ropes

83 Fibre ropes


8311 Synthetic fibre ropes shall comply with DNVGL OS E303Natural fibre ropes shall comply with recognized standards On application special rope designs may beapproved

8312 Fibre ropes (of natural or synthetic fibre) except carbon fibre ropes may be used for standingrigging and for running rigging of special lifting appliances which is stressed moderately subject toagreement with the SocietyFibre ropes may also be used for the cargo tackles of landing booms according to [663] and for rope slingswith the exception of carbon-fibre ropes The agreement of the Society is required for other applications

8313 Synthetic fibre ropes shall be stabilized with respect to light and heat

8314 Free rope ends shall be yarn-wound to prevent disintegration of the rope structure Synthetic fibreropes may be partially melted

832 Definitions

8321 The terms running rigging standing rigging and rope sling as well as the term actual breakingload Fwi are defined in [822]

8322 The proven breaking load Fn of a fibre rope is the load calculated from the breaking load of theyarns contained in the rope multiplied by a reduction factorThe proven breaking load Fn of a synthetic fibre rope is determined by testing in accordance with therequirements of DNVGL OS E303

8323 The reduction factor is an empirical value which takes account of the loss of strength due tostrandingThe reduction factors of the best-established fibre ropes are given in the DNV GL rules listed in [8121]


DNV GL AS

833 DimensioningIn the case of fibre ropes used for loading gear and loose gear the breaking load FBr shall not be less thanthe product of the static rope tension FS and one of the safety factors γF given in Table 8-4

FBr ge FS middot γF

FBr = required breaking load of the rope analogous to [8231]FS = rope tension acc to [8232]

Table 8-4 Safety factors for standardized fibre ropes

Nominal diameter of rope [mm] Coeffient of utilization γF

10 ndash 13

14 ndash 17

18 ndash 23

24 ndash 39

40 and over

12

10

8

7

6

For non-standardized fibre ropes γF shall be agreed with the Society

Synthetic fibre ropes shall be dimensioned with respect to their 3-T endurance and shall comply with DNVGLOS E303

Synthetic fibre ropes shall be operated according to their designated service The designated servicefor synthetic fibre ropes shall assure that adequate margins are maintained towards exceeding the 3-Tendurance and other relevant failure modes DNVGL ST E407 can be taken as guidance

The 3-T endurance and other aspect of dimensioning of synthetic fibre ropes are outlined in DNVGL RP E305

834 Requirements for rope drives

8341 Synthetic fibre ropes shall not be used on capstan heads or other devices where a major slippagemay occur

8342 Fibre ropes shall only be wound up in one layer Winding shall be performed under tension

8343 The required rope-sheave diameters relative to the nominal rope diameter ds shall be as shown inTable 8-5For non-standardized fibre ropes the rope sheave diameter shall be agreed with the Society

Table 8-5 Minimum diameter of rope-sheaves for standardized fibre ropes

Rope material Rope-sheave diameter minimum

manila hemp

polypropylene

polyamide

polyester

carbon-fibre

55 ds

4 ds

6 ds

6 ds

14 ds


DNV GL AS

8344 The required diameters of rope drums shall be agreed with the Society in each case For carbon fibreropes 12 ds shall be taken

8345 The lateral deflection of fibre ropes relative to the plane of the groove of rope-sheaves or rope drumsshall not be greater than 114 (4deg)

8346 The number of safety turns remaining on rope drums shall not be less than [85] In case ofsynthetic fibre ropes a higher number of safety turns may be required

84 Rope-end attachmentsRope-end attachments shall be designed in accordance with recognized standards eg the following

841 Splices for wire ropes and fibre ropes

8411 Wire ropes and fibre ropes shall not be made up of parts spliced together

8412 Loop splices (eye splices) and thimble splices shall conform to standard EN 13411-2 or be ofequivalent designThe dimensions of thimbles shall comply with standard EN 13411-1 (Shaped steel thimbles for wire ropes)or standard EN DIN 6899 (Steel thimbles for fibre ropes) as appropriate

8413 Provided that [82411] and [8346] are met rope ends connected to winches may be splicedwithout thimbles see [9526]

8414 Splices of any kind are not permitted for cranes of types B and C because of their inadequatefatigue strength

8415 Splices shall not be sheathed

842 End attachments for wire ropes8421 Rope sockets

84211 Rope sockets (open and closed sockets) into which wire rope ends shall be socketed shall conformto standard EN 13411 On application other designs may be approved

84212 The socketing process using metal or plastic resin shall be performed as prescribed in standard EN13411-4 and may only be carried out by companies which have been approvedOnly approved cast materials may be used Rope sockets shall be marked with the code letter of themanufacturing company

8422 Wrought ferrules

84221 Wrought aluminium alloy ferrules shall conform to EN 13411-3Flemish eyes as per DIN 3095 shall be used wherever possible for the end attachments of the hoisting andluffing ropes of lifting appliances if the lifting appliances are working with grabs

84222 On application swaged or rolled end fittings (terminals) may be approved

84223 Application of ferrules in accordance with [84221] and [84222] may only be carried out byapproved companies Ferrules shall be marked with the code letter of the manufacturing company


DNV GL AS

8423 Detachable end joints

84231 Cable joints (wedge clamps) may only be used if the ropes are permanently under tension Theyshall be clearly visible and readily accessible to facilitate inspectionThe free end of the rope shall be secured from being pulled through eg by rope sockets The safeguardconnection of the rope end to the load-bearing part of the rope shall not be force-transmitting However itshall be capable of bearing 10 of the rope tension FSCable joints shall correspond to EN 13411-6 Up to a rope diameter of 8 mm EN 13411-7 may also beapplied

84232 Rope sockets as per EN 13411-5 are not permitted This does not apply to the securing of free ropeends to cable joints

84233 With regard to the attachment of rope ends to winch drums the requirements given in [9526]and [9527] apply

85 Tests and examinations

851 Supervision of manufacture8511 Wire rope and fibre ropes

85111 General notes851111 With regard to testing and examination of ropes the requirements given in the DNV GL rules asstated in [8121] apply851112 Instructions for the testing and use of ropes and an excerpt from the Societys rules for wireropes and fibre ropes shall be found on the reverse sides of the Societys certificates for ropes

85112 Tensile testsAfter manufacturing ropes shall be subjected to a tensile test which is mandatory for the issue of theSocietys certificate The following applies851121 Ropes shall be loaded to destruction in their entirety Where the tensile force of the testingmachine is not sufficient to perform a tensile test for the whole rope individual wires or yarns shall be loadedto destruction in a prescribed procedure and the breaking load of the rope determined by calculation851122 The results of the tensile tests of the ropes shall achieve the values prescribed in the relevantrope standards851123 Tensile tests of ropes shall be performed in the presence of the Societys surveyor if

mdash the manufacturer is not approved by the Society to test and issue certificates on his own authoritymdash special rope designs are not covered by the Societys approvalmdash the customer requests it

851124 Before each tensile test the protocols on the checks performed by the manufacturer shall bepresented to the Societys surveyor851125 Following every tensile test checking the diameter tolerances method of manufacture andmanufacturers protocols the Societys surveyor will issue a certificate of test and thorough examination ofwire rope or fibre rope using one of the forms stated in [8621]

85113 MarkingRopes shall be marked by woven-in identification bands and coloured identification threads The followingshall be taken into account851131 The identification band shall carry the name or mark of the manufacturer and in the case of theSocietys approval in addition the manufacturerrsquos identification number assigned by the Society


DNV GL AS

851132 The colour of the identification thread gives information about the nominal tensile strength ofwires or the type of yarn used (identification colour)851133 The coloured identification thread may be dispensed with if the identification band itself carriesthe identification colour

8512 End attachments

85121 End attachments which are not standardized or do not correspond to standards are subject to anexamination of drawings

85122 With regard to tests and examinations of rope sockets cable joints and terminals the requirementsgiven in [735] apply For terminals it may be required to produce specimens connected to a small length ofrope

85123 In the case of short ready-made units the rope sockets and terminals can be load-tested togetherwith the rope

852 Initial testingRopes and their end attachments are subject to a visual examination and a check of the relevant certificateswithin the scope of the initial testing of lifting appliances

853 Periodic testing8531 Wire ropes and fibre ropes

85311 In the scope of the periodic testing of lifting appliances and loose gear the ropes shall be examinedby the Societys surveyor with regard to condition and fitness for use

85312 When ropes are examined attention shall be paid to deformation crushing corrosionrottennessand broken wires If necessary the ropes shall be twisted open for an internal examination

85313 Special attention shall be paid to the end attachments There broken wires or yarns shall beexpected with wire ropes also corrosion especially with downward hanging end attachments Sheathingsshall be removed for examination

85314 Sheaves used for length compensation within tackle where a rope only seems to be resting areparticularly prone to wire ruptures caused by regular compensation motions

85315 Where splices have become loose the ropes shall be shortened and spliced again or whererequired replaced

8532 End attachmentsWith regard to end attachments the requirements given in [85311] apply Attention shall be paid to wearcracks and corrosion

8533 Ropes to be discarded

85331 Wire ropes853311 Wire ropes shall be discarded when over a length equal to 8 times the rope diameter ds thenumber of detected broken wires is greater than 10 with Lang lay ropes 5 of the total number of wiresin the rope


DNV GL AS

853312 Wire ropes shall also be discarded when

mdash the rope diameter ds being reduced owing to friction or wear by more than 10 of the nominal diameteror in case of wear to the core

mdash corrosion (external or internal)mdash deformations of the rope such as bird caging formation of loops buckling kinking crushing loosening

of individual wires or strands etc

853313 Wire ropes which are regularly employed under water shall be shortened in the vicinity of theloose gear (eg the hook) at least once per year in order to enable the cut-off end which should have aminimum length of 1 m to be thoroughly examined and subjected to a tensile testIf the remaining breaking load is below 80 of the original breaking load the rope shall be discarded Ifthe remaining breaking load is 80 or above the original load an estimate shall be made based on thecondition and the period of employment whether the rope may be employed for another year853314 Wire ropes employed above deck shall be discarded at the latest after the following periods ofemployment even when no external damage is visible

mdash running rigging 10 yearsmdash standing rigging 15 years

Wire ropes may be employed for a longer period of time if a Certificate of Fitness has been issued by arecognized rope company or by the rope manufacturer after a thorough examination

86 Documentation

861 Marking8611 Wire ropes and fibre ropes

86111 Ropes are marked by the method described in [85113]

86112 With regard to ropes the rope tension Fs calculated according to [8232] shall not be less thanthe permissible load SWL stamped on the end attachments

86113 With regard to ropes with splices a small metal plate stamped in accordance with [7423] shallbe fastened near an end attachment

8612 End attachmentsEnd attachments for wire ropes are stamped like interchangeable components see [7423] Whereapplicable this is also possible on ferrules or terminals taking account of [84233]

862 Certificates8621 Wire ropesAfter the tension test approved manufacturers or in cases described in [851123] the Societys surveyorwill issue one of the following the Societys test certificates

mdash wire ropes Form CG4

8622 End attachmentsWith regard to certification of end attachments the requirements given in [73611] apply


DNV GL AS

863 Storage of rope certificatesAs described in [137] test certificates for ropes and test certificates for end attachments will be addedinitially and after each re-issue to an allocated register book on board

864 Confirmation of examinations

8641 Ropes and end attachments which are integral parts of lifting appliances or loose gear will beincluded in the examination of themFor these devices examination reports will be prepared and the examinations will be confirmed in the registerbook

8642 The confirmation of examinations of ropes and end attachments which cannot be allocated toparticular lifting appliances or loose gear will be effected by an examination report for these parts


DNV GL AS

SECTION 9 MECHANICAL PARTS

91 General

911 General notes

9111 This section contains requirements for the mechanical parts of shipboard lifting appliances andwhere required also loose gear

9112 Complementary or more comprehensive require-ments in particular for mechanical parts notcovered hereafter shall be taken from the following rules

mdash DNV GL rulesmdash recognized standards and requirements where applicable to lifting appliances unless contrary to the

provisions in this section

9113 The requirements given in Sec1 shall be observed if applicable

9114 As regards the materials to be used the manufacture and the safety requirements the provisions inSec3 Sec11 and Sec12 apply

912 Scope of application

9121 Table 9-1 is a list of the essential mechanical parts which are subject to examination of drawings asdeemed necessary by the Society and which shall be delivered in the designated manner together with testreports or inspection certificates

9122 The requirement for an examination of drawings and the type of certificate depends on the safetyrelevance of the components with respect to their strength and reliability and on the operational mode andthe type of certification of the lifting appliances

9123 Table 9-1 reflects the general requirements given by the Society The Societey reserves the right toimpose additional requirements or to permit deviations

9124 The Society reserves the right to impose additional requirements for all kinds of mechanical partsshould this be necessary on account of new findings or operational experience

913 Differing designs

9131 Designs differing from the requirements given in this section may be approved if examined by theSociety for their suitability and approved as being equivalent

9132 Mechanical parts developed on the basis of novel technical concepts but not yet sufficiently provenrequire special approval by the Society Such systems may be subjected to more stringent supervision if theprerequisites as per [9131] are not applicable

9133 In the cases mentioned in [9131] and [9132] the Society is entitled to demand presentation ofadditional documentation and performance of special trials


DNV GL AS

92 Design criteria and operational requirements

921 General notes

9211 Mechanical parts of shipboard lifting appliances and loose gear shall be designed for theenvironmental conditions agreed on or prescribed and be capable of being operated without problem underthese conditions

9212 The effects of deformation of the supporting structure on machinery and equipment shall beobserved

9213 Mechanical parts shall be designed in such a way that repairs and regular maintenance are easy toperform using on-board tools

922 Dimensioning

9221 Mechanical parts shall be dimensioned in such a way as to provide adequate strength in respect ofdynamic stress peaks plus adequate fatigue strength in relation to the load and service lifeWith respect to dimensioning attention shall be paid particularly to the stress peaks arising duringacceleration and retardation and if applicable the dynamic influences resulting from lifting and lowering ofloadsProof of fatigue strength may be provided in accordance with the Section I of FEM

9222 All mechanical parts shall measure up to the special circumstances of operation on board ships suchas ship movements and acceleration increased corrosion temperature changes etc

9223 With regard to structural design and fastening in general acceleration of 07 g in the frequencyrange from 13 to 100 Hz shall additionally be considered see also [9231]

923 Effects of vibration

9231 Machinery and equipment shall not cause any vibrations and shocks which may unduly stressother components or the structure of the lifting appliance and loose gear The permissible amplitudes andaccelerations are stated in the RU SHIP Pt4 Sec2

9232 If compliance with the permissible values of amplitude and acceleration cannot be ensured bystructural measures damping measures are required

9233 Within the frequency ranges which occur there shall be no resonance phenomena in componentssupport- and suspension arrangements - nor within equipment

924 Lubrication

9241 Lubrication of the moving parts of lifting appliances and loose gear shall be guaranteed under alloperating conditions

9242 Each grease-lubricated bearing shall be provided with its own proven type of grease nipple

9243 Accessibility to manual greasing points shall be ensured


DNV GL AS

925 Corrosion protectionComponents at risk of corrosion shall be given suitable corrosion protection

93 Power drivesThe requirements given in [92] shall be observed In addition the following applies

931 Drives in general

9311 Power drives shall be adequately dimensioned for the working conditions laid down to allow trouble-free and low-vibration operation

9312 For electrical drives and electrical controls in general the requirements given in Sec10 areapplicable

932 Main drives

9321 Main drives of shipboard lifting appliances shall be dimensioned in such a way that the installedpower meets the requirements given in [9311] for all combinations of motion and speedWhere the installed power is not sufficient to execute all motions simultaneously at nominal load and at fullspeed the speed shall be reduced automatically

9322 Diesel engines shall not be capable of running at excessive speeds or being stalled

94 Slewing gears and slew rings

941 Slewing gears

9411 Slewing gears shall be designed for maximum operating torque and where the gears are of a self-locking type they shall be equipped with a slewing gear brake

9412 Slewing gears on board ships shall be designed in such a way that in the event of the vesselspermissible inclination being exceeded by 5deg none of the materials employed shall be stressed beyond 90of its yield point

9413 In the case of slewing gears on board ships it shall be taken into account that it might be necessaryin the out of operation condition to reduce the load on the slewing gear brakes by means of locking devices

9414 Slewing gears of shipboard cranes working at sea state shall be dimensioned for at least 13 timesthe design torque based on wind transverse tension and inclination of the cranersquos base and shall have atleast 2 independent drives

942 Slew rings9421 Large roller bearings

94211 The design of large roller bearings shall together with the connecting structures and the bolting besuitable for the intended operation and the intended environmental conditions


DNV GL AS

94212 The connecting flanges on the loading gear and foundations shall be adequately distortion-resistant their surfaces machinedAccuracy of plane and distortion shall be within the tolerances stated by the manufacturerThe mating surfaces shall be steel to steel Casting of synthetic material is permitted only in exceptionalcases and requires the Societys approval in each individual case see [574124]

94213 Large roller bearings shall be designed in such a way that a failure of important runway elementsdoes not result in a total loss of the lifting appliance

94214 If large roller bearings have to be dismantled during employment for an internal examinationspecial dismantling equipment shall be available which can hold the lifting appliance and raise it after theconnecting bolts have been unscrewedAs an alternative the lifting appliance shall have special eyebolts for lifting by another appliance and a safeplace for setting-down

94215 Where an interchange of seals is intended large roller bearings shall be designed such that this isenabled without dismantling of the bearings or loosening of the connecting bolts

94216 With respect to the materials to be used as well as their heat treatment and proof of mechanicalproperties the requirements given in [134] apply

9422 Bolting of large roller bearingsIn addition to [5741] the following applies

94221 The fixed ring at the foundation or at the crane column shall be bolted at even intervals around itscircumference

94222 For bolting of the rotating ring to the lifting appliance uneven bolt intervals may be applied if thesafety of such bolting is verified by calculation or measurement

94223 The distance between the bolts shall in general not exceed 6 times the bolt diameter

94224 The requirements for the bolts are as follows942241 Up to a diameter of le 30 mm bolts may be preloaded according to the instructions of the slewrings manufacturer by applying a torqueFor larger diameters preloading shall be by hydraulic elongation This calls for increased thread tolerances942242 With respect to the materials to be used for the bolts as well as the proof of their mechanicalproperties

9423 King pins and support rolls

94231 If not safe by design lifting appliances shall be secured against overturning by king pins andsupport rolls also with rolls which engage from below where required

94232 The rotating system shall meet the following requirements

mdash support rolls shall be installed in a stationary positionmdash support rolls and king pins shall be easily accessible for maintenance and inspection support rolls also for

exchange purposesmdash after failure of one support roll even under load the lifting appliance shall still be capable of being turned

into a secure position


DNV GL AS

95 Winches

951 Design notes

9511 Winches shall be of a reversible type ie the lowering process shall also be motor-controlled

9512 Design features incorporated in each winch shall ensure that the load cannot run back inadvertently(eg by a ratchet wheel self-locking gears non-return valves automatic brakes etc)

9513 The use of belts or friction discs to transmit power between the winch drum and the reverse travelprevention device referred to in [9512] is not allowed

952 Rope drums

9521 The drum diameter shall be determined in accord-ance with the intended purpose of the winch inaccordance with [8243] or a recognized standard

9522 The calculated hoop stress of winch drums σh shall not exceed 85 of the material yield stress

9523 Rope drums shall be provided with flanges whose outer edges extend above the top layer of rope byat least 25 times the rope diameter unless the rope is prevented from overriding the flange by a spoolingdevice or other meansIt shall be ensured that ropes can wind onto drums properly and without excessive deviation

9524 The number of safety-turns left on the rope drum shall not be less than 3

9525 Rope grooves shall comply with the following requirements

mdash groove diameter ge 105 middot rope diameter dsmdash groove depth ge 033 middot rope diameter ds

9526 In the case of multiple winding wedges at the flanges shall facilitate the ropes onto the second layerunless special measures are provided such as

mdash small lateral deflection ge 15degmdash cable guidesmdash Lebus grooving

9527 Rope-end attachments at the winch drum shall be designed in such a way that

mdash the ropes are not pulled over edgesmdash the end fastening cannot be released unintentionallymdash the end fastening is easy to inspect

If the end attachment of wire ropes is based on clamping at least 3 clamping plates shall be usedThe construction of end attachments for fibre ropes shall be agreed with the SocietyFor nominal loads up to 12 t and lifting appliances which are only occasionally loaded spliced rope loops canalso be used


DNV GL AS

9528 The following conditions shall be met for the minimum required rope tension force Fa at the drum

95281 Shipboard lifting appliances

FS = rope tension as per [8232]γD1 = safety factor for wire ropes as per Table 8-2 (where applicable [8233] shall be observed)μ = coefficient of friction between rope and drum Applicable values are

mdash smooth drum μ le 008mdash grooved drum μ le 010

α = wrap angle For 3 turns isα = 6 middot π

95282 Shipboard lifting appliances working at sea state

FBr = rope breaking load according to [8231]

The Societys may also demand this rope tension for other lifting appliances if this is employed under similaroperational conditions eg for floating cranes operating at sea

953 Brakes

9531 Each winch shall be fitted with a braking device capable of braking and holding the maximumpermitted load safely under all operating conditions and this action shall not generate inadmissible dynamicinfluencesThe minimum friction coefficient of the brake shall not exceed 03 in the design calculationThe winch and its substructure shall be able to safely withstand the forces set up during braking

9532 Having regard to the dynamics of the braking action the braking torque shall exceed the maximumload torque by an adequate safety margin As a guide the maximum braking torque may be set at about80 above the maximum load torqueIf need be fdS according to [82326] shall be considered

9533 The required braking device may take the form of

mdash self-locking gearmdash mechanical brake with brake pads or brake discsmdash a hydraulic or pneumatic device which prevents lowering of the load ormdash electromotive brake


DNV GL AS

and shall be actuated when

mdash the control returns to the neutral positionmdash a safety device comes into actionmdash the power supply fails ormdash on hydraulic installations a non-scheduled pressure loss occurs

9534 Hydraulic retention brakes shall comply with the following requirements

mdash The shut-off valve of hydraulic motors shall activate at the low-pressure connection in the case ofpressure loss

mdash Hydraulic motors shall have a shut-off valve hydraulic cylinders a valve according to [9624] which shallbe fitted directly at the high-pressure connection

mdash A hydraulic motor and cylinder shall always be fed with a sufficient quantity of working fluid also the fluidsupply in the event of power failure eg by gravity

mdash Shut-off valves and valves according to [9624] shall be capable of absorbing the pressure impactscaused by braking

9535 Electromotive brakes additionally require a mechanical holding brake (drum brake or spring-loadedmotor brake)

9536 Braking devices shall be designed in such a way that on the one hand they may be adjustable onthe other the designed braking effect cannot easily be interfered with Due to humidity oils or impuritiesbraking power shall not decrease below the design valueWhere a gear box is arranged between brake and drum the load-bearing components shall be dimensionedlike the corresponding components of a brakeSpring-loaded braking pads or discs shall be loaded by pressure springsChecking wear to braking pads or discs shall be possible without dismantling the braking unitSelf-blocking brakes are only admissible for stowage or idle positions

9537 The following requirements apply to shipboard cranes and floating cranes operating at sea state andwhich transport persons

95371 In addition to the normal working brake hoisting and luffing winches shall be fitted with asecondary brake which is independent in terms of mechanical and operational layout

95372 Secondary brakes shall have their own independent control circuit and at least be dimensioned towithstand loads as per [425]

954 Winch drives9541 Power drivesFor power drives the requirements given in [93] and [9614] apply

9542 Manual drives

95421 Manual drives shall incorporate the following features

mdash The crank handle turns in the same direction for all gear ratiosmdash Crank handles have a crank radius of approximately 350 mm and a rotatable grip sleevemdash Detachable crank handles are safeguarded against being detached unintentionallymdash The load is hauled in manually with a force of max 160 Nmdash A speed of about 30 revmin-1 is not exceeded


DNV GL AS

95422 Where winches are constructed for both powered and manual operation the power- and manualsystems shall be mutually interlocked

955 Couplings

9551 Clutch couplings between the drive and the rope drum are only permitted where one of the means toprevent runback stipulated in [9512] has been provided

9552 Where winches have more than one disengageable drum only one drum shall be in operation at anytime

9553 Control levers shall be safeguarded against unintentional operation

956 Gearing

9561 The design of gearing shall conform to established engineering practice location positioning andmode of operation shall be taken into account

9562 Gearing shall amongst others include the following characteristics

mdash easy access for maintenancemdash facilities for checking the oil levelmdash ventilation- and oil filler pipes appropriate to the locationmdash inspection openings

957 Controls and monitoring instruments

9571 The controls and monitoring instruments shall be clearly arranged on the control platform

9572 Controls and monitoring instruments shall be permanently clearly and intelligibly marked with thedirection or the function of the movements they control see [1242]

9573 The arrangement and direction of movement of controls and monitoring instruments shall match thedirection of the movement which they control

9574 The operating movement range of control levers shall be less than 300 mm and when released theyshall return automatically to the neutral position

9575 In the case of push-button controls there shall be a separate button for each direction of movement

96 Hydraulic systems


9611 The dimensioning and design of hydraulic systems shall conform to the established rules ofengineering practice Safe operation under all envisaged service conditions shall be ensured by suitableequipment (eg filters coolers control devices and primary pressure control) and by selecting anappropriate hydraulic fluid

9612 Hydraulic systems shall be protected against overpressure and against overspeed of the load by acorresponding limitation of flow rate and pressure


DNV GL AS

9613 Instead of pipes high pressure hoses may be used These shall comply with the requirements givenin EN 13135-2 or an equivalent standardThe hoses shall be suitable for the proposed operating fluids pressures temperatures operating andenvironmental conditions and be appropriately laid and of an approved design

9614 For hydraulically-powered winches a standstill brake to prevent slip is required if necessitated by theconstruction of the winchAny slip occurring shall generally not exceed the equivalent of one revolution of the drum or 1 m hooklowering per minute whichever is the lesser

962 Hydraulic cylinders

9621 Hydraulic cylinders shall be dimensioned for 11 times relief pressure pc and dynamic forces which mayoccur in and out of service

9622 The relief pressure pc of the safety relief valves shall be set at a sufficiently high level that dynamicforces which may occur can be absorbed and hoist load coefficients are considered

9623 Piston rods shall be sufficiently rigidly connected to the piston or telescopic rod in order to meet therequirements for calculation given in [4923]The stroke of the piston rods shall be limited by end stops which shall be capable of preventing the pushing-out of the piston rods even at the utmost pressure and dynamic load If necessary devices for terminaldamping or end limitation shall be provided

9624 With telescopic cylinders extending and run-in of the telescopic rods shall be conducted in aspecified order

9625 Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders eg for lifting luffing folding and telescoping of crane booms aswell as for slewing of lifting appliances shall be provided with a device which maintains the position of theload the crane boom or the lifting appliance in the event of pressure loss and failure of a pipe or hose lineSuch a device may be an automatic shut-off brake valve a pilot-operated check valve or a load holdingvalve and shall be installed inside or outside directly at the cylinder

9626 The type of fastening and the design of the bearings shall safeguard that no unacceptable externalbending moments can be transmitted to the hydraulic cylinders

963 Hydraulic tanks

9631 Regarding dimensioning of hydraulic tanks tasks like eg cooling (radiation of heat) eliminating airand depositing contaminants shall be taken into consideration At the same time the container shall be ableto accommodate the total amount of oil in the system

9632 Hydraulic tanks shall be fitted with

mdash fluid level indicator (including minimum and maximum values)mdash access openingmdash outlet valvemdash ventilation

Design operational and environmental conditions may in addition require cooling andor heating of thetanks

9633 Pressure tanks shall be capable of withstanding a 2-fold maximum working pressure and shall have asafety valve against overpressure


DNV GL AS

97 Protective measures and safety devices

971 Protective measures

9711 Moving parts flywheels rope and chain drives rods and other components which might come toconstitute an accident hazard for the handling staff shall be provided with protection against accidentalcontact The same applies to hot mechanical parts pipes and walls not provided with insulation

9712 Measures shall be taken to provide power supply lines with effective protection against mechanicaldamage

9713 Cranks for starting internal combustion engines shall disengage automatically once the engine startsrunning

9714 Machinery employed in potentially explosive areas shall comply with the requirements given in EN13463-1

972 Safety devices

9721 Winches and drive systems shall be equipped with adjustable protection devices (eg pressure reliefvalves winding and slip clutch thermal overload relays) Following a power failure drives shall not restartautomatically

9722 Devices provided to unlock slewing or hoisting gear are only permissible for special operationalpurposes or as emergency measures eg on offshore cranes

9723 Safety devices shall not be rendered unserviceable by environmental conditions at the point ofinstallation because of dirt or springs breaking There shall be a means of checking the devices


981 Examination of drawings


9812 In addition the mechanical parts listed in Table 9-1 are subject to examination of drawings withinthe scope indicated there

982 Supervision of construction9821 General notes

98211 Mechanical parts shall be manufactured by staff qualified in handling the installations and devicesnecessary During manufacture and before delivery the parts shall undergo the quality tests required inaccord-ance with state-of-the-art technology and experience

98212 All materials shall be suited to the intended purpose Proof of the mechanical properties of thematerials used shall be furnished Identification of the materials shall be possible on the basis of testcertificates or reports


DNV GL AS

98213 Mechanical parts which require an inspection certificate 32 according to Table 9-1 are subject tosupervision of construction by the Society with the restrictions described in the explanations to Table 9-1where required982131 The Society inspection in charge decides in coordination with the manufacturer on type andscope of supervision of production and certification taking the in-house quality control andor approval forproduction into consideration982132 With respect to assistance by the manufacturer during supervision of production by the Societythe requirements given in [1322] shall be observed

9822 Tests and examinationsThe following requirements contain general test requirements and in addition provisions for the supervisionof production by the Society

98221 General notes982211 For the acceptance tests before delivery and if applicable also for the supervision of productionthe Societys surveyor shall be given material test and internal control certificates test reports andmanufacturing documents in particular approved drawings including the relevant examination reports as aprerequisite for the tests and examinations described below982212 Test reports shall include the following information if applicable

mdash designation of type and nominal dimensionsmdash purchase and order num-bermdash drawing numbermdash results of internal controlsmdash certificate numbers of material tests and non-destructive testsmdash additional details as necessary

982213 For series-production components other test procedures may be agreed with the Society insteadof the prescribed ones if they are accepted to be equivalent982214 The Society reserves the right to extend the scope of testing if necessary and also to subjectsuch components to a test for which testing is not expressly required in this standard982215 Where mechanical parts shall be used for the intended purpose for the first time the Societymay ask for a type approval

98222 Winches982221 After completion winches shall be subjected to an examination and functional test at nominalrope tension by repeated hoisting and lowering of the nominal load During the functional test in particularthe brake and safety devices shall be tested and adjusted982222 Where winches are designed for a holding force greater than the nominal rope tension thenominal rope tension shall be tested dynamically and the holding force statically982223 Where winches are designed with a constant tension device the maintenance of constanttension shall be proven for all levels of tension set by the design982224 The above tests including the setting of the overload protection can also be performed onboard together with the functional testing of the lifting appliance In this case a functional test at availableload shall be performed at the manufacturersTesting of winches at test load will be performed within the scope of initial tests of the lifting appliance see[1333]

98223 Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders982231 Load-bearing or 1st order components are hydraulic cylinders designed for hoisting luffingtelescoping and slewing982232 Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders shall undergo a functional test at relief pressure and a pressuretest at test pressure The test pressure shall be 15 times relief pressure pc however with relief pressuresover 200 bar it need not be higher than pc + 100 bar


DNV GL AS

982233 With reference to [9625] in the case of series-production of lifting appliances of the sametype and with multiple cylinders eg with slewing cranes with luffing folding andor telescopic crane boomsa regular check on the cylinders at a minimum of 125 times the relief pressure may be acceptedThe Societys surveyor is entitled to ask for cylinders to be tested which are selected at random inaccordance with [982232]

98224 Large roller bearings982241 The material properties of forged rings shall be tested according to the DNV GL rules formaterials by tensile tests and by notched-bar impact tests and shall comply with the requirements given inthe agreed specificationThe manufacturer shall in addition ultrasonically test the rings for internal defects and certify that thematerials are free from defects which may impair the performance characteristics982242 Rings shall be heat-treated as appropriate to the material and the running surfaces shall behardened additionally After hardening the runway surfaces of the rings shall be crack-tested along theirentire lengthCracks may be removed by grinding if by this measure the functional capability of the slewing ring is notimpaired Residual cracks are not permitted The Societys surveyor may demand the crack test be performedin his presence982243 The hardened runways shall undergo a hardness test at least 8 points equally distributed alongthe circumference The hardness values shall be within the specified rangeWhere there are reasonable doubts about the hardened depth proof shall be furnished using specimenswhich have been hardened under the same conditions as the ring under consideration982244 For the acceptance test before delivery the large roller bearing shall be assembled andpresented to the Societys surveyor The functional capability (slewing without load) the bearing clearanceand the accuracy in plane and round travelling are thereby to be tested In addition the dimensions shall bechecked randomly as deemed necessary by the surveyor

98225 Bolts and nuts for large roller bearingsWith respect to tests and examinations of bolts and nuts the DNV GL rules for metallic materials RU SHIPPt2 applies

98226 Mechanical and hydromechanical parts982261 With respect to tests and examinations of mechanical and hydromechanical parts DNV GL rulesRU SHIP Pt4 apply where relevantParts not covered by DNV GL rules shall be tested and examined using appropriate procedures agreed withthe Societys surveyor982262 Instead of testing at the manufacturers tests can also be performed on board within the scopeof initial tests of the lifting appliance if practicable

99 Documentation

991 Marking

9911 Each mechanical part shall be marked by the manufacturer in a suitable way The marking shall atleast include the following if applicable

mdash manufacturers namemdash year of constructionmdash designation of typemdash purchase order number or serial numbermdash characteristics such as nominal load nominal pressure nominal voltage etcmdash additional details as necessary


DNV GL AS

9912 If after the acceptance test before delivery the requirements for issuing a test certificate of Form092a are complied with the tested mechanical part will be stamped in a prominent positionThe stamp shall include the following information

mdash certificate number together with the code letters of the examining inspecting officemdash stamp with the month and year of testing

for hydraulic cylinders additionally

mdash working pressuremdash testing pressure

for winches additionally

mdash rope tension [kN]mdash holding force [kN]

for slewing gear rings additionally

mdash abbreviation for the material typemdash melting charge numbermdash specimen number

9913 The winding direction of ropes on rope drums shall be clearly recognizable on the drumsWhere required the winding direction shall be indicated appropriately on the drum or winch

992 Certificates

9921 Table 9-1 shows the required types of certificates for essential mechanical partsThe lifting appliance manufacturer shall order the stated parts together with the required certificates theparts manufacturer shall include them in the delivery

9922 The inspection certificate 32 shall be issued by the Society The Societys surveyor uses form2092a

9923 The certificates listed in Table 9-1 are not part of the lifting appliance documentation on board

Table 9-1 Examination of drawings and certification of mechanical parts

Shipboard liftingappliances in general

Shipboard lifting appliancesoperating at sea state

Shipboard liftingappliances on vesselswith CRANE notationComponents

Examinationof drawings Certificate Examination

of drawings Certificate Examinationof drawings Certificate

Winch drum Z minus Z minus Z minus

Winch mounting Z minus Z minus Z minus

Winch complete unit I 22 Z PC 1 Z PC 1

Hydraulic cylinderload-bearing Z PC Z PC Z PC

Slewing rings Z PC 2 Z PC 2 Z PC

le M52 I 22 I 31 I 31Bolts and nutsfor slewing rings gt M52 I 22 I 31 I PC


DNV GL AS






King pinsupport rolls Z 22 Z 31 Z PC

Slewing gear complete unit I 22 Z 31 Z PC

Cylinder Z 22 Z 31 Z PCSlewing gear

Rack bar Z 22 Z 31 Z PC

Luffing gear (Cylinder spindle) Z PC Z PC Z PC

Travelling gear complete unit Z 22 minus minus Z 31

Main drive (diesel) minus 22 I 31 I 31

le 50 kW minus 22 I 22 Z 31Hydromotorsand pumps gt 50 kW minus 22 Z 31 Z PC

le 40 barle 32 DN

minus minus I 22 I 22

Pressure linesgt 40 bargt 32 DN

minus minus I 22 I 31 3

Safety valvesagainst pressure loss I 22 I 22 I 22

Hydraulic hose lines minus 22 I PC 4 I PC 4

Hydraulic fittings minus 22 I 22 I 22

Ventilatorsheat exchangers minus 22 I 31 Z PC

Sheaves I 22 I 31 Z PC

Swell compensators minus minus Z PC Z PC

Damping devices minus minus Z PC Z PC

Explanations

mdash The column Shipboard lifting appliances in general may also be applied to loose gear as and where relevantmdash Z means drawings and calculationsmdash I means documents for informationmdash The designation of the certificate types corresponds to ISO 10474 The numbers mean the following certificatesmdash 22 test report (the Societys designation C-type Certificate)mdash 31 inspection certificates (the Societys designation B-type Certificate)mdash PC DNV GL product certificate (VL) see RU SHIP Pt Ch3 Sec5 [24]

1) At the manufacturers at least 1 functional test is required see [982224]2) Certificate of type 31 if the manufacturer is approved by the Society3) The certificate shall confirm the performance of a pressure test at 15 times the nominal pressure4) Certificate of type 31 if the manufacturers of both the hose as well as the hose line are approved by the Society

and proof is furnished of a pressure test at 2 times the nominal pressure


DNV GL AS

SECTION 10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

101 General

1011 General notes

10111 This section contains the requirements for electrical equipment of shipboard lifting appliances andwhere applicable also of loose gear

10112 Additional or more comprehensive requirements eg for switch cabinets and for electricalequipment not covered hereafter can be taken from the following

mdash DNV GL rulesmdash recognized standards and regulations where applicable to shipboard lifting appliances unless contrary to

the requirements given in this section

10113 The requirements given in Sec1 shall be observed where relevant


10121 Table 2-1 is a list of the essential electrical equipment which is subject to examination of drawingsas deemed necessary by the Society and which shall be delivered together with test reports or inspectioncertificates

10122 The requirement for an examination of drawings and the type of certificate depend on the safetyrelevance of the equipment with respect to its suitability and reliability and on the operational mode andorthe type of certification of the shipboard lifting appliances

10123 In case of founded exceptions also the approval and certification of electrical equipment not listedin Table 2-1 to Table 2-3 can be required if they are exceedingly relevant for the safety andor reliablefunction of the lifting appliance

1013 Deviating designs

10131 Designs differing from the requirements which follow may be approved if examined by the Societyfor their suitability and deemed equivalent

10132 Electrical equipment developed on the basis of novel technical concepts but not yet sufficientlyproven requires particular approval by the Society Such equipment may be subjected to more stringentsupervision if the prerequisites as per [10131] are not fulfilled

10133 In the cases mentioned in [10131] and [10132] the Society is entitled to demand presentationof additional documentation and performance of special trials

10134 The Society reserves the right to impose additional requirements for all kinds of electricalequipment should this be necessary on account of new findings or operational experience


DNV GL AS


1021 The electrical control and switch gear as well as the motors shall be designed or arranged in such a waythat necessary maintenance of contacts contactors collectors slip rings brakes etc can be carried out withmeans available on board

1022 Switch and control cabinets as well as motors arranged on deck shall be provided with adequate heating forthe standstill condition if sufficient internal space is available

1023 When choosing electrical equipment the expected environmental conditions such as humidity heat cold andvibrations shall receive special consideration In addition the following applies

10231 In general acceleration of 07 g in the frequency range from 13 to 100 Hz shall also be taken intoaccount as regards design and mounting

10232 Plug-in cards with electronic controls may have to have extra fastenings

1024 Where special circuits for lighting standstill heating etc are fed through separate power supply switches sothat they can also be operated when the main supply to the lifting appliance is switched off special measuresshall be taken in the switchgear to prevent direct contact with live parts A double feed shall be indicated bylabels

1025 For supply lines fixed laid to shipboard lifting appliances including the external fixed cabling marine cableshall be used as per RU SHIP Pt4 Ch8 see [322]

1026 An adequate power supply shall be provided on board or if applicable onshore Onshore power supply shallbe adapted to the supply system onboard

103 Drives and brakes

1031 Driving power

10311 All motors shall be dimensioned in accordance with their envisaged purpose and expected use

10312 In the case of shipboard lifting appliances the working speeds laid down for the nominal load shallbe maintained also at the vessels prescribed minimum inclinations

10313 The required power for winches is calculated from the rated pull and the rated rope speed of thefirst layer of rope on the drum taking gearing efficiency into account


DNV GL AS

1032 Winch drivesFor winch drives the following operating modes Si are defined

10321 For drives up to about 5 t LNe started very frequently (about 160-400 starts per hour) with shortload travel and lifting periods duty type S5 ie intermittent periodic duty with electric braking with thestarting process and electrical braking influencing the heating-up of the motor

10322 For drives with long load travel and lifting periods and less frequent starts (up to about 160 startsper hour) duty type S3 ie intermittent periodic duty without the starting and braking processes having anynoticeable effect on the heating-up of the motor

10323 For heavy loads with prolonged load handling and lengthy intervals duty type S2 ie short-timeduty with an ensuing interval long enough for the driving motor to cool down approximately to the ambienttemperature Preferred duration of duty is 30 min

10324 In the case of hydraulic drives the electric motors driving the pumps shall be matched to the givenconditions Possible operating modes are S1 (continuous running) or S6 (continuous operation periodic duty)In the case of mode S6 particular regard shall be paid to the mode of operation of the hydraulic unit egthe power required during idling

10325 The driving motors shall be capable of running-up at least 13 times against the rated torqueWhen designing the motors the moment of inertia of the gearing shall be taken into account The moment ofinertia of the driven masses shall be based on an inertia factor FJ of at least 12

10326 The duty types S1 to S3 S5 and S6 are defined in IEC 60034-1 In addition the following applies

103261 When operating in type S5 at least 160 starts per hour shall be possible This is based on theassumption that 50 of the starts will be without load

103262 Where the requirements are more stringent than [103261] the drives shall be designed for240 320 or 400 starts per hour

10327 For operating modes S5 and S3 differing duty times shall be assumed depending on the serviceconditions For the operating steps a total operating period of 25 of the overall total shall be considered Inaddition the following applies

103271 In the case of more stringent requirements than given in [10327] (shorter intervals betweenthe separate hoisting operations) duty times of 40 60 or 75 shall be chosen

103272 In the case of pole changing motors where all the speed steps are designed for the rated loadand where generally the top speed step is reached by switching through the individual lower steps theoverall operating period shall be shared out between the individual switching steps

103273 If one of the speed steps is intended for light-hook operation only the overall operating periodapplies only to the operating steps However the light hook step shall be designed for at least 15 of theoverall operating period

1033 Brakes

10331 The frequency of operation of the brakes shall correspond to that of the associated motor It isassumed that when operating braking will only ever be effected from a low-speed stepThe braking equipment shall function automatically and arrest the load with the minimum possible impact


DNV GL AS

10332 Winches shall as a matter of principle be equipped with safety brakes which brake the load safelyat any speed if the power supply fails

104 Cables and lines

1041 Supply line

10411 As a matter of principle power shall be supplied via suitable cables possibly using cable trolleys orcable drums with integral slip ringsAll cables and lines shall be flame-resistant and self-extinguishing Furthermore all cables shall be approvedby the Society possibly UV-radiation resistant and where hydraulic systems are concerned oil resistant

10412 Devices eg cable drums introduced to prevent the lines dragging on the floor during operationshall be designed in such a way that the inner bend radius of the cables does not remain under the followingvalues unless otherwise stated by the cable maker

mdash in the case of cables with an external diameter up to 215 mm 5 times the cable diametermdash in the case of cables with an external diameter exceeding 215 mm 625 times the cable diameter

1042 Wire cross-sections

10421 Dimensioning shall take the load into account possibly giving consideration to an utilisation factorand the expected ambient temperature

10422 For lifting appliances with only one driving motor particularly with electro-hydraulic drive systemsthe power supply shall be dimensioned as appropriate to the rated current at the maximum operating stagefor continuous operation

10423 For lifting appliances with several motors for calculation of the amperage 100 of the powerof the hoisting unit motor plus 50 of the power of all remaining drives may be used as a basis Theamperage resulting shall be applied as the continuous operation valueThese values also apply to the dimensioning of slip ring bodies and brushes

1043 Laying of cables10431 General notes

104311 Fastening for cables shall measure up to the vibrations expected during loading gear operation

104312 Cables suspended from cable trays or running vertically shall if secured by means of plasticstraps as a matter of principle also be fastened in this area with corrosion-resistant metal clips or metalstraps at intervals of at least 1 m where they pass from one tray to another

104313 Openings for passing through cables shall be deburred and lined so that the cable sheathingcannot be damaged by sharp edges

104314 Leakage of hydraulic oil into control cabinets switchgear and cable boxes shall be avoidedtherefore wherever practicable cables shall be introduced into the boxes or cabinets from below Wherethey are introduced from above they may have to be additionally sealed in areas exposed to the risk of oilleakage in an appropriate way


DNV GL AS

10432 Cable trays

104321 Cables shall be laid on adequately strong corrosion-resistant cable trays Exceptions to this arepossible when laying single cables eg to light fittings

104322 Cable trays shall be arranged so that hydraulic oil from hydraulic systems cannot drip onto thecables Where this is not possible oil guards shall be provided

10433 Cable bundles

104331 In revolving cranes or in swing cranes with a limited slewing range all circuitssupply lines maybe led in via flexible cable bundles suitably arranged in the rotational centre of the crane column

104332 Suspended cable bundles shall be appropriately led at both ends over curved cable trays with aradius of curvature not less than 10 times that of the thickest cable and fastened there in such a way thatthe weight of the bundle is distributed as evenly as possible over all the cables depending on their size

104333 Cable bundles shall not strike or rub against anything during slewing and in the event ofmovement of the lifting appliance lifting appliance parts or the ship

1044 Cable drums and cable trolley trays

10441 Drum-wound cables shall be dimensioned in such a way that even with the cable fully wound onand under normal operating power load the cable does not heat up beyond its permitted limit

10442 For cable trolleys minimum bend radii are as follows

mdash cable up to 8 mm outside diametermdash 3 times the conductor diametermdash cable up to 125 mm outside diametermdash 4 times the conductor diametermdash cable over 125 mm outside radiimdash 5 times the conductor diameter

10443 In the case of flat cables the thickness of the cable corresponds to the outside diameter of roundcables

105 Switches

1051 Crane main switchescrane circuit breakers

10511 Shipboard lifting appliances shall be fitted with a manually operated circuit breaking device withwhich all movement can be stopped It shall be possible to isolate all the electric equipment from the mainsusing the circuit breaking device The circuit breaking capacity shall be sufficient to switch off simultaneouslyboth the power of the largest motor when stalled and the total power of all other consumers in normaloperationThe off-position shall be capable of being locked The off position shall only be indicated after havingreached the prescribed air and creepage distances The circuit breaking device shall only have one on andoff position with dedicated arresters

10512 A circuit breaking device may also be used as a load switch if it permits the maximum short-circuit power to be switched off safely Dimensioning shall be carried out in accordance with IEC Publication60947-4-1 Type 2


DNV GL AS

10513 In the case of electro-hydraulic lifting appliances the load switch shall also switch off power to thehydraulic pump motor(s)

1052 Limit switches

10521 The control circuits of the safety limit switches shall be designed on the closed-circuit currentprinciple or shall be self-regulating

10522 In the case of automated or programme-controlled motion processes (including use ofmicroprocessor systems) the continued safe functioning of movement limitation systems shall be ensuredeven in the event of a fault or malfunction in the computerThis may be achieved by using separate control elements or additional main frame independent electronicunits insofar as these have been approved by the Society and the switching has been qualified as safe bythe Society as regards its safety aspect (fault elimination assessment)

10523 In programme-controlled movement processes limit switches may not be used for operationalspeed or movement measurement

10524 Where the hazard analysis has shown that a second movement limiter shall be provided failure ofthe first limiter shall be indicated to the crane driver



10611 In general the operating voltage for motor drives should not exceed 690 volts and for controlsheating and lighting systems 250 volts Insulation shall be all-pole

10612 All equipment with a working voltage exceeding 50 volts connected via movable cable shall beearthed via a protective conductor inside the cable The following shall be observed

106121 For cable cross-sections up to 16 mm2 its cross-section shall match that of the main conductorsfor those exceeding 16 mm2 it shall be at least half that of the main conductors

106122 If power is supplied via slip rings the protective conductor shall be provided with a separate slipring

10613 Any non-earthed conductor shall be provided with overload and short-circuit protection inaccordance with RU SHIP Pt4 Ch8

10614 For motors monitoring of the winding temperatures is recommended as protection againstinadmissible heating If the admissible temperature or load is exceeded power shall be switched off Switch-off due to thermal overload should be indicated Lowering of the load shall be still possible after the electricdrive has been switched off due to overheating

10615 Switches switchgear and control cabinets shall be located in such a way that work on them andoperational tests can be performed safely For arrangements inside the crane column gratings or platformsshall be provided

10616 The service passage in front of switchgear and control cabinets shall not be less than 05 m widewith 180 m headroom If this headroom cannot be maintained it may be reduced to 140 m if the passageis at least 07 m wide


DNV GL AS

10617 As a minimum the following protective systems (contact- foreign body- and water protection)shall be provided

106171 For electrical installations below deck or in the enclosed spaces of shipboard lifting appliances theprotective system shall be at least IP 44 in dry spaces at least IP 20

106172 For electrical installations on deck the protective system shall be at least IP 56 under certaincircumstances eg where there is a heightened risk of dust even IP 66

10618 Where required electrostatic discharges shall be prevented by earthing andor connection ofmetallic components

10619 Control stands crane drivers cabins and hand-operated equipment shall be fitted withmechanically locked emergency shut-down switches or push-buttons See also the requirements given in[1243]

106110 Motors in particular for lifting and luffing gear shall be selected and protected in such a way thatin the event of power failure they do not overspeed in the time before the brakes respondEven after the response of the overspeed protection device the speed limits shall not be exceeded

106111 Electrical appliances which are employed in areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere shallcomply with the requirements given in respective international or national regulations regarding explosionprotection eg the directive 949EG and IEC 60079

1062 Safety devices10621 Controls

106211 Control handles shall be constructed in such a way that at the least the stop position engageswithout fail In systems with pole-changing motors a separate notch shall be allocated to each speed stepWhen the control handles are released they shall automatically move to the stop position

106212 Following failure of the electric power supply and when this is restored or following operationof the emergency switch-off button or push-button restarting the drives shall only be possible via the stopposition

106213 Where winch motors are provided with a speed step designed for light-hook operation only thecontrol mechanism shall automatically prevent this step operating when there is a load on the hook This alsoapplies to other part-load operating steps

106214 Radio controls programmed control mechanisms or microprocessor systems shall have been typetested by the Society Alternatively their operational safety may be proved in a different way recognized bythe Society

10622 Lighting

106221 In addition to an adequate main lighting system for the lifting appliance working area anemergency lighting system shall be provided for the cabin and the area of descent where crane columns arehigher than 10 m in the cabin at the crane column and at the switch gear and machinery

106222 Emergency lighting systems should be guaranteed to last about 30 min and shall preferably beconnected to the emergency power supply As an alternative the Society may approve a battery-operatedemergency power supply


DNV GL AS

106223 Where emergency lighting is powered by batteries the emergency power supply chargers forthese lamps shall be connected to a separate circuit not switched off by the load-circuit switch




10712 In addition to the requirements given in Sec13 the electrical equipment listed in Table 2-1 aresubject to examination of drawings in the scope indicated there


107211 Electrical equipment shall be manufactured by qualified staff handling the necessary installationsand devices During manufacture and before delivery the parts shall undergo the quality tests required inaccordance with state-of-the-art technology and experience

107212 Electrical equipment which requires a product certificate 32 according to Table 2-2 and Table 2-3is subject to supervision of construction by the Society where required1072121 The Society inspection in charge decides in conjunction with the manufacturer on type andscope of supervision of production and certification taking into consideration the in-house quality controlandor approval for production1072122 With respect to assistance by the manufacturer during supervision of production by the Societythe requirements given in [1322] shall be observed


107221 General notes1072211 For the acceptance tests before delivery and if applicable also for the supervision ofproduction the Societys surveyor shall receive certificates for material tests and internal controls testreports and manufacturing documents in particular approved drawings including the allocated examinationreports if required acc to Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 as a prerequisite for the tests and examinationsdescribed below1072212 Test reports shall include the following information if applicable

mdash designation of type and nominal dimensionsmdash purchase and order numbermdash drawing numbermdash results of internal controlsmdash certificate numbers of material tests and non-destructive testsmdash additional details as necessary

1072213 For series-production electrical equipment other test procedures may be agreed with theSociety instead of the prescribed ones if they are accepted as equivalent1072214 Where electrical equipment shall be used for the intended purpose for the first time theSociety may ask for a type approval


DNV GL AS

107222 Electrical equipmentElectrical equipment shall be tested according to RU SHIP Pt4 Ch8 and to undergo a functional test ifpossible

108 Documentation

1081 Marking

10811 Any electrical equipment shall be marked by the manufacturer in a suitable way The marking shallat least include the following information if applicable

mdash manufacturers namemdash year of constructionmdash designation of typemdash purchase order number or serial numbermdash characteristics such as nominal speed nominal voltage etcmdash additional details as necessary

10812 If after the acceptance test and before delivery the requirements for issuing a test certificate Form2092a are complied with the electrical equipment will be stamped in a prominent positionThe stamp shall include the following information


1082 Certificates

10821 Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 show the required types of certificate for essential electrical equipmentThe lifting appliance manufacturer shall order the stated equipment together with the required certificatesand the equipment manufacturer shall include them in the delivery

10822 The inspection certificate 32 shall be issued by the Society The Societys surveyor uses DNV GLForm 2092a for this

10823 The certificates listed in Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 are not part of the lifting appliance documentationon board


DNV GL AS

SECTION 11 CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL COMPONENTS

111 General

1111 This section contains requirements for the construction of steel components for shipload lifting appliancesand loose gear with a special focus on welding

1112 Complementary or more comprehensive requirements and special details shall be taken from the following

mdash DNV GL Rules RU SHIP Pt3mdash DNV GL Rules RU SHIP Pt2mdash recognized standards or regulations


1114 With respect to materials to be used the requirements given in Sec3 apply

112 Requirements for manufacturers


11211 Manufacturers shall be equipped with installations and devices suitable for professional and properhandling of the individual materials manufacturing methods components etcThe Society reserves the right to check the production shop in this respect and to impose requirementsconcerning this matter or to reduce the scale of operations according to the capabilities of the productionshop

11212 The manufacturer shall have a sufficiently qualified staff of experts The supervising and controllingpersonnel shall be indicated to the Society including their areas of responsibility The Society reserves theright to ask for certified proof of qualifications

1122 Quality control

11221 By means of an effective internal quality control the manufacturing works shall ensure thatconstruction and assembly comply with this standard the approved documents (drawings specificationsetc) or with the conditions stated in the approvals

11222 It is the responsibility of the manufacturing works to observe this standard and to meet the specialrequirements associated with the examination of documents or the conditions imposed with the approvalExaminations carried out by the Society do not release the manufacturing works from this responsibility


DNV GL AS

11223 It is the responsibility of the manufacturing works to make sure that production conditions andquality correspond to those of the approval test The Society cannot take any responsibility that productscomply with this standard which have been tested in an approval test or at random during production in allparts or during the entire production process

11224 The Society may reject further use of products processes etc which have proved unsatisfactoryduring application in spite of an earlier satisfactory approval test and may demand they be improvedincluding proper verification

1123 Workmanship11231 Details in the production documents

112311 The production documents (workshop drawings etc) shall include all those details which areessential for quality and functional capability of the component under consideration This includes ndash besidesdimensions ndash eg details on tolerances surface finish quality (reworking) special production processes aswell as tests and requirements as appropriate

112312 All the important details of the welding eg the types of base material configuration anddimensions of the welds welding method welding consumables heat treatment tests to be performed andany special requirements imposed shall be indicated in the production documents (drawings parts listsetc) In special cases the Society may require submission of a welding schedule

112313 Where quality or functional capability of a component is not assured or dubious the Society mayask for suitable improvements This also applies as and where relevant to complementary or additional (egstrengthening) components even if these were not required for the examination of drawings or were notrequired due to poorly detailed presentation

11232 Cut-outs edges of plates

112321 Openings boreholes and other cut-outs shall be rounded with a sufficiently large radius

112322 The face areas (cut areas) of cut-outs shall be finished cleanly and without notches Notchesand the like due to flame-cutting shall not in general be repaired by welding but shall be ground into a flattrough Edges shall be broken or in cases of very high loads rounded

112323 Exposed edges of plates or flanges cut by flame-cutting or a shearing machine shall not besharp-edged and shall be reworked where required as stated in [112322] just as notches and the likedue to flame-cutting This applies as and where relevant to welded joints transitional sections or similardiscontinuities

11233 Cold forming

112331 Where plates are formed at low temperatures (bending flanging beading) the mean bendingradius should not fall below 3 t (t = plate thickness) it shall however be at least 2 t These values refer onlyto ship hull structural steels and comparable structural steels

112332 Before cold formation flame- or shear-cut burrs shall be removed in order to avoid cracksFollowing cold formation the components in particular the lateral ends of bent plates (plate edges) shall bechecked with respect to cracks Cracked components ndash minor cracks excepted ndash shall be set aside Repair bywelding is not permitted


DNV GL AS

11234 Assembly straightening work

112341 During assembly of single components excessive force shall be avoided If possible majordeformations of single components shall be straightened prior to further assembly

112342 Girders stiffeners and the like which are interrupted by transverse components shall beassembled in a well aligned manner If necessary on essential components control bores shall be made forthis purpose which shall be welded closed again afterwards

112343 Straightening works ndash after completion of welding works ndash shall be conducted in such a way thatno noticeable deterioration of material properties takes place In case of doubt the Society may require atype approval or production test samples

11235 Corrosion protection

112351 All steel components shall be provided with suitable corrosion protection For shop primer see[11514] and [11515]

112352 Hollow spaces eg box girders tubular pillars and the like which are demonstrably or by generalexperience permanently air-tight need not be preserved internally During assembly the hollow spaces shallbe clean and dry

112353 The wall thickness of load-bearing parts shall be at least 4 mm Lower wall thicknessrsquos are subjectto the consent of the Society in each individual case

112354 Welded-on reinforcing rings shall be protected against rusting underneath

112355 Spring washers of corrodible materials shall not be used if exposed to the marine atmosphere

1124 Conditions for welding11241 Approval to weld

112411 All works including subcontracting firms wishing to carry out welding operations on parts ofshipboard lifting appliances and loose gear shall have at their disposal the necessary equipment and qualifiedpersonnel and be approved by the Society for this work see RU SHIP Pt2

112412 Approval for fabrication shall be applied for from the Society with the appropriate documentationExisting approval by other independent testing institutions may be taken into account if the relevantdocuments are submitted

112413 The works shall have at their disposal the necessary workshops equipment machinery anddevices to carry out the welding work properly This includes also eg stores and drying equipment for thewelding consumables and auxiliary material equipment for preheating and for heat treatment test meansand equipment as well as weather-protected areas for the outdoor execution of welding works

112414 The works shall have at their disposal qualified welders or staff sufficiently trained for handlingfully mechanical or automatic welding installations In addition they shall have at their disposal qualifiedwelding supervisors responsible for the professional execution of the welding tasks

112415 The suitability of the welding method used in conjunction with the materials in question shall beproved to the Society in an appropriate way The Society may to this end require method checks (test weldsnon-destructive and mechanical-technological tests) supervised by the Society


DNV GL AS

112416 For the (non-destructive) testing of the weld connections suitable test procedures shall be usedand appropriately qualified testers The Society may demand a check under its supervision of ultrasonictesters The scope of tests shall be indicated in the test documentation The test reports shall be submittedto the Society

11242 Welders

112421 Welders for manual or semiautomatic welding shall be examined according to recognizedstandards (eg EN 287 or ISO 9606 or ASME Section IX) Regarding the welding method base materialwelding consumable and welding position and the test shall cover the conditions of the type of productionenvisaged

112422 A welders qualification test remains valid for two years with effect from the test date providedthat during this period welding work is constantly performed in the range of approval of the test and the workof the welder is monitored by the welding supervisors at all times

112423 The required number of qualified welders depends on the size of the works and the scope ofwelding tasks to be executed under the Societys supervision At least two qualified welders are required perwelding method

11243 Supervision of welding

112431 Every work carrying out welding shall employ its own welding supervisor This supervisor shallhave a suitable deputy in the welding shop The welding supervisor shall be responsible for supervising thepreparation and execution of the welds and if applicable their testing

112432 Supervisors shall have training and the experience appropriate to the production requirementsand furnish the necessary proofs to the SocietyAccording to the nature and scope of the welding work performed the supervisory function may be exercisedby a welding engineer (welding engineering specialist or comparably-trained engineer) a welding expert orsome other person with adequate specialist qualifications

112433 The names of the responsible welding supervisors and their deputy shall be made known to theSociety

112434 Changes in the personnel responsible for supervising welding shall automatically be reported tothe Society

11244 Welding consumables auxiliary materials

112441 Only welding consumables and auxiliary materials which have been tested and approved by theSociety shall be used with a quality grade corresponding to the base material to be welded

112442 For highly stressed components and parts stressed at low temperatures for high- and extra highstrength steels steel castings and forgings and for low-temperature welding work hydrogen-controlledwelding consumables and auxiliary materials are preferable

112443 Welding consumables and auxiliary materials for special materials may also be tested andapproved together with the welding method Such approvals are however restricted to the userrsquos works andremain valid for at most one year unless repeat tests are performedWelding consumables and auxiliary materials jointly tested in this way may be replaced by other equivalentmaterials approved for the application in question


DNV GL AS

11245 Welding methods procedure tests

112451 Only those welding methods may be employed whose suitability for the application in question haseither been established by general practice or proved by a procedure test

112452 Procedure tests for the purpose of proving the satisfactory application of the procedure in thewelding shop and adequate quality of the results obtained shall be performed under production conditionson the premises of the company using the method in all cases where materials other than normal-strengthshipbuilding steels A to D or comparable structural steels forging steels and types of casting steel shallbe welded or welding methods other than manual arc welding (E) or partly-mechanised inert gas shieldedwelding (MAG) shall be employedProcedure tests shall also be performed where these processes are applied in a special manner eg in single-side welding using a (ceramic) weld pool support see RU SHIP Pt2 Sec1 [22]

112453 The scope of the test the samples the test specimens and the requirements shall be determinedfrom case to case depending on the proposed application in general accordance with RU SHIP Pt2 In thisconnection account may be taken of procedure tests carried out elsewhere (on submission of the reports)

112454 Welders employed for procedure tests are on successful completion of the test deemed qualifiedfor the procedure employed or the materials concerned

113 Design details

1131 General notes

11311 The materials selected for the design shall in every respect be appropriate to the designrequirements the production and the intended useIf necessary special measures shall be adopted

11312 The design of the structure shall achieve a power flow as undisturbed as possible without localdiscontinuities and steps in rigidity and to be suitable for construction and meet the requirements for long-lasting and reliable operation

11313 The following requirements refer only to welded joints For the design of screw joints therequirements given in [482] apply

1132 Configuration of welded joints11321 Welded joints in general

113211 Welded joints shall be planned in such a way as to ensure that they are readily accessible duringfabrication and can be executed in the optimum welding position and welding sequence

113212 Welded joints and welding sequences shall be designed to minimize residual weld stresses andavoid excessive deformation Welded joints shall therefore not be over-dimensioned

113213 All welded connections shall be configured to achieve a power flow as undisturbed as possiblewithout major internal or external notches or rapid changes of rigidity and without impeding expansion

113214 The requirements given in [113213] apply as and where relevant to the welding of secondarycomponents on primary structures too the highly stressed areas of which and the exposed plate or flangeedges of which shall be kept free from notches caused by welded joints if possible


DNV GL AS

113215 Welded joints shall be designed to ensure that the proposed weld type and quality (eg completeroot fusion in the case of single- and double-bevel butt welds) can be satisfactorily achieved under the givenfabricating conditions Failing this provision shall be made for welds which are easy to execute and their(possibly inferior) load-bearing capacity shall be allowed for when dimensioning the welds

113216 Welded joints in girders and profiles (especially field joints) shall not if possible be located in anarea of high stresses Welded joints on flanges with cold formed bending positions shall be avoided

113217 Highly stressed welded joints which are therefore normally subject to compulsory inspectionshall be designed to facilitate application of the most appropriate inspection technique (radiographyultrasonic or surface crack inspection possibly in combination) so that tests offering reliable results can becarried out

11322 Welded nodes in tubular structures

113221 Depending on tube wall thickness and angle of intersection nodes linking relatively small tubeseg in tubular-frame crane jibs may be designed either in the form of fillet welds or of single-bevel welds asin [11424]

113222 The nodes of relatively large tubes where the wall thickness of the branches exceeds about 8mm shall be designed in the form of full-penetration single bevel welds as shown in Figure 11-1 Where thestress is lower single-bevel welds with a backing strip as in [11424] may also be used

113223 The weld configuration chosen and the effective weld thickness shall be taken into account in thedimensioning (especially in the proof of fatigue strength) and shown in detail on the drawings Where proofof fatigue strength is required the quality of surface finish required shall also be specified on the drawings

11323 Transitions between differing dimensions

113231 Differing dimensions shall be made to match gradually by means of gentle transitions Wheregirders or sections have web plates of different heights the chords or bulbs shall be brought to the sameheight by tapering or by slitting and splaying or reducing the height of the web plate The transition lengthshall be three times the difference in height

113232 Where the joint is between plates of differing thicknesses thickness differences of more than 3mm (see Figure 11-2) shall be evened out by bevelling the extending edge with a 13 slope or in accordancewith the notch Thickness differences of less than 3 mm may be evened out within the weld

113233 For connection to plates or other relatively thin-walled elements steel castings and forgingsas shown in Figure 11-3 shall be provided with matching tapered elements or cast or forged-on weldingflanges respectively

11324 Localised closely grouped welds minimum spacing

113241 Local close grouping of welds and short distances between welds shall be avoided Adjacent buttwelds shall be separated by at least

50 mm + 4 times plate thicknessFillet welds shall be separated from each other and from butt welds by at least

30 mm + 2 times plate thickness

113242 The width of plate areas (strips) subject to replacement shall however be at least 300 mm or 10 timesplate thickness whichever is the greater


DNV GL AS

113243 Reinforcing plates welding flanges hubs or similar components welded into plating shall have thefollowing minimum dimensions

Dmin = 170 + 3 (t ndash 10) ge 170 mm

Dmin = minimum diameter of round or length of side of polygonal weld-on parts [mm]t = plate thickness [mm]

The corner radii of polygonal weld-on parts shall be at least 50 mm

Figure 11-1 Single-sided weld connections (tube connections not accessible from inside)

Figure 11-2 Accommodation of different thickness

Figure 11-3 Welding flange on steel castings or forgings


DNV GL AS

11325 Welding cut-outs

113251 Welding holes for (subsequent) butt or fillet welding following the fitting of transverse parts shallbe rounded (minimum radius 25 mm or twice the plate thickness whichever is the greater) and (especiallywhere the loading is mainly dynamic) shall be provided with ldquogentlerdquo run-outs and appropriately notch-freecircumferential welds see Figure 11-4

113252 Where joints are fully welded prior to the fitting of transverse parts no welding holes are neededprovided any weld reinforcement is machined away before fitting

Figure 11-4 Welding cut-outs

11326 Local reinforcements doubling-plates

113261 Where plating is subject to locally increased loading (eg girder or pipe walls) thicker plates shallwherever possible be used rather than doubling-plates As a matter of principle bearing bushes hubs etcshall take the form of thicker welded-in plating regarding this see also [11243]

113262 Where doubling-plates cannot be avoided they shall not be thicker than twice the plate thicknessDoubling-plates wider than about 30 times the doubling-thickness shall be welded to the underlying platingby welding with cut-outs at intervals not exceeding 30 times the thickness of the doubling-plateWhen welding with cut-outs these shall preferably be designed in form of elongated holes lying in thedirection of the principal stress

113263 Doubling-plates shall be welded along their (longitudinal) edges by continuous fillet welds with athickness

a = 03 times thickness t of the doubling-plateAt the ends of doubling plates as shown in Figure 11-5 thickness a along the terminal edges shall be

a = 05 times thickness t of the doubling platethough it shall not exceed the plate thicknessThe weld transition angles between the terminal edge and the plating shall be 45deg or less


DNV GL AS

Figure 11-5 Weldings at the ends of doubling plates

Where proof of fatigue strength is required the configuration of the end of the doubling plate shallcorrespond with the detail category selected

11327 Welding in cold-formed areas

113271 Welding is permitted at and close to structural areas cold-formed from ship structural andcomparable structural steels provided that the minimum bending radii specified in Table 11-1 are adhered-to

Table 11-1 Minimum bending radii

Plate thickness Minimum inner 1 bending radius

up to 4 mm 1 times plate thickness




over 24 mm up to 70 mm 10 times plate thickness

1) Edge bending operations may necessitate a larger bending radius

113272 For steels other than stated in [113271] or other materials if applicable the necessaryminimum bending radius shall in case of doubt be determined by tests

113273 In the case of steels with a minimum nominal upper yield point exceeding 355 Nmm2 and platethicknesses of 30 mm and over where cold-forming with 3 or more permanent elongation has beenperformed proof of adequate toughness after welding is required in the procedure test and by means of in-production tests

11328 Bend reinforcements

113281 Bent structural elements eg the chords of girders where the change of direction means thatforces are generated or shall be transmitted perpendicular to the bend shall be adequately supported at thebending location The conditions set out in [113271] shall be complied with

113282 Where welded joints at bending locations cannot be avoided three-plate welds generally as in[11426] may be used Such connections shall be depicted in detail on the drawings

114 Types of weldsThe chosen type of weld shall be suitable and sufficiently dimensioned or favourably designed to transfer thetype (static dynamic) and magnitude of forces

1141 Butt joints

11411 Depending on plate thickness welding procedure and -position butt welds shall take the form ofsquare single- or double-V welds (X welds) in conformity with the standards (eg EN 12345 EN 22553ISO2553 EN ISO 9692-1 -2 -3 or -4)


DNV GL AS

11412 Where other forms of weld are envisaged these shall be depicted specially in the drawings Weldgeometries for special welding processes (eg submerged-arc single-side and electro-gas or electro-slagwelding) shall have been tested and approved as part of a procedure test

11413 Butt welds shall as a matter of principle be grooved out on the root side and given at least onecapping pass Exceptions to this rule eg in the case of submerged-arc welding or the aforementionedprocesses also require to be tested and approved as part of a procedure testThe theoretical throat shall be the thickness of the plate or where the plates are of differing thicknessthe lesser thickness Where proof of fatigue strength is required the detail category depends on theconfiguration (quality) of the weld

11414 If the above conditions cannot be fulfilled eg where welds are accessible from one side only opensquare-edge joints with back-up bars or permanent machined or integrally cast backing as in Figure 11-6shall be usedThe calculated weld thickness may be taken as 90 of the (lesser) plate thickness t maximum (t-1) mmWhere proof of fatigue strength is required these welds shall be placed in the corresponding detail category

Figure 11-6 Single-side welds with permanent weld pool supports (backings)

1142 Corner- T- and double-T- (cross) welds

11421 Full-penetration corner- T- and double-T- (cross) welds for the full connection to the abuttingplates shall take the form of single- or double-bevel joints with the minimum possible shoulder and anadequate gap as shown in Figure 11-7 The root shall be grooved out and welded from the reverse side

Figure 11-7 Single- and double-bevel welds with full root penetration

The theoretical weld thickness shall be the thickness of the abutting plate Where proof of fatigue strength isrequired the detail category depends on the configuration (quality) of the weld

11422 Corner- T- and double-T- (cross) welds with a defined root defect f as shown in Figure 11-8 shalltake the form of single- or double-bevel welds as described in [11421] with reverse-side welding butwithout grooving-out of the root


DNV GL AS

Figure 11-8 Single- and double-bevel welds with defined incomplete root penetration

The theoretical weld thickness may be taken as the thickness t of the abutting plate minus f being equal to02 t up to a maximum of 3 mm Where proof of fatigue strength is required these welds shall be placed inthe corresponding detail category

11423 Corner- T- and double-T- (cross) welds with an unwelded root face c and a defined incomplete rootpenetration f to be taken into consideration shall take the general form shown in Figure 11-9

Figure 11-9 Single- and double bevel welds with an unwelded root face and a defined incompleteroot penetration

The theoretical weld thickness shall be the thickness t of the abutting plate minus (c + f) f being equal to02 t up to a maximum of 3 mm Where proof of fatigue strength is required these welds shall be placed inthe corresponding detail category

11424 Corner- T- and double-T- (cross) welds accessible from one side only may as shown in Figure11-10 be made either as butt joints with a weld pool support analogous to those described in [11414] oras one-sided single-bevel welds analogous to those in [11422]

Figure 11-10 Single-side welded T-joints

The theoretical weld thickness shall similarly be determined in accordance with [11414] or [11422]Where proof of fatigue strength is required use of these welds shall be avoided if possible


DNV GL AS

11425 In the case of flush corner joints ie where neither of the plates projects joint configurations asshown in Figure 11-11 shall be used with bevelling of the plates shown as upright to avoid the danger oflamellar rupture (stepwise cracking)

Figure 11-11 Flush fitted corner joints

11426 Where in T-joints the main stress acts in the plane of the plates shown in the horizontal position inFigure 11-12 (eg in plating) and the connection of the vertical (edge-on) plates is of secondary importancethen (except in the case of mainly dynamic stresses) three-plate welds as shown in Figure 11-12 may beusedThe theoretical weld thickness of the joint connecting the horizontal plates shall be determined in accordancewith [11413] The required a dimension is determined by the joint connecting the vertical (edge-on)plate and shall where necessary be ascertained by calculation as for fillet welds

Figure 11-12 Three-plate welds

1143 Fillet welds

11431 Fillet welds shall as a matter of principle be made on both sides Exceptions to this rule (eg inthe case of closed box girders and in the case of primary shear stress parallel to the weld) require approvalin every instance The thickness a (the height of the inscribed equilateral triangle) shall be determined bycalculationThe leg length z of a fillet weld see Figure 11-13 shall not be less than 14 times the fillet weld thicknessa


DNV GL AS

11432 The thickness of fillet welds shall not exceed 07 times the lesser thickness of the parts to bewelded (generally the web thickness) The minimum thickness is defined by

amin = [mm] (but not less than 3 mm)

t1 = the lesser plate thickness [mm] (eg the web thickness)t2 = the greater plate thickness [mm] (eg the chord thickness)

11433 The aim with fillet welds shall be to have a flat symmetrical cross-section with good transitionto the base metal Where proof of fatigue strength is required it may be necessary to carry out machining(grinding-out the notch) depending on the detail category The weld shall extend at least to the immediateproximity of the theoretical root point

11434 Where mechanical welding processes are used which produce a deeper penetration going wellbeyond the theoretical root point and capable of being reliably and uniformly maintained under productionconditions it is permissible to take account of the deeper penetration when determining the fillet weld throatThe mathematical dimension

shall be determined by reference to the configuration shown in Figure 11-13 and shall take into accountthe value of min e which shall be established for each welding procedure by a procedure test The weldthickness shall in relation to the theoretical root point not be less than the minimum thickness for filletwelds specified in [11432]

Figure 11-13 Fillet welds with increased penetration

11435 Depending on the welding technique used an increase of the a dimension of up to 1 mm maybe stipulated when laying down welds over production coatings particularly liable to cause porosity Thisparticularly applies when using fillet welds of minimum thickness sizeThe extent of the increase shall be determined on a case to case basis according to the nature andmagnitude of the stress based on the results of the production-coating tests according to RU SHIP Pt2 Thesame applies in turn to welding processes too in which there is a likelihood of insufficient root penetration


DNV GL AS

115 Workmanship and testing of weld jointsWelding workmanship shall comply with RU SHIP Pt2

1151 Weld preparation and assembly

11511 When preparing and assembling structural parts care shall be taken to ensure compliance with theprescribed joint geometry and root face (air) gaps Where the permissible root face gap is slightly exceededit may be reduced by build-up welding at the weld edges Inserts or wires are not allowed to be welded intothe gap

11512 Plates and profiles shall be aligned accurately especially where joints are interrupted by transverseparts The magnitude of the permissible misalignment of plate edges depends on the particular structuralpart the plate thickness and the stress see RU SHIP Pt2

11513 In the welding zone structural parts shall be clean and dry Scale rust slag grease paint (exceptfor production coatings) and dirt shall be removed carefully prior to welding

11514 If plates profiles or structural parts are given a corrosion-inhibiting coating (shop primer) beforewelding this shall not impair the quality of the welds

11515 Only those weldable production coatings shall be applied for which the Societys report of noobjection exists based on a pore formation tendency test

1152 Protection against the weather preheating

11521 The working area of the welder shall be protected in particular for outside work against winddampness and cold In the case of submerged-arc welding special care shall be taken to protect againstdraughts When working outdoors it is recommended in any case to dry heat the weld edges in unfavourableweather conditions

11522 In low temperatures (component temperatures below 5degC) suitable measures shall be taken (egcovering large-area heating preheating in particular when welding at relatively low heat input eg with thinfillet welds or with thick-walled components) to ensure that the welding work can proceed satisfactorily Ifthe temperature drops below -10degC no further welding should be performed if possible

1153 Welding positions and sequence

11531 Welding work shall be performed in the most favourable welding position Welding in restrictedpositions eg positions PE or PD (overhead) shall be restricted to unavoidable cases

11532 Vertical downward welding of fillet welds shall not be applied to lifting appliance componentsand lifting appliances including supporting structure (eg crane columns) even after a successful weldingprocedure test

11533 Obstruction of weld shrinkage shall be minimized by the choice of a suitable construction andwelding sequence


DNV GL AS

1154 Workmanship

11541 The welds shall have sufficient penetration and clean regular weld surfaces with soft transitionsto the base material Excessive overthickness and grooves as well as notches at the edges of plates or cut-outs shall be avoided

11542 Cracked tacks may not be welded over but shall be removed by machining In multi-pass weldingthe slag from preceding passes shall be removed completely Pores visible slag inclusions and cracks maynot be welded over but shall be removed by machining and repaired

1155 Repair of defectsRepair of major defects of workmanship may only be undertaken after agreement with the Society Thisapplies similarly to the repair by welding of worn broken or otherwise damaged parts Prior to repair work onload-bearing structural parts (1st order) a sketch of the repair shall be submitted

1156 PreheatingRegarding the requirement for and amount of preheating several decisive criteria exist eg chemicalcomposition plate thickness two- or three- dimensional heat dissipation environmental or componenttemperature heat input due to welding (energy per unit length) see RU SHIP Pt2

1157 Heat treatment

11571 The nature and scope of any heat treatment which may have to be applied to welded structuralparts depends on their residual stress state (weld geometry and thickness rigidity of part) and thecharacteristics of the material concerned ie its behaviour or any change in characteristics to be expectedwhen subjected to heat treatment Generally it is a matter of stress-relieving or annealing treatment Thesteelmakers directions and recommendations shall be followed

11572 Depending on the type of material concerned flash butt welds shall be subjected to normalising orquenching and tempering treatment

11573 The way in which the mechanical properties of the weld are affected by subsequent heat treatmentis one of the factors to be investigated in the weld-procedure test In addition to this the Society may call forproduction tests

11574 Any non-destructive tests required shall be carried out after heat treatment

1158 Non-destructive tests

11581 The nature and scope of non-destructive tests depends on the importance and loading of the partconcerned (its component class) and on the possible weld defects or effects on the base metal which mayarise from the welding technique position etc

11582 By way of example in Table 11-2 the tests required for the important parts of shipboard liftingappliances and loose gear have been compiled Additionally as a guide requirements imposed on weldedconnections in the form of assessment categories according to EN ISO 5817 have been addedWhere proof of fatigue strength is required the test requirements given in the detail category table usedapply The manufacturing documents (drawings welding diagram test schedule) shall contain for eachstructural component comprehensive information concerning the nature and scope of the tests required


DNV GL AS

11583 Non-destructive tests shall be carried out by suitably qualified personnel

11584 The tests shall be carried out in accordance with accepted practice The results shall be presentedto the Societys surveyor at the latest at the acceptance testing of the components

Table 11-2 Test specifications for welded connections

Test specifications for welded connections

Components 1 1st Order 2nd Order

Notes See Table 13-1 See Table 13-1

Butt welds perpendicular to direction of main stressincluding weld intersectionsRadiographic andor ultra-sonic inspection of 10 of weld lengthin special cases of 100 of weld length Wherenecessary magnetic particle testing

Butt welds perpendicular to direction ofmain stress including weld intersectionsRadiographic andor ultra-sonic inspectionrandomly Where necessary magneticparticle testing

Butt welds parallel to direction of mainstressRadiographic andor ultra-sonic inspectionrandomly In special cases as above Wherenecessary magnetic particle testing

Nature and scope oftests to be applied

Single (HV) or double bevel (DHV-(K)) seams- especially in thicker plates - perpendicularand parallel to the direction of the mainstressUltrasonic and magnetic particle testing ofat least 10 in the case of thicker plates and rigidstructural components as a rule of 100 of theweld length

Other welded connections and componentsas above in cases of doubtRecommended

Magnetic particle testing of single (HV) ordouble bevel (DHV-(K) seams on thick-walled components

Requirements Assessment category B as per ISO 5817 Assessment category C as per ISO 5817

Remarks

mdash With the Societys consent dye penetrant testing may be used instead of magnetic particle testingmdash Deviations from the recommended assessment categories - even in respect of individual criteria - may be agreedmdash As regards ultrasonic tests the assessment criterion will be specified by the Society as part of the process of

approving and authorising testing locations and inspectorsmdash The Societys surveyor retains the right to determine or alter the position of random tests and to increase the scope

of tests particularly if there is an accumulation of defects1) For 3rd order components (see Table 13-1) no tests are prescribed

1159 Production tests

11591 If the manufacturing process or any subsequent (heat) treatment which may be required leadsto the expectation of a substantial change in or indeed deterioration of the properties of the material or thewelded connection the Society may stipulate production tests to prove that the mechanical qualities remainadequate

11592 Production tests during the course of manufacture shall as a matter of principle be performedwhen welding is carried out on cold-formed portions made from materials with a minimum nominalupper yield point of more than 355 Nmm2 with a wall thickness of 30 mm or more and with degrees ofdeformation of 3 permanent elongation ε and over


DNV GL AS

Elongation in the external tensile zone

r = internal bending radiust = plate thickness


1161 Examination of drawingsFor the examination of drawings of steel components the requirements given in Sec13 shall be observed Inaddition to the welding diagrams and test plans stated there the following applies

11611 Details on welded joints in the documents to be examined

116111 In the documents to be examined and to be submitted for approval production details shall beincluded which are relevant to the quality of the welded joint and the examination by the Society Besides thematerials and the weld geometry this requires the following information

mdash weld preparation procedure (mechanical thermal etc)mdash welding method welding positionsmdash welding consumables and auxiliary materialmdash preheating and heat conduction during welding where requiredmdash weld composition and number of layersmdash welding sequence (in special cases)mdash root side grooving (method)mdash possibly finishing (heat) treatmentmdash number and location of production specimens to be welded simultaneously if required

116112 As long as weld preparation and workmanship of the welds (in combination with approved weldingmethods welding consumables and auxiliary materials) comply with the accepted practice of weldingtechnology this standard and other recognized standards the Society may waive a special description ordetails in the test documentation

11612 Description of welded joints

116121 The description of welded joints including the gap and weld geometry shall eg comply with thestandards EN 12345 EN 22553ISO 2553 EN ISO 9692-1 -2 -3 or -4 The designations in the documentsto be examined (drawings etc) shall be well-defined eg by standard symbols

116122 Deviating weld geometries or symbols in the documents to be examined (drawings weldingdiagrams or specifications) shall be presented or commented on in detail and require approval by the Society(eg in connection with the examination of drawings or with a procedure test)

1162 Supervision of constructionRegarding supervision of construction by the Society the requirements given in [133] and the followingrequirements apply


DNV GL AS

11621 Surveillance of production

116211 Steel components shall be surveyed during production with respect to workmanship andcompliance with the approved drawings The start of production shall be indicated in good time to the Societyinspection in charge in order to enable the Societys surveyor to supervise the complete production process

116212 Professional proper and complete execution of the joining processes shall be ensured by means ofthorough controls by the factory

116213 If the manufacturing process or any subsequent (heat) treatment which may be required maylead to a substantial change in or deterioration of the properties of the material or the welded connectionthe Society may stipulate in-production tests to prove that the mechanical qualities remain adequate

1163 Acceptance test

11631 Before delivery of steel components a suitable date for the acceptance test shall be agreed withthe Society inspection in charge

11632 For the acceptance test before delivery the manufacturer shall have ready the followingdocuments

mdash purchase and order documentsmdash workshop drawingsmdash drawings approved by the Society including examination reportsmdash results of internal checksmdash material test certificatesmdash certificates or protocols of welding testsmdash further documents as required

117 Documentation

1171 Marking

11711 Where the Society acceptance test before delivery has not given reason for complaint the steelcomponent shall be stamped as follows

mdash stamp 3 with the month and year of testingmdash the Societys certificate number as per [11721] together with the code letter(s) of the examining

inspection office

11712 Where the steel components are produced in the lifting appliance manufacturers works a specialstamp and certification of these parts after manufacturing will be dispensed with This will be included in theacceptance test before delivery of the assembled lifting appliance

1172 Certification

11721 The Societys surveyor will issue a certificate Form 2092a for each finished and tested steelcomponent This certificate includes the following information

mdash manufacturers namemdash date and reference number of the approved drawingmdash replica of stamp


DNV GL AS

11722 The certificate issued according to [11721] is not part of the lifting appliance documentation onboard


DNV GL AS

SECTION 12 TECHNICAL AND OPERATIONAL SAFETYREQUIREMENTS

121 General

1211 This section contains selected provisions in addition to the previous sections as regards safety of shipboardlifting appliances and the protection of persons based on the following requirements for design fitting andoperation of these devicesFurther requirements or measures shall be taken from the relevant standards and regulations if applicable

1212 A general precondition for the safe operation of shipboard lifting appliances is first of all its dimensioning andits design and equipment in accordance with Sec6 to Sec13 of this standardComplementary details regarding rope drives mechanical parts and electrical equipment are given in Sec8to Sec10

1213 For loose gear the requirements given in this section apply similarly where relevant

122 Design requirements

1221 Shipboard lifting appliances in general12211 Highest boom position

122111 General notesEach boom shall be capable of being lowered in the highest position with or without useful loadCombinations of different influences shall be taken into account

122112 Rope-operated booms1221121 With rope-operated booms the boom weight and the influence of all systems which prevent itremaining in the highest position shall be sufficient to overcome all losses due to friction and turning1221122 To prevent remaining in the highest boom position a restoring device may be provided whichshall be controlled from the crane drivers cabinAlternatively a warning device for the crane driver may be installed which warns of further luffing in duetime This device is only permissible if it is reasonable from a technical and operational point of view

122113 Cylinder-operated boomsWith cylinder-operated booms the cylinder force shall be great enough to comply with the requirementsgiven in [1221121]

12212 Secondary componentsSecondary components and auxiliary structures such as inter alia ladders consoles cable trays shall not ifpossible be welded to highly stressed components Where appropriate a proof of fatigue strength shall befurnished


DNV GL AS

12213 Access to crane driversacute cabins

122131 Crane drivers cabins shall be designed and arranged in such a way and be of such a size thatthey are easily accessible no matter what the position of the crane An accident-proof standing position for asecond person shall be provided within the area of the crane driverrsquos cabin

122132 If there is a danger that the regular access to the driverrsquos cab can be obstructed (eg in case ofan accident fire etc) an independent emergency exit shall be provided

122133 If normal access is impossible when the cabin is occupied a second entrance of sufficient sizewhich may also be the emergency exit shall be provided

122134 Where the floor of the crane cabin is not more than 5 m above the deck it is sufficient if the cabincan be reached without particular danger when the crane is in one position but can be left via an emergencyexit no matter what the position of the crane

12214 Accesses in general

122141 Unobstructed access to all essential components of the lifting appliance shall be ensured formaintenance and repair purposes by means of suitable accesses platforms ladders and standing spaces

122142 The headroom of entrances shall be at least 2 m the clear width at least 06 m The clear heightof the opening may be reduced by a sill up to 06 m high

122143 Ladder rungs and climbing irons shall be of 2020 square steel bar set edgewise with a footstepwidth of at least approx 30 cm From a climbing height of 25 m and above a safety cage or track for safetyharness shall be provided

122144 Ladders1221441 The inclination of ladders measured from the horizontal shall be at least 65deg1221442 Ladder rungs and climbing irons shall be of 2020 (L = 300) or 2222 (300 gt L le 350) squaresteel bar set edgewise with a footstep width of at least 30 cm The horizontal distance from fixed structuresshall be at least 15 cm1221443 The distance of the lowest ladder rung from the deck or platform shall be between 100 mm and400 mm1221444 Climbing irons shall have a uniform distance of 300 mm from each other1221445 The minimum distances and spaces to be kept clear for movement within the reach of a ladder(see also Figure 12-1 and Figure 12-2) are

mdash 750 times 750 mm in front of the climbing irons excluding obstacles extending into this space(in exceptional cases a limit down to 550 times 550 is permissible however in this case obstacles such asbrackets shall be covered in order to prevent injuries)

mdash 150 mm behind the ladder measured from the axis of the climbing ironmdash 75 mm as an access clearance for the hands on each side of the ladder and around vertical hand grips

1221446 A fall arresting device (safety cage or guide rail for a safety harness) shall be provided if

a) the mounting height exceeds 25 m orb) a falling height of more than 30 m is possible


DNV GL AS

Figure 12-1 Minimum clearances and movement space


DNV GL AS

Figure 12-2 Safety cage

1221447 For ladders with a height of more than 3 m or of any length (if a falling height of more than 3m is possible) the following requirements also apply

mdash The lowest safety cage retainer shall not be positioned lower than 22 m above the deck or platformmdash The retainers shall have uniform spacing of not more than 900 mmmdash The safety cage shall at a minimum consist of 5 longitudinal strutsmdash The clearance between climbing iron and rear cage shall be between 550 mm and 750 mm

1221448 The maximum vertical length of a ladder between two platforms is 6 m


DNV GL AS

1221449 The ladder shall stop at intermediate platforms The ladder which arrives ends at the platformand the follow-on ladder is offset (not above the opening in the platform)12214410 The rails of the ladder shall extend past the upper platform by at least 1 m or hand grips shallbe fixed up to this height

122145 Landingsplatforms1221451 Outer edges of platforms or floors shall be provided with a coaming unless people andoritems slipping is prevented by other means1221452 Floors and their coverings respectively shall be skid-proof1221453 Platform openings require a cover if a ladder located above the platform may be adjusted onthe opening (eg if the upper ladder is fastened to rotating crane parts)The cover shall be capable of being held in the open position

122146 Guard rails1221461 The height of guard rails of accesses platforms etc shall be at least 090 m and be providedwith an upper handrail and a rail at mid-height A foot-bar with a minimum height of 010 m shall beprovided1221462 Where guard-rails are used to separate working areas from traffic areas their clearance frommoveable parts shall be at least 010 m

1222 Mobile shipboard lifting appliances12221 General requirements

122211 Rail-mounted cranes and trolleys shall be protected from derailment overturning and dislodgingand against unintentional movement in a seaway and in operation Rail stops as well as warning devices andrail clearers for lifting appliances on deck shall be provided

122212 Cranes and trolleys which can be moved athwartships shall be fitted with a form-locking drive(rack and pinion drive or equivalent) The drive shall be self-locking or fitted with brakes

122213 For cranes and trolleys in engine and pump rooms up to a nominal load of 10 t which can bemoved athwartships the requirement given in [122212] is considered to be complied with if the load canbe safely held also in a seaway by suitable fastening devices (tackles pulleys and the like)

122214 Cranes and trolleys which can be moved fore and aft shall be fitted with a self-locking driveor with brakes For such cranes calculations shall be submitted proving that the cranes are able to moveagainst a 2deg inclination and against a wind load 50 higher than specified in [5331] for operation at seaand with or without load by friction contact

122215 Cranes and trolleys with a nominal load over 10 t which can be moved fore and aft shall befitted with a direct drive as given in [122212] if they shall be employed for working at sea state Thispredominantly includes cranes and trolleys above the main engine

122216 Each crane rail shall be arranged parallel to the design waterline of the ship

122217 Where the operator has to move with the crane or trolley control unit the speed of travel may notexceed 05 ms

12222 Industrial cargo-handling vehiclesFor industrial cargo-handling vehicles the requirements given in [65] apply


DNV GL AS

123 Equipment

1231 Highest boom position

12311 Shipboard lifting appliances whose booms are held by luffing ropes shall be equipped with buffersfor the uppermost position

12312 The requirements given in [12472] shall be observed when designing buffers

1232 Control stands and controls

12321 Control stands and controls shall be designed and located in such a way that the crane driver hasan unobstructed view of the area of operation or at least of the person guiding him

12322 The control stands of cranes for cargo handling shall be closed driver cabins constructed of fire-resistant material with adequate lighting heating and ventilation They shall be fitted with accident-proofwindow panes sun shields window wipers protective grids and with one suitable fire extinguisher

12323 The controls shall be marked to indicate their function Movement of the controls shall beappropriately related to the corresponding crane movements eg

mdash When a vertical lever is pulled towards the operator a horizontal lever is raised or a swivel lever or hand-wheel turned clockwise the load shall rise or the crane move backwards

mdash When a vertical lever is pushed away from the operator a horizontal lever is pushed down or a swivellever or hand-wheel turned anticlockwise the load shall descend or the crane move forwards

mdash As regards the slewing or rotation of cranes the direction of slewing or rotation of the crane shall agreewith the direction or layout of the controls

12324 Additional requirements for the controls and the control mechanism are given in [10621]

1233 Cranes with load radius-dependent nominal loads shall have a load radius diagram in the drivers cabinThe actual load radius shall be continually visible to the driver

1234 Working hours counterCranes belonging to crane group Band C (see [57]) shall be provided with working hours countingmechanisms

1235 LightingFor the main and emergency power lighting of shipboard lifting appliances the requirements given in[10622] apply

1236 Fresh air supplyFor closed control stands sufficient supply of fresh air shall be provided Air inlets shall be arranged in theopen-air and such that no contamination with exhaust gas dust or fueloil mist may occur


DNV GL AS

1237 Protection and precautions against fire and explosionNecessary protection and precautions against fires and explosions shall be considered The number capacityand location of fire extinguishers shall be adequate for the type of crane and its intended service

124 Safety devices

1241 Overload protection12411 Load limit

124111 Lifting appliances shall have overload protection devices These shall be activated if the responseof the load being raised or lowered exceeds a pre-determined amount which shall not be greater than theeffect of a static load equal to the SWL times the hoist load coefficient for which the lifting appliance hasbeen designed

124112 Where lifting appliances have variable nominal loads the overload protection device shall adjustautomatically to the actual load radius

124113 For rope and chain hoists manufactured by series production the manufacturers settings andtolerances apply see [62311]

12412 Load moment limitation

124121 Where lifting appliances have variable nominal loads a load moment limitation device is alsorequired in addition to the overload protection device

124122 Devices for limitation of the load moments shall act directly on the luffing andor telescope drivesOn hydraulic systems suitable pressure limitation devices are permissible

12413 Load reduction after an overloadAfter the overload protection devices are activated the load or load moment reducing motions of the liftingappliance and its mobile components shall still be possible

1242 Motion limiter12421 General requirements

124211 The end positions of all motions which can be performed by lifting appliances or their mobilecomponents shall be limited in an appropriate and safe way For rotary motions this is only applicable if theyare restricted by local circumstances

124212 For conventional derrick boom systems exceptions from the requirements given in [124211]can be permitted

124213 It shall not be possible for end positions to be overridden Exceptions eg for maintenance andboom stowage require written approval by the Society

124214 If required motion limiters shall also have an influence on other motions in order to avoiddamage This may eg be required for the highest hook position of booms with luffing ropes see also[12472]


DNV GL AS

12422 Motion limitation by limit switches

124221 Limit switches shall be designed and positioned in such a way that their efficiency is not affectedby the weather or by dirt accumulation Movement in the opposite direction shall be possible after they areactivated Proximity switches shall preferably be used

124222 Limit switches shall be located and adjusted in such a way that no damage can occur even if theyare approached at maximum speed and with full nominal load If necessary pre-limit switches shall be used

124223 Regarding additional requirements for limit switches see [1052]

12423 Motion limitation by design measures

124231 Limit switches1242311 For hydraulically operated lifting appliances with low operating speeds and nominal loads up to1000 kg limit stops with damping if required may be permitted as a motion limitation1242312 For rope and chain hoists from series-production the requirements given in [62322] apply

12424 Runway limitFor limit stops of movable cranes the provisions in [5342] are applicable

1243 Emergency switcheskeys

12431 On control stands inside cabins or at manual controls an emergency switch or emergency cut-outwith mechanical locking device shall be provided

12432 The emergency shut-down shall cut off the power supply and all motions In the case of hydraulicdrives the emergency shut-down shall also act on the drive of the hydraulic pumpReturn to service shall be solely from the zero position of the respective controls or operating instruments

12433 Emergency switcheskeys shall meet the requirements given in EN 418 and continue to function inthe event of any failure of the control system

1244 Slack rope limiter

12441 In particular cases a slack rope limiter may be required eg with fast hoisting speeds withoutautomatic creep hoist multiple coils or if required for a special mode of operation

12442 For shipboard lifting appliances and floating cranes operating at sea slack rope limiters in the liftingand luffing system as well as a slack rope indication for the crane driver are requiredThe slack rope limitation system of shipboard cargo cranes operating at sea shall stop the winch(es)automatically

1245 Secondary brake for lifting appliancesLifting appliances used for the conveyance of persons or personnel shall be equipped with a secondary brakeat the hoist and luffing winch The requirements given in [425] and [9537] apply


DNV GL AS

1246 Alarm devices

12461 Outside the driverrsquos cabin on cranes used for the handling of cargo a signal horn shall be providedby which the crane driver can raise an acoustic signal which can definitely be heard in the working area ofthe crane

12462 Mobile deck cranes shall give an optical and acoustic alarm while moving

1247 Strain of shipboard lifting appliances due to safety devices

12471 The movements and dynamic loads occurring following the response of safety devices shall be keptto a minimum if possible

12472 Motion limiters for the highest boom position shall be designed in such a way that after depositingthe load no damage may occur from the unloaded luffing ropes

125 Passive protective measures

1251 Safety distances

12511 In accessible areas the distance between fixed parts of the ship and moving parts of the liftingappliance shall be at least 050 m in all directions and where passageways adjoin at least 060 mIf at certain points a distance of 050 m cannot be provided the area concerned shall be identified withprominent black and yellow paintwork Warning notices shall be fitted

12512 A distance of at least 050 m shall be provided between the lower edge of the boom in its lowestworking position and fixed parts of the ship

1252 Safety of access and transport

12521 Working passages operating platforms stairs and other areas accessible during operation shall besecured by railings

12522 All lifting appliances shall be fitted with a signboard forbidding access or ascent by unauthorizedpersons

12523 In utility spaces (on board ships and in cranes) adequately-dimensioned securing facilities for pull-lift hoists or holding devices shall be fitted at suitable points

12524 To permit load tests on shipboard lifting appliances inside utility spaces eye plates shall beprovided at suitable points see [6235]


12531 For general requirements regarding corrosion protection the provisions of [11235] apply for steelcomponents and [8212] for wire ropes

12532 Components which are employed for hoisting services under water eg loose gear shall bedesigned in such a way that as far as possible no seawater can ingress


DNV GL AS

126 Stowage and lashing devices


12611 It shall be possible for all wheeled shipboard lifting appliances and mobile components of shipboardlifting appliances to be positioned or where required supported for sea use as well as to be fastenedsecurely by suitable devices or guys see [4253]

12612 Supporting or fastening devices shall be designed in such a way that inadmissible forces or loadsmay not be transmitted to the lifting appliance or the components thereof caused by deformations of theshiprsquos hull in a seaway

1262 Wheeled lifting appliances

12621 Wheeled lifting appliances shall be located in stowage positions which as far as possible areexpected to suffer the least loads in a seaway

12622 For free-travelling loading gear such as eg industrial cargo-handling vehicles suitable stowagespaces and lashing eyes or other suitable devices shall be provided

1263 Revolving cranes

12631 Revolving cranes with booms or projecting machinery rooms require supporting structures for thesecomponents and a special blocking device to relieve the slewing gear

12632 Where booms or projecting machinery rooms with an out of operation status shall not be stowedor supported written approval by the Society is required

12633 Booms with luffing ropes shall be guyed downwards either hanging free or supported Where thebrakes of the lifting appliance are designed for it this requirement can be complied with by proper fasteningof the cargo hook and prestressing of the hoisting ropes Prestressing shall be specified by the manufacturerSupported booms may also be fastened properly to the boom support see [5722]For booms with luffing cylinders the guy or fastening may be dispensed with provided that a correspondingapproval is at hand

12634 Where not serving to guy the boom cargo hooks shall be stowed in special devices at the boom oron deck Grabs or other large andor heavy loose gear shall be stowed on deck

1264 Design and dimensioning

12641 Boom supports supporting stowage and lashing devices shall be designed and dimensioned withthe same diligence and to the same criteria which apply to lifting appliances

12642 Stowage and lashing devices shall be dimensioned like lifting appliances out of operation accordingto [56]


DNV GL AS

127 Operational requirements

1271 Shipboard lifting appliances in general12711 Marking of hoisting capacity

127111 All lifting appliances shall be marked permanently and prominently with the nominal load SWLand the corresponding load radiusIn the case of load-radius dependent nominal loads lifting appliances shall be marked in several placesDetailed information regarding marking of shipboard lifting appliances is given in [1325]

127112 All loose gear shall be marked permanently and prominently with the nominal load SWL and thedead load WT the latter if WT ge 100 kgDetailed information regarding marking of loose gear is given in [743]

12712 Ship stability

127121 In the absence of any special measures the shiprsquos stability alone shall suffice to ensuresimultaneous operation of all shipboard lifting appliances for transhipment handling or transport of cargounder all operational conditions of the shipIn doing so the inclinations andor motions of the ship which are the basis for dimensioning the liftingappliance shall not be exceeded

127122 Special measures as per [127121] can be eg

mdash operational restrictionsmdash ballasting by water or weightsmdash supporting the ship ashoremdash utilization of stabilizing pontoons

Special measures always require instructions recorded in writing and supervisory personnel and whererequired also additional supervising devices These requirements also apply to fully automated operation

127123 The influence of loading gear on the shiprsquos stability shall be verified by calculation Thesecalculations shall be included in the stability documentation of the ship

12713 Failure of the drive power

127131 A design shall be employed auxiliary means shall be available and measures shall be taken to setdown suspended loads as safely as possible in the event of a failure of the drive powerMobile lifting appliances andor mobile lifting appliance components may for this purpose possibly betransferred into a more favourable load position

127132 If no other lifting appliances are available the follow-ing auxiliary meansmeasures may eg beemployed

mdash plug-on auxiliary drivesmanual pumpsmdash eye plates attached to the loading gear for use by pull-lift hoists for small loadsmdash mechanical ventilation of brakes or opening of valves

Mechanical ventilation of brakes or opening of valves is only permissible if the design conditions regardingintake of the released energy allow for it Required waiting periods for cooling-down shall be observed


DNV GL AS

127133 Shipboard lifting appliances used for the conveyance of persons shall be equipped with suitablerescue equipment Descender devices may be employed for the descent from work-baskets

12714 Conveyance of personsShipboard lifting appliances used for the conveyance of persons shall comply with the requirements given in[425] with regard to dimensioning control and operationPersons may only be transported at daylight and under environmental conditions (windseaway) which arecon-sidered to be acceptable by the supervisor in charge

12715 Communication

127151 Crane drivers shall have an unobstructed view of the load and the working area under all workingconditions or else personnel guiding them see also [12321]

127152 If necessary equipment shall be provided or measures taken which allow safe transmittance ofinstructions from the guiding person(s) to the crane driver or the person handling the crane

1272 Wheeled lifting appliancesFor wheeled lifting appliances the operational requirements given in [1222] [12462] and [1251] apply


12731 Where pontoons carrying floating cranes under load are operated in calm water a safety distance ofat least 050 m shall be maintained between the deck edge at the lowest corner and the surface of the waterWhen working in unprotected waters a safety distance of at least 100 m shall be maintained

12732 The transport of loads suspended from the crane hook across unprotected waters is subject in eachcase to approval by the Society who may for this purpose issue a Conveyance Certificate if necessary

12733 In the event of the floating structure being grounded the cranes located on it may only beoperated if the structure is designed for that situation

1274 Responsibility of the ships management

12741 Special working conditions operational restrictions release and safety measures shall be recordedin writing and included with the corresponding lifting appliance documentation

12742 Maintenance and control measures performed by the ships management andor external personnelshall be confirmed properly in the lifting appliance documentation or added to itIn the Societys register book for lifting appliances Form CG1 Part 4 is provided for entries of this kind see[137]

12743 If the limit values for wind ship inclination ship motion or temperature specified in [424] arereached lifting appliances shall be put out of operation and where required be stowed in a special way andor be lashed for sea see [126]Deviating limit values may be specified for shipboard lifting appliances operating in a seaway or at lowtemperatures


DNV GL AS

SECTION 13 TESTING AND EXAMINATION OF SHIPBOARD LIFTINGAPPLIANCES

131 General

1311 Description of content

13111 Subsections [132] to [135] contain requirements for testing examination marking andcertification of shipboard lifting appliances used for cargo handlingThese provisions apply analogously to shipboard lifting appliances not handling cargo which are onlyexpressly mentioned if required

13112 The requirements given in [136] apply for the evaluation and treatment of worn-out or damagedlifting appliance components

13113 The lifting appliance documentation described in [137] includes the following items

mdash types and systems of certificationmdash compilation of test certificates in register books (certification of lifting appliances)mdash confirmation of investigations inspections by the ships management replacement of components as well

as repair and maintenance activitiesmdash rigging plansmdash operating and maintenance instructions

1312 Supplementary requirementsSupplementarydeviating requirements apply to the following lifting appliances equipment and means oftransport

13121 Lifting appliances

mdash rope and chain hoists ([62])mdash ramps and car decks ([63])mdash lifting appliances for research work ([64])mdash industrial cargo-handling vehicles ([65])

13122 Equipment

mdash interchangeable components (Sec7)mdash wire and fibre ropes (Sec8)mdash mechanical parts (Sec9)mdash electrical equipment (Sec10)

13123 Means of transport

mdash loose gear (Sec7)mdash shipborne working baskets ([661])mdash landing booms ([653])


DNV GL AS

1313 DefinitionsIn addition to [115] the following definitions apply

13131 Tests

131311 Function testThe designation function test is applied to testing of all possible movements or functions as well as tocontrol limiting and safety equipmentThis test shall generally be carried out with available weightsTo test and if applicable to adjust load monitoring equipment calibrated weights or if permitted calibratedforce measuring devices shall be made available

131312 Load testThe designation load test is given to the test with the prescribed test load LPdyn or LPstatThe purpose of the load test is to prove adequate strength safety against hidden defects and - if applicable -adequate safety against overturning

13132 Examination

131321 Thorough examinationA thorough examination means a detailed visual examination supplemented if necessary by other suitablemeans or measures in order to arrive at a reliable conclusion as to safetyIf deemed necessary by the Societys surveyor parts of the interchangeable components of the loose gear orof the lifting appliance shall be dismounted and where required dismantled

131322 InspectionThe term inspection means a visual inspection whereby - as far as is possible by this means - it shall bedetermined whether continued use can safely be permitted

132 Supervision of constructionIn addition to the following provisions the general requirements given in Sec1 and for steel constructionthe requirements given in [1162] shall be observed

1321 General

13211 Supervision of construction is required in principle The Society may however dispense with itfor lifting appliances manufactured in series which is not used for cargo handling and which fulfils therequirements for omitting examination of drawings see [132] In this case manufacturerrsquos test reportsmay be accepted deviating from the certificates stated in [13271]

13212 Commencement of construction of a lifting appliance shall be advised to the Society in sufficienttime for the Societys surveyor to attend the construction process from the very beginning

13213 The basis for the supervision of construction at the manufacturer of the lifting appliance is theapproved documentation according to Sec2 plus if applicable further documentation certificates reportsand information from the manufacturer which the Societys surveyor needs for assessment of the parts to beexamined

13214 Regarding supervision of construction and lifting appliance documentation subcontracting firmsshall provide certificates and test reports in the scope specified in Sec6 to Sec10


DNV GL AS

1322 Participation by manufacturers

13221 As far as necessary and advisable the works shall check all components during and aftermanufacture for completeness dimensional accuracy and proper workmanship

13222 Following checking and if required repair by the works the components shall be presented to theSocietys surveyor for inspection during appropriate phases of construction normally in easily accessible andunpainted conditionCertificates for components and equipment delivered by subcontractors shall be submitted

13223 The Societys surveyor may reject components not adequately pre-checked and stipulate that theybe presented again following checking by the works and if required repair

13224 Components to be tested shall be indicated for the Societys inspection in good time forexamination

13225 In order to enable the Societys surveyor to perform his duties he shall be given access to theworkshops in which components for testing are manufactured and assembled Manufacturers shall makeavailable to the surveyor the personnel and material support required to carry out the prescribed tests


13231 The Societys surveyor examines the components constructed at the manufacturers or suppliedwith regard to condition marking and certification He supervises the assembly of the lifting appliance andexamines workmanship and agreement with approved documents and witnesses the test runs and functionaltests as appropriate or agreed

13232 Testing of materials for the manufacture shall be proven to the Societys surveyor in accordancewith the Societys rules for materialsThe certificatesreports for the materials used as well as proofs on welding and non-destructive materialtests shall be submitted

13233 Components which are not type-tested but subject to tests and examination shall as far aspossible be tested at the manufacturers test plant in the presence of the Societys surveyor in an agreedscope or as prescribed by this standardRegarding series production instead of the prescribed tests other testing methods can be agreed with theSociety provided that they are accepted to be equivalent

13234 Where machines devices or electrical equipment are provided for the intended purpose for the firsttime the Society may demand a type-test

1324 Acceptance testing13241 General notes

132411 Shipboard lifting appliances assembled ready for operation or completely equipped assemblygroups shall be presented to the Societys surveyor before they leave the manufacturers works

132412 After completion of agreed test runs or tests lifting appliances or lifting appliance assemblygroups shall be subjected to a thorough examination The testing methods applied are at the discretion of theSocietys surveyor Following tests on the test plant lubricating and hydraulic oil filters shall be checked forimpurity


DNV GL AS

13242 Tests and examinations to be carried out

132421 General test and examination

mdash checking of documentationmdash examination in respect of workmanship compliance with the approved documents and for completenessmdash checking of safety clearances and passive protection measuresmdash examination of accesses ladders rails and platformsmdash examination of the cabin or the control stand and the control equipmentmdash examination of the manufacturers plate on which at a minimum shall be permanently indicated

mdash manufacturers namemdash year of constructionmdash serial numbermdash where applicable type designationmdash nominal load(s) and load radius (radii)

mdash examination of marking see [1325]

mdash additional tests andor examinations as required

132422 Test run1324221 Newly designed lifting appliances shall be test-run in the presence of the Societys surveyoraccording to a programme approved by the Society If possible this shall take place at the manufacturersbut with the Societys consent it may also take place elsewhere or at the place of operation1324222 Shipboard lifting appliances subject to special operating conditions shall undergo test runsunder these conditions At least one of every different type of lifting appliance shall be tested in this wayThis for instance means that the test run shall be performed with the ship also at the stipulated inclination1324223 A test run may cover the following insofar as applicable

mdash checking the interaction of all movable parts and functionsmdash function test under available loadmdash brake test with dynamic test load according to Table 13-2 by releasing the operators control 3

mdash emergency brake test with dynamic test load according to Table 13-2 (see also [133324]) 3

mdash checking the emergency load release devicemdash endurance tests on all power units under nominal load with heating measurementmdash noise measurement (also in the cabin)mdash measurement of power consumption and contractually agreed speeds under nominal loadmdash additional measurements including electrical ones if necessarymdash checking and adjustment of all valves and control equipmentmdash pressure testsmdash testing and adjustment of all safety devices and limit stopsmdash testing of lighting ventilation intercom etcmdash testing of fire protection systemmdash further tests as required

1324224 Easing of testing requirements shall be agreed with the Society

132423 Proof of stability against overturningFor the proof of stability against overturning for wheeled lifting appliances the requirements given in[4522] and [6512] apply

3 Brake tests with test load shall be restricted to the required number Emergency tests shall as far aspossible be performed only once


DNV GL AS

1325 Marking of the lifting appliance13251 Lifting appliance number

132511 The sequential numbering of shipboard lifting appliances shall agree with the details in thecertificates and rigging plans

132512 The following rule for numbering shall be applied

mdash first all lifting appliances for cargo handling starting from the fore and arranged in pairs progressing fromport to starboard starting on deck then below deck

mdash next all lifting appliances needed for operating the ship but none of the gear exclusively for launching life-saving equipment Here also starting on deck then below deck

132513 The number of the lifting appliance shall be preceded by Nr or also No

13252 Nominal load(s)

132521 The nominal load(s) of lifting appliances for cargo handling shall be indicated in metric tonnes ton other lifting appliances especially with lower nominal loads the indication may also be in kilograms kgThe nominal load(s) of lifting appliances shall be preceded by the letters SWL where applicable with thefollowing additions

mdash SWL (P) for pairs of lifting appliancesmdash SWL (G) for lifting appliances with grabsmdash SWL (M) for conveyance of persons

Table 13-1 Examples of markings

Item No onboard the ship Nominal load Load radius Lifting appliance type Meaning of the marking

Lifting appliance with boom

No 3 SWL 40 t 24 ndash 32 m In the indicated area of load radiusloads up to 40 t may be transported

No 2

SWL 250 t

SWL 120 t

SWL 60 t

35 ndash 12 m

35 ndash 255 m

35 ndash 34 m

Crane with 3 load steps Theload radius limits of the allocatednominal loads shall not be exceeded1)

No 4SWL (G) 264 t

SWL 30 t

28 ndash 28 m

28 ndash 28 m

revolving cranes

In the indicated area of loadradius loads up to 264 t can betransported during grab operationup to 30 t in general cargooperation 2)

Nos 2 + 3 SWL (P) 60 t 26 ndash 31 mIn the indicated area of load radiusloads up to 60 t may be transportedby 2 cranes slewing jointly

No 1 SWL 50 t minusgantry cranewith foldabletrolley girders

In the whole operating range of thegantry crane and the trolley loadsup to 50 t may be transported

No 2SWL 50 t

SWL 186 t

36 ndash 14 m

36 ndash 40 mrevolving crane Crane with variable load range 3)


DNV GL AS


SWL 5 t 44 ndash 42 m Marking for the auxiliary hoist

Loading gear without boom

No 10 SWL 16 t minus bridge cranelifting platform Nominal load of the lifting appliance

No 18 SWL 3 ndash 6 t minus rope hoist

Where the hoisting rope has a singlereeve loads up to 3 t may be liftedup to 6 t in the case of double reeve4)

1) In the crane drivers cabin a load radius diagram shall be visibly displayed2) The difference between SWL (G) and SWL results from the different hoist load coefficients see Table 5-2

The nominal load SWL (G) includes the dead load of the grab As an example a grab may be marked as follows

SWL 24 t underneath WT 24 t3) Information about the curve-type variation of the nominal loads can be taken from the load radius diagram

displayed in the crane driveracutes cabin see Figure 5-44) The types of reeve shall be marked properly on the lifting appliance In the case of more than double reeve an

operating instruction is required

13253 Load radius (radii)

132531 The load radius (radii) of lifting appliances is (are) to be indicated in metres ldquomldquo When variablethe minimum and the maximum value each

132532 Gantry and bridge cranes with trolleys are not given a load radius indication

13254 Details of execution

132541 The marking giving details of the nominal load shall be in writing at least 80 mm high and thatregarding lifting appliance number or boom inclination at least 50 mm high

132542 This marking shall be permanently applied eg by means of metal plates or by tracing thecontour with a centre-punch or by means of welding spotsGlued-on foils are permitted only for lifting appliances under deck

132543 The marking for the nominal load and if applicable the load radius shall be located clearly apartfrom the lifting appliance number

13255 Location

132551 The marking shall be applied at a clearly visible location with jib cranes at both sides with gantrycranes at the fore and aft side of the gantry relative to the longitudinal direction of the ship

132552 In the case of lifting appliances which can be combined in pairs additional marking shall beapplied at a suitable location for the combined loadOn slewing cranes with crane booms arranged on a common crane column this marking shall be applied atthe fore and aft parts of the column relative to the longitudinal direction of the ship


DNV GL AS

13256 Examples of marking

132561 Marking is part of the safety measures for the operation of lifting appliances and therefore subjectto examination see [1341]Where variable equipment and reeve options exist operating instructions are required

132562 In Table 13-1 some typical marking examples are listed including explanationsSpecial marking requires agreement with the Society

1326 Stamping of lifting appliances

13261 Prior to the Societys issuance of the test certificate as per [13271] the lifting appliance shall bestamped as follows

mdash the certificate number with the distinguishing letters of the Societymdash the stamp with month and year of test

13262 An additional stamp covering the nominal load is not applied until after the load test has beencarried out

13263 Cranes shall be stamped at the bottom end of the left-hand jib spar next to the point where it joinsthe crane houseLifting appliance assembly groups and lifting appliances other than cranes shall be stamped in a prominentposition

1327 Certification of supervision of construction

13271 For all shipboard lifting appliances completed and tested a test certificate on Form 2092a is issuedby the Societys surveyorWhere lifting appliances assembly groups are manufactured by subcontractors each assembly group receivesits own test certificate of Form 2092aWhere interchangeable components and loose gear are already a part of the lifting appliance during thesupervision of construction test certificates and examination certificates of form CG3 shall be providedFor wire ropes which are already part of the lifting appliance at the supervision of construction testcertificates and examination certificates of form CG4shall be providedWhere winches are already a part of the lifting appliance during the supervision of construction testcertificates and examination certificates of form 2092a shall be providedWhere luffing and slewing cylinders are already a part of the lifting appliance during the supervision ofconstruction test certificates and examination certificates of form 2092a shall be providedThis paragraph does not apply to chain and rope hoists manufactured in series production

13272 Apart from explanatory notes concerning the acceptance procedures the test certificate as per[13271] may contain notes regarding other certificates (eg CG3 CG4 2092a) protocols etc such aseg the following details

mdash manufacturers namemdash type designation and production numbermdash nominal load(s) and if applicable load radius (radii)mdash date and the Societys reference number of the plan approvalmdash associated ship (yard no or DNV GL Ship ID No)mdash stamp


DNV GL AS

133 Initial test and examination

1331 General notes

13311 Prior to commissioning an initial test and examination within the scope described in [1332] to[1332] at the place of operation is requiredThe sequence of steps for the test and examination is as deemed necessary by the Societys surveyor whoalso decides the scope of his examination

13312 During practical testing of lifting appliances dependent on an external power supply care shall betaken to ensure that the test is carried out using the type of power supply envisaged from the ships mainWhere ships are fitted for shoreside power supply shore and ship power shall be compatible

13313 The certificates and rigging plans stated in [133412] shall be presented as proof of supervisionof construction and as an integral part of the lifting appliance documentation

1332 Function test

13321 This test serves to provide proof of the good working order of all components installed systemsand safety devices The test procedure is at the Societys surveyors discretion

13322 In the case of permanently installed lifting appliances the function test amongst other thingsserves to verify whether parts of the ships structure or the ships equipment restrict the working range orimpede the working process

13323 The function test to be carried out for the Societys surveyor does not normally serve to checkwhether all possible operations wanted by the operator can be effected Proving this is the responsibility ofthe manufacturer or supplier

13324 With the exception of the test on the overload protection devices the function test may be carriedout with any given load see also [131311]

13325 A function test using a test load requires the manufacturerrsquos consent

1333 Load test13331 General requirements

133311 All shipboard lifting appliances shall undergo a load test with weights prior to being put intoservice The test shall be carried out at the place of operation in order that their respective foundations ordriveways be included in the test

133312 In the case of lifting appliances below deck which is difficult to access load tests may alternativelybe conducted using approved load measuring devices with a tolerance limit of le 25

133313 Lifting appliances shall be subjected to a dynamic load testThe size of the test load shall be taken from Table 13-2


DNV GL AS

Table 13-2 Dynamic test loads for shipboard lifting appliances

Nominal loads (LNe) Test loads (LPdyn) 1

up to 20 t20 t to 50 t

over 50 t

SWL + 25SWL + 5 t

SWL + 101 If applicable to be multiplied with fd according to [7334]

13332 Load test performanceFor the dynamic load test to be performed for the Societys surveyor the test load shall be lifted slowly andif possible also slewed and luffed In detail the following applies

133321 For lifting appliances generally the test load shall be lowered rapidly and braked in variouspositions andor settings Braking shall be effected by releasing the control levers

133322 Cranes under test load shall run the full travelling distance or at maximum load radius slowlycover the full swinging or slewing range Additionally the minimum load radius shall be tested and in thecase of cranes with radius dependent nominal loads also an intermediate value

133323 Regarding crane columns and their integration into the ships hull as well as lifting appliancefoundations in general tests according to [133321] are required in longitudinal and transverse directionsof the ship ie to fore and aft and to port and starboard each

133324 For lifting appliances used for cargo handling one emergency brake test with the test load byoperating the emergency switch or button shall be carried out either at the manufacturers or at the place ofoperation

133325 When carrying out the load test care shall be taken to ensure that all movable parts are able tooperate freely in all the lifting appliance andor derrick booms positions all ropes are unobstructed by anyother parts and the ropes can wind satisfactorily onto the winch drums

133326 In the case of ramps the test load arrangement shall conform to the intended operating mode

13333 Requirements for hoisting winches

133331 If the pull of the hoisting-winch is insufficient to lift the test load a second winch or other liftingappliance may be brought in to assist with the hoist Braking and holding the test load however shall beaccomplished using solely the winch belonging to the lifting appliance

133332 Where hoisting-winches have not lifted the test load by themselves proof shall be obtained bytesting that with the maximum number of layers of rope on the winch drum the nominal load is hoistedsatisfactorily by the winches

133333 The ability of the winch to hold the test load with the drive to the winch switched off shall beproved In doing so no slip shall occur with the exception of hydraulic winches without standstill brakes see[136824]

133334 Hydraulic cranesIf hydraulic cranes are unable to lift a test load 25 greater than the nominal load because of the pressurelimit lifting the maximum possible load is sufficient This shall however exceed the nominal load by at least10


DNV GL AS

1334 Examination13341 Documentation check

133411 Priority shall be given to checking if the examination of drawings for lifting appliances cranecolumns boom supports and lashing equipment foundations runways and all supporting structures has beenconcluded successfully and if all structural modifications or changes possibly resulting therefrom have beencarried out

133412 Supervision of construction shall be documented by test certificates The lifting appliancedocumentation remaining onboard shall include

mdash rigging plansmdash test certificates for interchangeable components and loose gearmdash test certificates for ropes

133413 Regarding the certificates stated in [133412] their correct correlation to the certified structuralparts or components shall be checked by comparing the stamping andor properties of these partsThe certificates shall be checked with respect to correctness in form and content

13342 General visual inspectionThe general visual inspection may eg refer to the following checks

mdash general condition completeness and correct riggingmdash assembly interfaces between components constructed on site and components suppliedmdash undisturbed power transmission through transversely arranged plates such as deck plates (Where

required this shall be checked by means of drilling holes which shall be welded up after the check)mdash inscription of number SWL and where required load radiusmdash warning and indication signboards as well as warning paintwork where requiredmdash accesses to lifting appliances and to control standsmdash accesses to driver cabins and working and control platforms inside and outside the lifting appliance and to

boom supportsmdash emergency descentsmdash condition and equipping of control stands and driver cabinsmdash working area of the lifting appliancemdash range(s) of sight for the operator from inside the driver cabin

13343 Examination after the load testAfter the load test the load-bearing components of lifting appliance shall undergo a visual examinationThis examination shall if possible exclude the formation of possibly permanent deformations or cracks atforce application points or at special design details

1335 Stamping

13351 If the initial tests and examinations have not given rise to any objections the lifting appliance shallbe stamped before the relevant certificates are issued

13352 Cranes with boom shall be stamped at the bottom end of the right-hand jib member and next tothe point where that member is connected to the crane house and in a prominent position on all other liftingappliances


DNV GL AS

13353 The stamp shall contain the following information

mdash shipboard number of the lifting appliancemdash stamp with the month and year of testmdash nominal load of the lifting appliance in [t] or where required in [kg] and the permissible minimum and

maximum crane load radius in [m] Where the nominal load varies with the load radius the nominal loadand the corresponding load radius shall be stated for the maximum and minimum values

mdash certificate number and distinguishing letters of the Society

1336 Certification of the initial tests and examinations

13361 Following performance of the tests and examinations and stamping the Societys surveyor issuesthe certificate Form CG2 for load-tested lifting appliances handling cargo and OLA101 for load tested liftingappliances not handling cargo

13362 The tests and examinations of the lifting appliance are confirmed by the Societys surveyor in aregister book of Form CG1 to which the certificate and the survey report are added

13363 The certification and documentation system for shipboard lifting appliances is described in [137]

134 Periodic tests and examinations

1341 General notes

13411 Shipboard lifting appliances subject to periodic supervision by the Society shall be examined atregular intervals by the Societys surveyor and subjected to load tests in his presence

13412 The intervals between examinations and between the load tests described below are customaryinternationally Deviating national requirements shall be taken into account if applicable

13413 In cases where a lifting appliance dependent on an external power supply is tested therequirements given in [13312] apply

1342 Due dates13421 Examinations

134211 Lifting appliances and loose gear shall be examined annually by the Societys surveyor unlessother intervals are required by national regulationsThe operator is as a matter of principle obliged to give the Society due notice of the examination

134212 The following examinations vary depending on type and scope

mdash annual examinations see [1343]mdash five-yearly examinations see [1344]

13422 Load tests

134221 No later than five years after the load test a further load test is required for shipboard liftingappliances to be performed in the presence of the Societys surveyorThe operator is as a matter of principle obliged to give the Society due notice of the load testA regular recurrent load test of loose gear is not required internationally by ILO


DNV GL AS

134222 For practical reasons load tests shall coincide if possible with the five-yearly examination

13423 Exceeding the due date

134231 In the case of shipboard lifting appliances subject to the regulations of ILO the intervals of oneand five years regarding examinations and load tests shall not be exceededThis applies on the analogy to recurrent thorough examinations of loose gear

134232 In the case of lifting appliances not subject to the ILO regulations the interval stated in[134231] may be exceeded by up to three months when admitted by the Flag State Administration Thisapplies also to related loose gearThis does not however postpone the due date of the next examination The same applies inversely to testsperformed before the due date

134233 Where the intervals stated in [134231] and [134232] are exceeded the validity of entrieson examinations performed and the validity of test certificates expires in the register bookIn the case of classified shipboard lifting appliances the respective class notation is suspended once the fiveyear interval has been exceeded by more than three months

1343 Annual examinationsThe purpose of annual examinations shall confirm technical safety of operation within the periods of five-yearly examinations

13431 Scope of examinations

134311 The scope of examinations depends on age condition and frequency of use of lifting appliancesNormally lifting appliances need not be unrigged and dis-mantled for the performance of yearlyexaminations

134312 Essentially the scope of examination comprises

mdash checking documentation and certificates for completeness and validity and with reference to maintenanceand inspection measures arranged or performed by the shiprsquos management

mdash checking for completeness and correct rigging or reeving respectively using the rigging plansmdash checking for damage wear deformation corrosion soiling oil leakage etcmdash checking for proper markingmdash function test using available loadmdash random examination of the interchangeable components and correlation to the relevant certificates based

on the stamps appliedmdash verification of newly-fitted partsmdash recording the examination carried out in the register book or where required in a corresponding

certificatemdash preparation of a survey report

134313 The list in [134312] is by way of an example The actual scope of tests and examinations isat the discretion of the Societys surveyor whereby negative findings may require further examinations ormeasures see [13442]

13432 Dealing with components

134321 Use of steels liable to age is not permitted as a matter of principle so that heat treatment ofcomponents at regular intervals is not required


DNV GL AS

134322 Components which do not comply with these rules or which are worn to the permitted limits shallbe replaced by new ones with the prescribed dimensions

134323 Any parts renewed since the last examination shall be submitted to the Societys surveyortogether with the certificates required

1344 Five-yearly examinations13441 General notes

134411 The purpose of five-yearly tests and examinations shall confirm or generate a solid technical basisfor the upcoming annual examinations

134412 Five-yearly examinations and load tests shall be performed if possible at the time of ClassRenewal ie during the period in shipyard refit to have available sufficient technical equipment test weightsand interchangeable components if necessary

13442 Scope of examinationsIn accordance with these rules five-yearly examinations shall extend and complement the examinationsdescribed in [13431] and where required the measures described thereafter which may if necessary beextended

134421 Examination of structural and interchangeable components1344211 If deemed necessary by the Societys surveyor individual parts shall be dismantled andif necessary unrigged for the examination All parts found to be unsafe to operate shall be repaired orreplaced1344212 The Societys surveyor is entitled to demand a load test or a load test repeat for liftingappliances interchangeable components or loose gear if deemed necessary

134422 Examination of slew rings1344221 Slew rings shall be examined with respect to bearing clearance noise lubrication andcorrosionThe tight fit of the pins shall be checked by at least one random hammer testWhere increased internal wear is suspected extruded grease shall be checked by an appropriate method forabraded particles1344222 Slew rings of shipboard cargo cranes operating at sea which are not equipped with specialcontrol and measuring devices shall be checked regularly by special control measures agreed with themanufacturerWhere increased internal wear becomes apparent it may be required to remove the slew ring and todismantle it for examination1344223 The associated drives and brakes shall be checked with respect to wear function and generalcondition

134423 Examination of hydraulic cylindersApart from a thorough visual examination with respect to straightness oil leakage bearing clearance andabsence of cracks in the connecting structures a function test of pipe burst safety valves or similar safetycomponents with available load is required

134424 Examination of winchesWinches shall be examined with respect to

mdash condition fastening and functionmdash wear to brakes rope grooves and flanged discsmdash sufficient lubrication


DNV GL AS

mdash function of safety equipmentmdash correct rope windingmdash observance of the required three safety turnsmdash tight fit and absence of corrosion of the rope-end attachment(s)

134425 Crack testsWhere a visual inspection gives reason for this the Societys surveyor may request crack tests using theprocedure appropriate to each caseThe following areas of design need particular attention

mdash flange connection of the slew ring at the crane column or the foundationmdash connections between longitudinal and transverse structural members of crane boomsmdash bend areas of all kinds especially on crane columnsmdash connections between crane columns and hatch coamingsmdash corner connections of crane gantriesmdash power transmission in the direction of thickness of platesmdash special (noticeable) details of construction

134426 Examination for corrosionThe following areas of design need particular attention

mdash supporting areas of crane booms at stowage devicesmdash loose ropes with downward hanging end attachments see [85313]mdash contact areas without watertight sealing eg in case of welded eye platesmdash special areas of design where water my accumulate

1345 Load tests

13451 For the performance of load tests the requirements given in [1333] apply however no emergencyshut-down test is required nor tests with several different nominal loads load radii and ship directions

13452 At the five-yearly load tests of shipboard lifting appliances normal testing of the maximum nominalload at the associated maximum load radius will suffice

13453 At the five-yearly load tests the tests are if possible to be performed using weights The weightsshall be calibrated and certified or verifiable

13454 The magnitude of test load shall correspond to Table 13-2 In exceptional cases a lower testload may be used with hydraulically driven lifting appliances where the working pressure cannot becorrespondingly increased see [133334]

13455 Five-yearly load tests of lifting appliances under deck may also be effected using a calibrated loadmeasuring instrument whose indication of measured values shall remain constant for five minutesThe instrument shall have an accuracy of plusmn 25If the nominal load LNe of any lifting appliance exceeds 15 t use of a load measuring instrument as far aspossible shall be avoided

1346 Confirmation of periodic tests and examinations

13461 Following performance of the tests and examinations the Societys surveyor will issue thecertificate Form CG2 for load-tested lifting appliances handling cargo and OLA101 for load tested liftingappliances not handling cargo


DNV GL AS

13462 The tests and examinations of the lifting appliances used for cargo handling and associated loosegear will be certified by the Societys surveyor in the register book Form CG1 Part I II and the certificateplus survey report added to the register book

13463 The tests and examinations of the lifting appliances not used for cargo handling and associatedloosed gear will be certified by the Societys surveyor in the register book Form CG1 Part IV V

13464 The stamping required according to [1335] in advance of the issuing of certificates is in generalnot required for periodic load tests

13465 The system of certification and documentation for lifting appliances is described in [137]

135 Extraordinary tests and examinationsModifications damage renewals and special occasions may require extraordinary load tests andorexaminations as described in the following

1351 General notes

13511 The operator shall inform the Society if essential modifications are intended to be made to liftingappliances or loose gear when damage affecting safety has occurred or renewal of load-bearing structuralelements shall be carried out

13512 In the cases described above the Society decides on the respective measures examinations andload tests

13513 Any essential modification and any repair or renewal of load-bearing components with theexception of ropes and interchangeable components shall be carried out under the supervision of theSociety Where this is not possible in individual cases because of the circumstances a re-examination shallbe carried out on a suitable date

13514 Extraordinary load tests and examinations may be credited towards the periodic tests andexaminations if they comply with the prescribed conditions with respect to type and scope

13515 All load tests shall be performed using weights in the manner described in [1345]Regarding certification of tests and examinations the requirements given in [1346] apply

1352 Essential modifications

13521 Essential modifications are subject to the same tests and examinations as the initial manufacture

13522 Essential modifications include besides renewal of load-bearing components modifications of

mdash nominal loadmdash load radiusmdash hoisting andor luffing systemsmdash cable tackle system unless different types of reeve are provided in the designmdash load-bearing components

13523 Non-essential modifications include modifications which will in no way affect safety andor functionof lifting appliances or loose gear Such modifications shall be presented to the Society surveyor on his firstvisit to the ship after the modification has been carried out


DNV GL AS

1353 Damage

13531 The requirements given in [136] shall be observed when an evaluation is made whether damageunduly affects the safety of lifting appliances or loose gear

13532 Damage affecting safety requires an examination of the damage and a repair plan with specificdetails which is subject to approval by the SocietyFollowing repair an examination within the necessary scope and a load test are required

13533 Depending on the evaluation of the damage lifting appliances or loose gear shall be put out ofoperation or where required be operated at reduced nominal load andor load radiusRegarding repairs and operation at reduced nominal load the requirements given in [1369] apply

13534 Damage which does not affect safety shall be presented to the Societys surveyor at the first visitto the ship after the occurrence of the damage

1354 Renewals

13541 Following each renewal of load-bearing components of lifting appliances and loose gear a load testand an associated examination of this gear is required

13542 The requirements ogiven in [13541] do not apply to ropes and interchangeable componentsbecause these are tested examined and certified independentlyRenewal of axes pins rope-sheaves etc do not in general require a new load testThe renewal of all parts mentioned shall be pointed out to the Societys surveyor on the occasion of thefollowing examination

13543 Following replacement or repair of winches a load test is required unless the winch has been load-tested on a test plant and certified accordingly

13544 Special occasionsThe Society reserves the right to ask for extraordinary load tests andor examinations in specially justifiedcases


1361 General notes

13611 The details which follow regarding deformation wear tolerances etc shall be considered asreference values to assess the remaining margin of safety of damaged corroded or worn componentsIn the case of major damage of shipboard lifting appliances or in cases of doubt the Society shall beconsulted

13612 Any damaged worn or corroded part which is not replaced shall once the tolerances have beenexceeded be restored to the original dimensions using equivalent materialsRegarding an alternative reduction of the nominal load see [13691]

13613 For worn or corroded parts which are close to reaching the tolerance limits the Societys surveyormay determine a time period for repair or replacement


DNV GL AS

13614 Regarding loose gear interchangeable components and ropes reference is also made to [75] and[8533]

1362 Acceptable reduction of plate thickness

13621 For plates profiles and pipes the acceptable reduction of plate thickness is 10

13622 In cases of limited local corrosion or wear a reduction of plate thickness of up to 20 is acceptableprovided this does not result in a reduction of the load-bearing capacity of the cross-section

13623 In cases of isolated pitting a reduction of plate thickness of up to 30 is acceptable

13624 Due to the above reductions of plate thickness the characteristic values of a cross-section underconsideration may be weakened at the most by 5

1363 Acceptable cracks

13631 In category 1 components (see Table 13-1) no cracks can be tolerated

13632 In lateral wind bracing latticework crosspieces and similar stiffeners or knee plates whose purposeis to reduce the slenderness ratio or stiffen load-bearing structures cracks up to the following lengths areacceptable if there is evidence that they do not extend into the load-bearing structure

mdash 10 of the connection lengthmdash 3 times plate thickness

the lower of the two values applyingIn the case of pipes the connection length is the circumferenceIn the case of box girders or beams each chord web and flange width shall be considered separately as aconnection length

1364 Acceptable deformations13641 Deflections

136411 Compression bars1364111 Under the maximum permissible loading compression bars may not display uniform deflectiongreater than the equivalent of the bar length divided by 2501364112 Unstressed compression bars or those stressed only by their own weight which are category 1components may not display uniform deflection greater than the equivalent of the bar length divided by 5001364113 Unstressed compression bars or those stressed only by their own weight which are category2 components such as lateral wind bracing or latticework crosspieces may not display uniform deflectiongreater than the equivalent of the bar length divided by 350

136412 Tension barsTension bars shall not when unstressed display uniform deflection greater than the equivalent of the barlength divided by 50

136413 Boomsjibs1364131 For booms subject to compressive stress under permissible load the requirements given in[1364111] apply The uniform deflection due to the dead weight alone shall not be greater than theequivalent of the crane boom length divided by 350


DNV GL AS

1364132 The lowering of the top of the boom under load andor dead weight is not limited when thepermissible load is observed

13642 Deformation of chords and flanges

136421 I-BeamsEach half-flange may individually or together be deformed by up to 15 of its breadth measured from webto outer edge

136422 Angle profilesFlanges of angle profiles may individually or together be deformed by up to 15 of their breadth measuredfrom flange to outer edge

1365 Acceptable indentationsThe following requirements presuppose smooth transition pieces and apply provided that no bends foldscracks or thinning have developed

13651 Compression bars

136511 Cylindrical pipes1365111 Pipes forming category 1 components

The following conditions shall be observed

ℓ le d

b le 025 d

f le 05 t

where

ℓ = length of indentation measured in the longitudinal direction of the pipeb = breadth of indentationf = depth of indentation (depth gauge)d = outer diametert = wall thickness

1365112 Pipes forming category 2 components


a) central range (13 ℓ) b) outer range

ℓ le d ℓ le 15 middot d

b le 05 middot d b le 07 middot d

f le t f le 2 middot t

136512 Rectangular tubes and box girders1365121 In the case of rectangular tubes and box girders indentations at the corners may have a depthcorresponding to 8 of the smallest side dimension1365122 For acceptable indentations of plates the requirements for cylindrical pipes similarly applyInstead of the diameter the side dimension of the plate under consideration shall be taken


DNV GL AS

136513 I-BeamsThe webs of I-beams may not have any indentations

136514 Angle profilesAngle profiles may not have any indentations at the corners

13652 Tension barsIn the case of tension bars the indentation depth may be up to one third of the indentation length The outerdimensions of hollow profiles however shall not be reduced by more than 25 in the indentation areaIf necessary the requirements given in Sec2 [352] shall be observed

13653 Girders subject to bending

136531 Indentations at bearing or load introduction points are not acceptable

136532 In areas other than mentioned in [136531] the rule is that indentations up to the dimensionsin [136511] and [136512] are acceptable on the tension side on the compression side onlydimensions of half that size

1366 Acceptable wear on rope-sheaves

13661 The side wall thickness of rope sheaves made from normal-strength materials shall meet thefollowing condition at the bottom of the groove

t = side wall thickness [mm]FS = static rope pull according to [8232] [kN]

13662 The details at [13661] apply to disc or spoked DIN rope-sheaves meeting the Dd ratiostipulated in Table 8-3Rope-sheaves of grey cast iron are not permitted

13663 The wall thickness according to [13661] may reduce in an upward direction to 13 at theoutermost edge

13664 Rope imprints located at the bottom of the rope groove require a change to the pairing of rope andrope-sheave

1367 Acceptable wear on pinsincrease of bearing clearances13671 PinsFrom the point of view of load-bearing capacity a reduction in diameter of 10 is acceptable

13672 Bearing clearance

136721 Foot bearingsThe tolerable increase of bearing clearance is two times the initial clearance


DNV GL AS

136722 Bearings in generalGreater clearances than stated in [136721] are acceptable if the pinrsquos load-carrying capacity and ability tofunction are not adversely affected and if no alternating load exists

136723 Rope-sheave bearingsThe following bearing clearances are acceptable

mdash 1 mm in antifriction bearingsmdash 2 mm in sliding bearings

1368 Acceptable wear of mechanical parts13681 Gearings

136811 In the case of toothed racks and other open drives the width of the teeth on the pitch circle(rolling circle) may not be less than 55 of that at the root of the teeth

136812 In the case of enclosed gears parts or the entire set of gearing shall be renewed if the materialon the pressure linesworking faces starts to break away (pitting)

136813 Wedges or fitting keys shall be renewed if there are visible signs of wear

13682 Brakes

136821 Wear on all types of brakes in so far as visible may only have reached the point where in allprobability they can be used for one more yearIn the case of band brakes with riveted-on linings the rivets may not make contact with the braking surface

136822 Electric or hydraulic winches with automatic standstill brakes may not have any slip not evenunder test load

136823 Winches with manually-applied standstill brakes may not have any slip when the brake has beenapplied not even under test load

136824 Hydraulic winches without standstill brakes may not under nominal load show more slip perminute than one meter travelling distance of the hook or one full rotation of the drum The lower of the twovalues applies

1369 Reduction of nominal load(s)load radius (radii)

13691 If a repair or replacement is not performed immediately a reduction of nominal load(s)load radius(radii) because of damage unacceptable wear corrosion or for other reasons is principally permissible as analternative to putting out of serviceThis measure may be temporary or if permissible according to an appropriate evaluation also unlimited

13692 A reduction according to [13691] requires a load test and certificate for the modified workingconditions plus a corresponding entry in the register book and a note in the survey statement

13693 The marking on the lifting appliance or loose gear shall be correspondingly changed for the time ofreduction of the nominal load(s)load radius (radii)Where the reduction is intended to last an unlimited period of time the rigging plans of the affected liftingappliance shall also be modified accordingly


DNV GL AS

13610 Repairs

136101 If the acceptable limiting values described above have been achieved or are expected to beachieved soon the components shall be properly repaired or replaced

136102 In the case of repairs care shall be taken to restore the initial condition as far as possible and toavoid any adverse micro-structure changes in the materials involved as a result of heating

136103 Any repairs shall be entered into the register book and the survey report

137 Lifting appliance documentation

1371 General notes

13711 The central element of all lifting appliance documentation is a register book in which allappropriate certificates and information are collected andor noted

13712 The different register books and certificates to be issued by the Societys surveyor are based oninternational or national regulations in a form as interpreted by the Society

13713 Secure storage of the lifting appliance documentation throughout the entire working life of thelifting appliance and the presentation of register books certificates rigging plans and survey reports to theSocietys surveyor or authorized persons before the start of any test andor examination is the responsibilityof the shiprsquos management

13714 When the register book Form CG1 is full another register book shall be issued and supplied by thesurveyor with the certificates and information still effective from the expired register bookThe ships management shall store the expired register book for at least 5 years

13715 When ships are entered into class with the Society register books and certificates of recognizedsocieties or organizations are accepted and continued until the next 5-yearly thorough examination and loadtest

1372 Register books13721 Explanatory notes

137211 The purpose or register books for lifting appliances shall provide information at any time about theactual situation as regards general data plus the test examination and maintenance status

137212 On completion of successful initial tests and examinations the register books described beloware handed over by the Societys surveyor to the shipyard or the shiprsquos management after the stipulatedcertificates have been added and the examinations made have been confirmed in it

137213 In the register books certificates results of examinations and where required survey reportsand other information are collected They shall be stored at the place of operation and submitted to theSocietys surveyor or to authorized persons on demand

137214 If a register book is lost a new one can be produced on the basis of a test and examination andwith the help of the Societys files (supply of certified true copies etc)


DNV GL AS

137215 A register book normally includes several sets of lifting appliances If it is reasonable registerbooks may also be issued individually for lifting appliances interchangeable crane boom systems on boardfloating cranes loose gear etc

137216 Special versions differing from the register books described below may be issued by the Society orthe operator (eg authority) if this is required or desired

13722 Register book for shipboard lifting appliances (Form CG1)

137221 For shipboard lifting appliances the Societys surveyor issues a Register of lifting appliances andships cargo handling gear Form CG1

137222 Together with the relevant certificates the register book is handed over in a protective coverwhich also contains the rigging plans described in [1374] and further serves to accommodate the surveyreports

137223 Parts 1 and 2 of the register book are reserved for entries by the Societys surveyor concerningcargo gear whereas the inspection of loose gear belonging to the cargo gear in part 3 and maintenancemeasures in part 4 shall be confirmed by the ships management

137224 Parts 5 and 6 of the register book are reserved for entries by the Societys surveyor concerninglifting appliances not handling cargo whereas the inspection of loose gear belonging to other liftingappliances in part 7 and maintenance measures in part 8 shall be confirmed by the shiprsquos managementEntries by the Societys surveyor refer to the recording of newly added certificates the confirmation ofexaminations carried out and to special notes

1373 Certificates13731 Recognition of certificatesCertificates for lifting appliances interchangeable components and ropes as well as for loose gear shall beissued using the forms described in the followingIn special cases or by agreement the Society may recognize deviating forms or certificates not issued by theSocietys surveyors

13732 Certificates for shipboard lifting appliances used for cargo handlingThe following forms of certificates are based on ILO model certificates

mdash Form CG2Lifting appliances for cargo handling test certificate

mdash Form CG2 (U)Derricks used in union purchase test certificate

mdash Form CG3Accessories and lifting attachments testexamination certificate

mdash Form CG4Certificate of test and thorough examination of wire ropes

137321 Load tests are confirmed by Forms CG2 to CG3 tensile tests by Form CG4In addition Forms CG3 and CG4 confirm an examination after the test

137322 Forms CG2 to CG3 are issued new after each load test of shipboard lifting appliances or loose gearmade for this equipmentInterchangeable components used in the tests receive no new certificate


DNV GL AS

137323 The certificates Forms CG2 to CG3 may include several sets of lifting appliances interchangeablecomponents or loose gear

137324 The certificate Form CG4 is issued after the stipulated tensile breaking test and examination bythe Societys surveyors or firms approved by the Society

137325 Newly procured interchangeable components loose gear and ropes shall be taken on boardtogether with their certificates

137326 The numbers of all certificates issued on forms CG2 to CG3 shall be entered by the Societyssurveyor in the appropriate parts of the register book Form CG1 This provides the connection betweenregister book and certificates

137327 The application of the certification system described in [13732] shall be prescribed or agreed

13733 Certificates for shipboard lifting appliances not handling cargoThe following forms of certificates are based on ILO model certificates

mdash Form OLA101Lifting appliances not handling cargo test certificate



137331 Load tests are confirmed by Forms OLA101 to CG3 tensile tests by Form CG4In addition Forms CG3 and CG4 confirm an examination after the test

137332 Forms OLA101 to CG3 are issued new after each load test of shipboard lifting appliances nothandling cargo or loose gear made for this equipmentInterchangeable components used in the tests receive no new certificate

137333 The certificates Forms OLA101 to CG3 may include several sets of lifting appliancesinterchangeable components or loose gear



137336 The numbers of all certificates issued on forms OLA101 to CG3 shall be entered by the Societyssurveyor in the appropriate parts of the register book Form CG1 This provides the connection betweenregister book and certificates


13734 Special certificate forms

137341 The Societys test certificate (general form)1373321 The following certificate form is issued by the Society to confirm tests andor examinations ofall kinds

mdash Form 7103a - Test Certificate


DNV GL AS

1373322 The certificate Form 2092a is also issued in conjunction with load tests of loose gear andinterchangeable components insofar as these are not put into use on ships or if the ship is not known1373323 In special cases eg for particular register books issued by authorities Form 2092a mayreplace all certificates described in [13732] and [137331]

137342 Gear and tackle certificate1373331 Following an inspection of shipboard lifting appliances used for cargo-handling the Societyssurveyor may on application issue the following form of certificate

mdash Form CG5301a - Gear and Tackle Certificate

1373332 The certificate Form CG5301a is based on the national regulations of various countries forships more than 15 years old1373333 On request by the shiprsquos management the inspection may be expanded accordingly andcounted as the annual examination

1374 Rigging plans

13741 Rigging plans are required by the ILO for lifting appliances used for cargo handling Liftingappliances not used for cargo handling is not covered thereThey contain information useful for operation and maintenance and for the procurement of spare parts andrepair

13742 Rigging plans for instance have information on nominal loads and load radii ropes reeving ofropes marking arrangement of the lifting appliances on board the ship working ranges etc

13743 In the rigging plan examples given in AppD

mdash arrangement of lifting appliances andmdash reeving of ropes for lifting appliance

the necessary nominal sizes of the individual parts the minimum breaking load of the ropes and the specialconditions for operation of the lifting appliances where required shall be indicated clearly

13744 For construction of the ship the plans for the arrangement of lifting appliances shall be prepared bythe yard the plans for the reeving of ropes for the lifting appliance by the lifting appliance manufacturer

1375 Survey reports

13751 For each test andor examination of lifting appliances and loose gear a Survey Report is preparedby the Societys surveyorThis report may be part of the overall report for the ship

1376 Documentation for the operator13761 General notes

137611 For shipboard lifting appliances the documentation handed over by the Society consists of theregister books including certificates rigging plans lists and survey reports in the scope described below

137612 Flag administraton requirements may prescribe deviating national register books and authoritiesmay keep their own register books


DNV GL AS

13762 Scope of documentation

137621 The Societys register book Form CG1 (Cargo gear)In accordance with its intended purpose this register book contains

mdash the Societys certificate(s) Form CG2 where required additionally Form CG2 (U)mdash the Societys certificate(s) Form CG3mdash the Societys certificate(s) Form CG4mdash rigging plansmdash survey reports


DNV GL AS

APPENDIX A CALCULATION OF DYNAMIC FORCES DUE TO MOTIONSOF THE SHIP

A1 General

A11 Dynamic forces due to motions in the seaway may be calculated by hydrodynamic methods from themovements of the floating bodies under consideration alternatively also simplified as per [A12] or [A13]

A12 For the sake of simplification the calculation of the dynamic forces can be conducted according to [A212]and [A222] with the ships inclinations in Table A-1 or with agreed ships inclinations

A13 Where calculated or agreed values for the ships inclinations and natural periods exist the dynamic forcesmay be calculated using the values according to [A213] and [A223]

A14 The dynamic forces for rolling and pitching each including also a force component of 20 for heaving are tobe considered separately ie as not acting simultaneously

A15 The following approaches apply to monohull ships With regard to other ship forms such as semi-submersibles it is recommended that DNV GL be consulted

A2 Dynamic forces generated by ships and similar floating bodies

A21 Dynamic forces due to rolling

A211 Designations of the dimensions and forces are shown in Figure A-1


DNV GL AS

Figure A-1 Vertical and horizontal forces due to rolling

LE = dead load [kN]αsee = roll angle acc to Table A-1 [deg]b = distance from centre line of ship [m]h = height above waterline [m]

A212 Calculation of dynamic forces acc to [A12]

B = breadth of ship [m]L = length of ship between perpendiculars [m]


TT = natural period of heaving[s]TR = natural period of rolling [s]


DNV GL AS

A22 Dynamic forces due to pitching


Figure A-2 Vertical and horizontal forces due to pitching

βsee = pitch angle acc to Table A-1 [deg]= distance from midship section ahead or astern [m]

VL = fore perpendicular

A23 Calculation of dynamic forces according to


TS = natural period of pitching [s]


DNV GL AS

A3 Dynamic forces due to pontoons or bargesThe following requirements are based on the calculations in [A21] and [A22]

A31 Dynamic forces due to rollingRegarding pontoon-type ship forms calculation of dynamic forces shall be based on specified values for thenatural periods and dynamic inclination of heeling (calculation according to [A213])

A32 Dynamic forces due to pitchingFor the calculation of dynamic forces due to pitching the approaches in [A24] apply with laid down valuesfor natural periods and for the dynamic inclination of pitching

Table A-1 Dynamic inclinations

Type of floating body Heel angle αsee Trim angle βsee

Ships and similar floating bodies plusmn 30deg plusmn 12 middot e (-L 250)

Pontoons barges plusmn (3deg + Δαsee) 1 plusmn (15deg + Δβsee)

2

Semi-submersibles 3 plusmn 6deg plusmn 6deg

1) Δαsee is the smaller value of heel either causing immersion of the deck or emerging of the bilge in calm water2) Δβsee is the smaller value of trim either causing immersion of bow or stern or emerging of stem or stern frame in

calm water3) Basic values for calculation by DNV GL see [A15]


DNV GL AS

APPENDIX B DETAIL CLASSIFICATION FOR FATIGUE STRENGTHANALYSIS (FAT CLASSES)

B1 Following tables specify FAT classes of typical structural detailsFurther detail classifications as stated in EN 1993-1-9 can be used as well

Table B-1 Catalogue of details

Butt welds transverse loaded (A)

FAT classΔσRType

NoJoint configuration showing mode of

fatigue cracking and stress σ considered Description of joint

Steel Al

A1

Transverse butt weld ground flush to plate100 NDT (Non-Destructive Testing) 112 45

A2

Transverse butt weld made in shop in flatposition max weld reinforcement 1 mm + 01 middotweld width smooth transitions NDT

90 36

A3

Transverse butt weld not satisfying conditions forjoint type No A2 NDT 80 32

A4

Transverse butt weld on backing strip orthreeplate connection with unloaded branchButt weld welded on ceramic backing root crack

71

80

25

28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A5

Transverse butt welds between plates of differentwidths or thickness NDTas for joint type No A2

slope 15

slope 13

slope 12

as for joint type No A3

slope 15

slope 13

slope 12

For the third sketched case the slope resultsfrom the ratio of the difference in platethicknesses to the breadth of the welded seam

Additional bending stress due to thicknesschange to be considered

90

80

71

80

71

63

32

28

25

25

22

20

A6

Transverse butt welds welded from one sidewithout backing bar full penetration root

mdash controlled by NDTmdash not controlled by NDT

For tubular profiles ΔσR may be lifted to the nexthigher FAT class

Laser (t le 8 mm) and laser hybrid (t le 12 mm)butt welds

71

36

80

28

12

28

A7

Partial penetration butt weld the stress is to berelated to the weld throat sectional area weldoverfill not to be taken into account

36 12

A8

Full penetration butt weld at crossing flangesWelded from both sides

50 18


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A9


Cutting edges in the quality according to type E2or E3

Connection length w ge 2 b

Nominal stress

63 22

A10

Full penetration butt weld at crossing flangesWelded from both sides NDT weld ends groundbutt weld ground flush to surface

Cutting edges in the quality according to type E2or E3 with ΔσR = 125


Nominal stress

80 32

A11

Full penetration butt weld at crossing flangesWelded from both sides made in shop at flatposition radius transition with R ge b

Weld reinforcement le 1 mm + 01 x weld widthsmooth transitions NDT weld ends ground


90 36

A12

Full penetration butt weld at crossing flangesradius transition with R ge bWeld from both sides no misalignment 100NDT weld ends ground butt weld ground flushto surface

Cutting edges broken or rounded according totype E2

100 40


DNV GL AS

Longitudinal load-carrying weld

FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B1

Longitudinal butt welds

both sides ground flush parallel to load direction

without start stop positions NDT

with start stop positions

125

125

90

50

50

36

B2

Continuous automatic longitudinal fullypenetrated K-butt without stop start positions(based on stress range in flange adjacent toweld)

125 50

B3

Continuous automatic longitudinal fillet weldpenetrated K-butt weld without stopstartpositions (based on stress range in flangeadjacent to weld)

100 40

B4

Continuous manual longitudinal fillet or butt weld(based on stress range in flange adjacent toweld)

90 36

B5

Intermittent longitudinal fillet weld (based onstress range in flange at weld ends)In presenceof shear τ in the web the FAT class has to bereduced by the factor (1 ndash Δτ Δσ) but notbelow 36 (steel) or 14 (Al)

80 32


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B6

Longitudinal butt weld fillet weld or intermittentfillet weld with cut outs (based on stress range inflange at weld ends)If cut out is higher than 40 of web height

In presence of shear τ in the web the FAT classhas to be reduced by the factor (1 ndash Δτ Δσ)but not below 36 (steel) or 14 (Al)

Note

For Ω-shaped scallops an assessment based onlocal stresses in recommended

71

63

28

25

Non-load-carrying attachments

FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C1

Longitudinal gusset welded on beam flange bulbor plate

ℓle 50 mm

50 mm lt ℓ le 150 mm


ℓ gt 300 mm

For t2 le 05 t1 ΔσR may be increased by oneclass but not over 80 (steel) or 28 (Al) notvalid for bulb profiles

When welding close to edges of plates or profiles(distance less than 10 mm) andor the structuralelement is subjected to bending ΔσR is to bedecreased by one class

80

71

63

56

28

25

20

18

C2

Gusset with smooth transition (sniped end orradius) welded on beam flange bulb or platec le 2 t2 max 25 mm

r ge 05 h

r lt 05 h or φ le 20deg

φ gt 20deg see joint type C1

For t2 le 05 t1 ΔσR may be increased by oneclass not valid for bulb profiles

When welding close to the edges of plates orprofiles (distance less than 10 mm) ΔσR is to bedecreased by one class

71

63

25

20


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C3

Fillet welded non-load-carrying lap joint weldedto longitudinally stressed component

mdash flat barmdash to bulb sectionmdash to angle section

For ℓ gt 150 mm ΔσR has to be decreased byone class while for ℓ le 50 mm ΔσR may beincreased by one class

If the component is subjected to bending ΔσRhas to be reduced by one class

56

56

50

20

20

18

C4

Fillet welded lap joint with smooth transition(sniped end with φ le 20deg or radius) welded tolongitudinally stressed component


c le 2 t max 25 mm

56

56

50

20

20

18

C5

Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate orbeam flange edge

mdash ℓ le 50 mmmdash 50 mm lt ℓ le 150 mmmdash 150 mm lt ℓ le 300 mmmdash ℓ gt 300 mm

For t2 le 07 t1 ΔσR may be increased by oneclass but not over 56 (steel) or 20 (Al)

If the plate or beam flange is subjected to in-plane bending ΔσR has to be decreased by oneclass

56

50

45

40

20

18

16

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C6

Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plateedge or beam flange edge with smoothtransition (sniped end or radius)

c le 2 t2 max 25 mm

r ge 05 h



For t2 le 07 t1 ΔσR may be increased by oneclass

50

45

18

16

C6a

Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plateedge or beam flange edge with smoothtransition radius

r h gt 1 3 or r ge 150 mm

1 6 lt r h lt 1 3

r h lt 1 6

Smooth transition radius formed by grinding thefull penetration weld area in order to achieve anotch-free transition area Final grinding is to beperformed parallel to stress direction

90

71

50

36

28

22

C7

Transverse stiffener with fillet welds (applicablefor short and long stiffeners) 80 28

C8

Non-loaded stud welding on a plate or bulbprofileNote

For an adequate workmanship on bulb profile acentric connection is required

For load carrying studs an additional assessmentacc to detail D7 is required

80 28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C9

End of long doubling plate on beam welded ends(based on stress range in flange at weld toe)

tD le 08 t08 t lt tD le 15 t

tD gt 15 t

The following features increase ΔσR by one classaccordingly

mdash reinforced ends according to Section 10Figure 5

mdash weld toe angle le 30degmdash length of doubling le 300 mm

For length of doubling le 150 mm ΔσR may beincreased by two classes

56

50

45

20

18

16

Cruciform joints and T-joints

FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D1

Cruciform or tee-joint K-butt welds with fullpenetration or with defined incomplete rootpenetration

cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80

25

28

D2

Cruciform or tee-joint with transverse filletwelds toe failure (root failure particularly forthroat thickness a lt 07 t see joint type D3)

cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

22

25

D3

Welded metal in transverse load-carrying filletwelds at cruciform or tee-joint root failure(based on stress range in weld throat) see alsojoint type No D2

a ge t 3

a lt t 3

Note

Crack initiation at weld root

36

40

12

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D4

Full penetration weld at the connection betweena hollow section (eg pillar) and a plate

for tubular section

for rectangular hollow section

For t le 8 mm ΔσR has to be decreased by oneclass

56

50

20

18

D5

Fillet weld at the connection between a hollowsection (eg pillar) and a plate

for tubular section


The stress is to be related to the weld sectionalarea For t le 8 mm ΔσR has to be decreased byone class

45

40

16

14

D6

Continuous butt or fillet weld connecting a pipepenetrating through a plated

le 50 mm

d gt 50 mm

Note

For large diameters an assessment based onlocal stress is recommended

71

63

25

22

D7

Axially loaded stud welding on a bulb profileNote

For an adequate workmanship a centricconnection is required

45 16


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

E1

Rolled or extruded plates andsections as well as seamless pipesno surface or rolling defects

160(m0 = 5)

71(m0 = 5)

E2a

Plate edge sheared or machine-cut by any thermal process withsurface free of cracks and notchescutting edges chamfered orrounded by means of smoothgrinding groove direction parallelto the loading directionStress increase due to geometryof cut-outs to be consideredby means of direct numericalcalculation of the appertainingmaximum notch stress range

150(m0 = 4)

---

E2

Plate edge sheared or machine-cut by any thermal process withsurface free of cracks and notchescutting edges broken or roundedStress increase due to geometry ofcut-outs to be considered 1

140(m0 = 4)

40(m0 = 4)

E3

Plate edge not meeting therequirements of type E2 but freefrom cracks and severe notches

Machine cut or sheared edge

Manually thermally cut

Stress increase due to geometry ofcut-outs to be considered 1

125 (m0= 35)

100 (m0= 35)

36 (m0 = 35)

32 (m0 = 35)


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

1) Stress concentrations caused by an opening to be considered as follows

Δσmax = Kt ΔσN

Kt = Notch factor according to a recognized standard (subject to agreement with DNV GL)

ΔσN = Nominal stress range related to net section

Alternatively direct determination of Δσmax from FE-calculation especially in case of hatch openings or multiplearrangement of openings

Partly based on Recommendations on Fatigue of Welded Components reproduced from IIW document XIII-2151-07 XV-1254-07 by kind permission of the International Institute of Welding

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 272


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B

Table B-2 Examples of details

Structure orequipment detail

Description of structure orequipment detail

TypeNo

Joint configuration showingmode of fatigue cracking

and stress σ consideredDescription of joint

FATclassΔσR

steel

Unstiffened flange toweb joint to be assessedaccording to type D1 D2 orD3 depending on the type ofjointThe stress in the web iscalculated using the force Fgin the flange as follows

σ = FG (r middot t)

Furthermore the stress inlongitudinal weld directionhas to be assessed accordingto type B2 ndash B4 In case ofadditional shear or bendingalso the highest princiblestress may become relevantin the web

D1

Cruciform or tee-joint K-buttwelds with full penetration orwith defined incomplete rootpenetration

cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80

Joint at stiffened knuckleof a flange to be assessedaccording to type D1 D2 orD3 depending on the type ofjointThe stress in the stiffener atthe knuckle can normally becalculated as follows

σ = σa (tf tb) middot 2middotsin α

D2

Cruciform or tee-joint withtransverse fillet weldstoe failure (root failureparticularly for throatthickness

a lt 07 middot t see joint type D3)

cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 273


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



D3

Welded metal in transverseload-carrying fillet welds atcruciform or tee-joint rootfailure (based on stress rangein weld throat) see also jointtype no D2

36

Holder welded in way of anopening and arranged parallelto the edge of the opening

not valid for hatch corner

D4

ℓ le 150 mmIn way of the rounded cornerof an opening with the radiusr a minimum distance x fromthe edge to be kept (hatchedarea)

X[mm]=15 + 0175middotr[mm]

100 mm le r le 400 mm

In case of an ellipticalrounding the mean value ofboth semiaxes to be applied

71

Circular doubler plate withmaximum 150mm diameter C9

td le 081 t08 t lt td le 15 t

tD gt 15 t

71

63

56

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 274


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel

Drain plugs with fullpenetration weldd le 150 mm

Assesment according todoubling plate

C9

td le 081 t

08 t lt td le 15 t

tD gt 15 t

For d gt 150 mm

ΔσR shall be increased by oneclass

5063

56

Drain plugs with partialpenetration butt weld anddefined root gapd le 150 mm

For v lt 04 t

or vlt 04 tD

C9

02 t lt tD le 08 t

08 t lt tD le 15 t

15 t lt tD le 20 t

For d gt 150 mm


50

45

40

For v ge 04 tand v ge 04 tD

A7

For partial penetration buttweld the stress shall berelated to the weld throatsectional area weld overfillshall not be taken intoaccount

36

The detail category isalso valid for not fullycircumferential weldedholdersFor stiffeners loaded inbending ΔσR shall bedowngraded by one class

C7

Transverse stiffener with filletwelds (applicable for shortand long stiffeners)

80


DNV GL AS

APPENDIX C WIND LOADS FORM AND SHELTERING COEFFICIENTS

C1 General

C11 For the determination of wind loads acting on shipboard lifting appliances it is normally sufficient to usesimplified form coefficients and to consider wind load reductions of areas arranged behind one anotheraccording to [42454] and [42455]

C12 Using form and sheltering coefficients from this appendix which depend on various parameters may lead toa reduction of wind loads if compared to the statements in Sec5

C2 Form coefficients c

C21 The form coefficients for individual structural components and lattice frames as well as for enclosedsuperstructures such as eg machine houses on a solid bottom plate are given in Table C-1

C22 The form coefficients in Table C-1 depend on the aerodynamic slenderness ratio see Figure C-1

C23 Where in the case of lattice constructions the distance between nodes is defined as the length of theindividual structural elements see Figure C-2 normally dimensioned gusset plates need not be considered

C24 The wind load on lattice beams can be calculated using the form coefficients in Table C-1 In this case theaerodynamic slenderness ratio of each individual lattice bar shall be considered

C25 As an alternative to [C24] the global form coefficients in Table C-1 may be used for lattice beams if thelattice bars consist of round profiles or of profiles with flat sides

C3 Sheltering coefficients η

C31 Where components are arranged in such a way that they shelter one another the wind loads on the shelteredcomponents may be calculated by multiplication with the applicable sheltering coefficient η acc to Table C-2


DNV GL AS

C32 Where several components are arranged at the same distance in a row so that they shelter one another thesheltering effect increases up to the 9th component and then remains constant

C33 The wind load on areas arranged one after another is calculated as follows

mdash first area ([42452])

mdash second area

mdash nth area

mdash 9th and following areas

Figure C-1 Aerodynamic slenderness ratio and section ratio

Figure C-2 Area ratio


DNV GL AS

Table C-1 Form coefficients c

Aerodynamic slenderness ratio ℓh or ℓd 1Componentgroups Description

le 5 10 20 30 40 ge 50

rolled profiles such as

box profiles

square h lt 04 m

rectangular h lt 05 m

13 135 16 165 17 18

07 075 08 085 09 10round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s

d middot v ge 6 m2s 06 065 07 07 075 08

hb 1

ge 2 155 175 195 210 22

1 15 155 175 185 19

05 10 12 13 135 14

Components

box profiles

square

h ge 04 m

rectangular

h ge 05 m025 08 09 09 10 10

profiles with flat sides 17

11Global formcoefficientsfor lattice

beams

round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s

d middot v ge 6 m2s 08

Machinehouses etc

rectangular enclosedconstructions on asolid bottom plate

11

1) See Figure C-12) v = wind speed according to [42453]


DNV GL AS

Table C-2 Sheltering coefficients η

Area ratio ABAU 1

Distance ratioAH or ah 2 01 02 03 04 05 ge 06

05 075 04 032 021 015 01

10 092 075 059 043 025 01

20 095 08 063 05 033 02

40 10 088 076 066 055 045

50 10 095 088 081 075 068

60 10 10 10 10 10 10

1) See Figure C-22) See Figure C-3

Figure C-3 Distance ratio


DNV GL AS

APPENDIX D RIGGING PLAN

Cha

nges

ndash h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS

CHANGES ndash HISTORICThere are currently no historical changes for this document

DNV GLDriven by our purpose of safeguarding life property and the environment DNV GL enablesorganizations to advance the safety and sustainability of their business We provide classification andtechnical assurance along with software and independent expert advisory services to the maritimeoil and gas and energy industries We also provide certification services to customers across a widerange of industries Operating in more than 100 countries our 16 000 professionals are dedicated tohelping our customers make the world safer smarter and greener

SAFER SMARTER GREENER

CONTENTS

Changes - current

Section 1 General information

11 Introduction

12 Services


14 Type of services

Section 2 Documentation and certification


22 Certification

Section 3 Materials

31 General





36 Forgings

37 Steel castings

38 Bolts and nuts

Section 4 Design and calculation principles

41 General







48 Joints


Section 5 Cranes and supporting structures

51 General

52 Crane groups

53 Design loads



56 Proofs


Section 6 Special lifting appliances and means of transport

61 General






Section 7 Loose gear and interchangeable components

71 General

72 Loose gear




Section 8 Ropes and rope accessories

81 General

82 Wire ropes

83 Fibre ropes

84 Rope-end attachments


86 Documentation

Section 9 Mechanical parts

91 General


93 Power drives


95 Winches




99 Documentation

Section 10 Electrical equipment

101 General




105 Switches



108 Documentation

Section 11 Construction of steel components

111 General


113 Design details

114 Types of welds

115 Workmanship and testing of weld joints


117 Documentation

Section 12 Technical and operational safety requirements

121 General


123 Equipment

124 Safety devices




Section 13 Testing and examination of shipboard lifting appliances

131 General




135 Extraordinary tests and examinations



Appendix A Calculation of dynamic forces due to motions of the ship

A1 General


A3 Dynamic forces due to pontoons or barges

Appendix B Detail classification for fatigue strength analysis (FAT classes)

B1

Appendix C Wind loads form and sheltering coefficients

C1 General



Appendix D Rigging plan

Changes ndash historic

FOREWORD

DNV GL standards contain requirements principles and acceptance criteria for objects personnelorganisations andor operations

copy DNV GL AS May 2016

Any comments may be sent by e-mail to rulesdnvglcom

This service document has been prepared based on available knowledge technology andor information at the time of issuance of thisdocument The use of this document by others than DNV GL is at the users sole risk DNV GL does not accept any liability or responsibilityfor loss or damages resulting from any use of this document

Cha

nges

- c

urre

nt


DNV GL AS

CHANGES - CURRENT


Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

CONTENTS

Changes - current3






Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS







Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS






Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


11 Introduction

111 Objective




112 Scope














DNV GL AS








113 Application













DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS













It is required that






DNV GL AS

It is required that
















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













12 Services

121 Introduction




DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS



131 General









DNV GL AS















Standard mdash DNVGL-ST-0377 Edition May 2016 0Standard for shipboard lifting appliances

DNV GL AS




14 Type of services











DNV GL AS




See also Figure 1-1


DNV GL AS



211 General







notation)






FI FI




AP AP




General





FI FI



DNV GL AS



notation)











213 Design analysis




See also [43]


22 Certification




DNV GL AS





















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

SECTION 3 MATERIALS

31 General















DNV GL AS














1st order







DNV GL AS


3rd order













DNV GL AS











3326 Marking




DNV GL AS


















VL-E over 50 mm














DNV GL AS













VL-A420 A460VL-A500 A550VL-

A620 A690le 25 mm le 50 mm

VL-D420 D460VL-D500 D550VL-

D620 D690le 50 mm le 70 mm

VL-E420 E460VL-E500 E550VL-

E620 E690le 70 mm



VL-F420 F460VL-F500 F550VL-

F620 F690le 70 mm

by specialagreement



022 055 160 004 004 030 008 030 040 008 1


Nb + V + Ti max 012





DNV GL AS


1











275

315036


390

045

040

420 048 045









DNV GL AS

3435 Impact energy













DNV GL AS






275 29 21

315 31 22


390 41 27

420 42 28

460 46 31

500 50 33

550 55 37

620 62 41


over 690 69 46






t le 125 Tp = TE + 30 2) minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 10 Tp = TE + 30







DNV GL AS





t le 125 minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 20 2)

25 lt t le 50 Tp = TE + 10

50 lt t le 70 Tp = TE + 10





351 General notes










DNV GL AS











3535 Impact energy








DNV GL AS




1st order 2nd order

t le 25 Tp = TE +30 2) minus 1)












36 Forgings

361 General notes




DNV GL AS










3634 Impact energy







1st order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE ndash 10 2)

2nd order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE + 10



DNV GL AS












37 Steel castings






DNV GL AS







3734 Impact energy











2nd order 27 (19) TE + 10



DNV GL AS





38 Bolts and nuts


382 Manufacture



383 Requirements








DNV GL AS







lt 800 Nmm2 32 30

ge 800 Nmm2 32 30


ge 1200 Nmm2 18 20

-10degC

Austenitic 41 minus



+20degC





DNV GL AS


41 General










or sea conditions





DNV GL AS






b) on the open deck











4232 Application




DNV GL AS




nlow le N 1000










4242 Dead loads



4243 Dynamic forces




DNV GL AS






ε












DNV GL AS

4245 Wind loads



[N]














DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS





4253 Sea lashing











Ed = Ek γm




DNV GL AS

432 Proofs required
















DNV GL AS


fyr = 037 ∙ (Rp 02 + Rm) le Rp 02













DNV GL AS









4372 Definitions






DNV GL AS



Ld = γP ∙ Lk


WGd = WGk γm
















DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS


441 General notes













DNV GL AS








σvSd σRd le 1

or

σvSd le σRd

σSd

τSd

σvSd




DNV GL AS













451 General notes






DNV GL AS












461 General notes



DNV GL AS



462 Application




463 Definitions





DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS







κ =





p 07 17 27 37 47 57 67


= 1 = constant


DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS


Q = log(ΔσR Δσ) - 069897 m0
















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS








= Δσk







DNV GL AS



S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 558 409 336 291 195 167

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 232 201 137 119

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 174 151 105 092

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 116 082 072

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 093 066 058

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 056 048

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 047 041

S7 470 345 275 191 151 127 089 070 059 043 037



S0 9341251 1

8181019 1

739873 1

620677 1

548574 1 496 391 333 296 209 184

S1775

983 1668

787 1595

665 1485 420 372 282 238 211 151 134

S2665

809 1568

638 1497

534 1394 333 290 217 182 161 117 105

S3562

665 1475

520 1414 320 266 230 171 141 125 093 083

S4475

555 1400

430 1350 262 217 188 138 114 100 076 068

S5407

473 1340

366 1300 222 183 159 116 095 084 063 056

S6354

412 1296

317 1260 191 157 136 100 082 071 054 048

S7325

377 1270

290 1235 174 143 123 090 074 064 049 043




DNV GL AS



S0778

883 1

1007 2

685732 1

848 2

620662 1

745 2

528560 1

598 2473

500 1436

458 1 365 322 293 219 195

S1647

693 1

809 2

562600 1

668 2

502536 1

580 2418

443 1372

388 1 339 275 240 217 161 145

S2554

594 1

674 2

475507 1

552 2

421449 1

473 2356

363 1 304 275 217 186 168 127 115

S3467

500 1

560 2

397424 1

453 2349

372 1 285 248 224 172 146 132 101 092

S4395

424 1

470 2

333356 1

377 2291

311 1 237 205 183 140 118 106 083 075

S5339

363 1

401 2

284304 1

320 2248

266 1 201 174 154 117 099 088 069 063

S6296

317 1

349 2

247265 1

278 2215

230 1 173 150 133 101 085 075 06 054

S7270

290 1

319 2

225241 1

254 2196

211 1 158 137 120 092 077 068 054 049





S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 314 291 230 209

S1 607 526 471 394 352 323 269 240 221 175 160

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 217 192 177 142 130

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 141 114 106

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 114 094 087


DNV GL AS


S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 079 073

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 068 063

S7 253 211 184 148 129 116 093 081 073 061 057



m0 = 3 m0 = 5 m0 = 4 m0 = 35

353 363 366 365


Δσmax le Δσp






471 General notes








DNV GL AS






48 Joints










DNV GL AS














Min Max 1







DNV GL AS






ασm = minimum of



mdash Rms Rm or

mdash 10


mm2]



ατe = 077



ReHs [Nmm2] 240 300 640 900 1080

Rms [Nmm2] 400 500 800 1000 1200


ΔFxd =

ΔFzd =

ΔFMd =


DNV GL AS













ΔτR = 100 Nmm2




DNV GL AS






S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 313 288 224 201

S1 607 526 471 394 351 323 269 238 218 167 151

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 216 191 173 132 119

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 138 103 094

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 113 082 076

S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 069 062

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 059 053

S7 253 211 183 147 128 116 093 081 073 053 046







nut


DNV GL AS












Fμd =







DNV GL AS








12 843 7625

14 115 1047

16 157 1441

18 193 1751

20 245 2252

22 303 2815

24 353 3243

27 459 4271

30 561 5190


33 668 617

36 786 723


DNV GL AS


39 943 873

42 1083 999

45 1265 1174

48 1426 1320

52 1707 1590

56 1971 1833

64 2599 2426

72 3372 3174

80 4245 4023

90 5479 5226

100 6858 6575



S235 260

S355 C45N 46G2N 46Cr4N 420


GG25 800







DNV GL AS








nut





DNV GL AS





= 0 for proofs in [49142] and [4915]


DNV GL AS






g lt dw+tf




FMmax le FMzul




DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS



FMmin = FMmaxαA














DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS



S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 555 406 333 287 182 151

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 229 195 123 103

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 172 146 089 076

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 114 068 058

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 092 054 046

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 045 037

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 039 031

S7 467 345 273 189 151 127 088 070 059 035 028






ba ge 075







DNV GL AS











γp = 134



DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS








DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS












[]



DNV GL AS








[mm]








DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS


51 General
















DNV GL AS







52 Crane groups

521 General notes




522 Crane group A









DNV GL AS



523 Crane group B









524 Crane group C












DNV GL AS

53 Design loads

531 General notes














DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS







FSa = fa middot LN





DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS



ψP = (1 + ψ) 2












DNV GL AS


541 General notes








A1 105 + 034 middot vh 117

B1

C1 115 + 051 middot vh 135




HD 1 HD 2 HD 3 HD 4





DNV GL AS






5432 Sea operation





DNV GL AS











Fixedinstallation



075 032middot(H13)075 038middot(H13)

075 050middot(H13)075 070middot(H13)

075 085middot(H13)067

Semi-sub-


090 040middot(H13)088 047middot(H13)

087 060middot(H13)083 073middot(H13)

080 090middot(H13)070


088 062middot(H13)090 070middot(H13)

090 080middot(H13)087 (H13)

078


094 075middot(H13)094 085middot(H13)

094 090middot(H13)094 120middot(H13)

080


094 118middot(H13) 097 120middot(H13)

097 130middot(H13) 094 140middot(H13)

091







DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS




551 General notes













DNV GL AS












Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 114


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5


Load Combinations


Loads i Reference






Regu

lar

load

s





Non

-reg

ular

load

s






cial

load

s




Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 115


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5

Load Combinations


Loads i Reference




DNV GL AS









Load combinations


γpi IA1 γpi IIIA1

Dead loads LE 1 4 321 122 1 10 110 1 10









DNV GL AS


Load combinations






Regular loads




Special loads



56 Proofs

561 General









DNV GL AS







Hatch cover crane


Provision crane

S6

S2

S2

20000

10000

20000

A1


Hose crane S6 50000

A3

Floating cranes




S2

S3

S4

80000

50000

20000

B1

Ship cranes






S3

S2

S3

S4

S4

350000

250000

100000

70000

50000

B3

Floating cranes





S2

S3

S4

S4

300000

125000

80000

60000

C1

Ship cranes



Pallet crane

S5

S5

S6

600000

450000

600000

C3

Floating cranes



Lighter crane

S5

S5

S5

700000

500000

2000000





DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS







a le 2 middot dℓ

b ge 15 middot dℓ

ba ge 075
















DNV GL AS







[N]

[N]

[N]



88 109 129









DNV GL AS






Znom =






DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS


tf ge 3 middot tw1


574133 Facing













DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS


61 General







621 General notes






DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS










6243 Accessories








DNV GL AS











6272 Certificates




DNV GL AS

6273 Register book



631 General notes





6322 Dimensioning








Trucks 5 kNm 05 m



DNV GL AS





f =

where











DNV GL AS







6343 Accessories









DNV GL AS








6372 Certificates



6373 Register book




DNV GL AS


641 General notes














DNV GL AS

6432 Marking








651 General notes












DNV GL AS



strong




6543 Register book









DNV GL AS





6632 Dimensioning












DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS


71 General




72 Loose gear









DNV GL AS


7222 Traverses














DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS










SWL ψ SWL ψ

le 10 t 16 le 1000 t 12

le 160 t 14 gt 1000 t 115

le 500 t 13




DNV GL AS



HS = (LNe + Le)10





Load combinations


Loads i Reference






5 4 Table 5-2 110 ψmax - -


Lateral impact 7 7 [23242] 110 - - 10





DNV GL AS


7234 Proofs





DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS








above 160 t



7252 Examinations




7261 Certification





DNV GL AS

7262 Register book






731 General notes












DNV GL AS








LNe ψzul

up to 60 t 16

above 60 t to 160 t

above 160 t 11







DNV GL AS

7342 Proofs









DNV GL AS












σd max le Rd

with



DNV GL AS

with







with

(base value)




and (radii ratio)




DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS

7362 Examinations











DNV GL AS






7372 Eye plates













over 1600 t


11 times SWL






DNV GL AS


ropes or chains




7422 Loose gear












DNV GL AS





15SWL 30 tWT 5 t





















DNV GL AS












751 Loose gear






DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


81 General

811 Scope






82 Wire ropes









DNV GL AS


W = Cr [] + 33 middot Mo [] ge 29


822 Definitions










823 Dimensioning







DNV GL AS








LNe ψzulS

up to 10 t 16


over 160 t 15





DNV GL AS




1 le Dd le 9










DNV GL AS




up to 10 t 5


over 160 t 3



up to 10 t 4


over 160 t 3



up to 10 t 6


over 160 t 36








DNV GL AS




8242 Rope-sheaves











A 18 ds 20 ds 16 ds 1770 Nmm2






proportionally


DNV GL AS







83 Fibre ropes






832 Definitions





DNV GL AS






10 ndash 13

14 ndash 17

18 ndash 23

24 ndash 39

40 and over

12

10

8

7

6











manila hemp

polypropylene

polyamide

polyester

carbon-fibre

55 ds

4 ds

6 ds

6 ds

14 ds


DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS








86 Documentation










DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


91 General

911 General notes

















DNV GL AS


921 General notes




922 Dimensioning








924 Lubrication





DNV GL AS






932 Main drives




941 Slewing gears








DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS

95 Winches

951 Design notes




952 Rope drums













DNV GL AS









953 Brakes






DNV GL AS














9542 Manual drives




DNV GL AS


955 Couplings




956 Gearing















DNV GL AS










963 Hydraulic tanks







DNV GL AS







972 Safety devices












DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS





99 Documentation

991 Marking




DNV GL AS










992 Certificates

















DNV GL AS














le 40 barle 32 DN











Explanations





DNV GL AS


101 General

1011 General notes
















DNV GL AS











1031 Driving power





DNV GL AS














1033 Brakes



DNV GL AS



1041 Supply line














DNV GL AS

10432 Cable trays



10433 Cable bundles









105 Switches





DNV GL AS


1052 Limit switches
















DNV GL AS













10622 Lighting




DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS


108 Documentation

1081 Marking





1082 Certificates





DNV GL AS


111 General














DNV GL AS











11233 Cold forming




DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


11242 Welders














DNV GL AS






113 Design details

1131 General notes










DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


Dmin = 170 + 3 (t ndash 10) ge 170 mm







DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS



















1141 Butt joints



DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS





1143 Fillet welds



DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS

1154 Workmanship





1157 Heat treatment









DNV GL AS















Remarks








DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS









117 Documentation

1171 Marking



inspection office


1172 Certification




DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS


121 General











DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS

123 Equipment

















DNV GL AS


124 Safety devices















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS

1246 Alarm devices



















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS



12715 Communication













DNV GL AS


131 General










13122 Equipment





DNV GL AS


13131 Tests



13132 Examination




1321 General






DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS














No 2

SWL 250 t

SWL 120 t

SWL 60 t

35 ndash 12 m

35 ndash 255 m

35 ndash 34 m


No 4SWL (G) 264 t

SWL 30 t

28 ndash 28 m

28 ndash 28 m

revolving cranes





No 2SWL 50 t

SWL 186 t

36 ndash 14 m



DNV GL AS



















13255 Location




DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS


1331 General notes




1332 Function test











DNV GL AS




over 50 t

SWL + 25SWL + 5 t















DNV GL AS











1335 Stamping




DNV GL AS










1341 General notes








13422 Load tests



DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS






1345 Load tests









DNV GL AS






1351 General notes












DNV GL AS

1353 Damage





1354 Renewals






1361 General notes





DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS









ℓ le d

b le 025 d

f le 05 t

where










DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS








13682 Brakes










DNV GL AS

13610 Repairs





1371 General notes












DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS





















DNV GL AS





1374 Rigging plans







1375 Survey reports






DNV GL AS





DNV GL AS


A1 General










DNV GL AS








DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS








2





DNV GL AS





FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A1


A2


90 36

A3


A4


71

80

25

28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A5


slope 15

slope 13

slope 12


slope 15

slope 13

slope 12



90

80

71

80

71

63

32

28

25

25

22

20

A6





71

36

80

28

12

28

A7


36 12

A8


50 18


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A9




Nominal stress

63 22

A10




Nominal stress

80 32

A11




90 36

A12



100 40


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B1





125

125

90

50

50

36

B2


125 50

B3


100 40

B4


90 36

B5


80 32


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B6



Note


71

63

28

25


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C1


ℓle 50 mm



ℓ gt 300 mm



80

71

63

56

28

25

20

18

C2


r ge 05 h





71

63

25

20


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C3





56

56

50

20

20

18

C4



c le 2 t max 25 mm

56

56

50

20

20

18

C5





56

50

45

40

20

18

16

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C6


c le 2 t2 max 25 mm

r ge 05 h




50

45

18

16

C6a



1 6 lt r h lt 1 3

r h lt 1 6


90

71

50

36

28

22

C7


C8




80 28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C9



tD gt 15 t





56

50

45

20

18

16


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D1


cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80

25

28

D2


cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

22

25

D3


a ge t 3

a lt t 3

Note


36

40

12

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D4


for tubular section



56

50

20

18

D5


for tubular section



45

40

16

14

D6


le 50 mm

d gt 50 mm

Note


71

63

25

22

D7



45 16


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

E1


160(m0 = 5)

71(m0 = 5)

E2a


150(m0 = 4)

---

E2


140(m0 = 4)

40(m0 = 4)

E3





125 (m0= 35)

100 (m0= 35)

36 (m0 = 35)

32 (m0 = 35)


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al


Δσmax = Kt ΔσN





Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 272


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B




TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel




D1


cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80



D2



cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 273


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



D3


36



D4





71



tD gt 15 t

71

63

56

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 274


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



C9

td le 081 t

08 t lt td le 15 t

tD gt 15 t

For d gt 150 mm


5063

56


For v lt 04 t

or vlt 04 tD

C9

02 t lt tD le 08 t

08 t lt tD le 15 t

15 t lt tD le 20 t

For d gt 150 mm


50

45

40


A7


36


C7


80


DNV GL AS


C1 General












DNV GL AS




mdash second area

mdash nth area





DNV GL AS



le 5 10 20 30 40 ge 50


box profiles

square h lt 04 m


13 135 16 165 17 18

07 075 08 085 09 10round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s

d middot v ge 6 m2s 06 065 07 07 075 08

hb 1

ge 2 155 175 195 210 22

1 15 155 175 185 19

05 10 12 13 135 14

Components

box profiles

square

h ge 04 m

rectangular

h ge 05 m025 08 09 09 10 10



beams

round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s


Machinehouses etc


11



DNV GL AS


Area ratio ABAU 1


05 075 04 032 021 015 01

10 092 075 059 043 025 01

20 095 08 063 05 033 02

40 10 088 076 066 055 045

50 10 095 088 081 075 068

60 10 10 10 10 10 10




DNV GL AS


Cha

nges

ndash h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS




CONTENTS

Changes - current


11 Introduction

12 Services


14 Type of services



22 Certification

Section 3 Materials

31 General





36 Forgings

37 Steel castings

38 Bolts and nuts


41 General







48 Joints



51 General

52 Crane groups

53 Design loads



56 Proofs



61 General







71 General

72 Loose gear





81 General

82 Wire ropes

83 Fibre ropes



86 Documentation


91 General


93 Power drives


95 Winches




99 Documentation


101 General




105 Switches



108 Documentation


111 General


113 Design details

114 Types of welds



117 Documentation


121 General


123 Equipment

124 Safety devices





131 General








A1 General




B1


C1 General





Cha

nges

- c

urre

nt

Standard mdash DNVGL-ST-0377 Edition May 2016 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances

DNV GL AS

CHANGES - CURRENT


Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS

CONTENTS

Changes - current3






Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS







Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS






Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


11 Introduction

111 Objective




112 Scope














DNV GL AS








113 Application













DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS













It is required that






DNV GL AS

It is required that
















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













12 Services

121 Introduction




DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS



131 General









DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS




14 Type of services











DNV GL AS




See also Figure 1-1


DNV GL AS



211 General







notation)






FI FI




AP AP




General





FI FI



DNV GL AS



notation)











213 Design analysis




See also [43]


22 Certification




DNV GL AS





















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

SECTION 3 MATERIALS

31 General















DNV GL AS














1st order







DNV GL AS


3rd order













DNV GL AS











3326 Marking




DNV GL AS


















VL-E over 50 mm














DNV GL AS













VL-A420 A460VL-A500 A550VL-

A620 A690le 25 mm le 50 mm

VL-D420 D460VL-D500 D550VL-

D620 D690le 50 mm le 70 mm

VL-E420 E460VL-E500 E550VL-

E620 E690le 70 mm



VL-F420 F460VL-F500 F550VL-

F620 F690le 70 mm

by specialagreement



022 055 160 004 004 030 008 030 040 008 1


Nb + V + Ti max 012





DNV GL AS


1











275

315036


390

045

040

420 048 045









DNV GL AS

3435 Impact energy













DNV GL AS






275 29 21

315 31 22


390 41 27

420 42 28

460 46 31

500 50 33

550 55 37

620 62 41


over 690 69 46






t le 125 Tp = TE + 30 2) minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 10 Tp = TE + 30







DNV GL AS





t le 125 minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 20 2)

25 lt t le 50 Tp = TE + 10

50 lt t le 70 Tp = TE + 10





351 General notes










DNV GL AS











3535 Impact energy








DNV GL AS




1st order 2nd order

t le 25 Tp = TE +30 2) minus 1)












36 Forgings

361 General notes




DNV GL AS










3634 Impact energy







1st order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE ndash 10 2)

2nd order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE + 10



DNV GL AS












37 Steel castings






DNV GL AS







3734 Impact energy











2nd order 27 (19) TE + 10



DNV GL AS





38 Bolts and nuts


382 Manufacture



383 Requirements








DNV GL AS







lt 800 Nmm2 32 30

ge 800 Nmm2 32 30


ge 1200 Nmm2 18 20

-10degC

Austenitic 41 minus



+20degC





DNV GL AS


41 General










or sea conditions





DNV GL AS






b) on the open deck











4232 Application




DNV GL AS




nlow le N 1000










4242 Dead loads



4243 Dynamic forces




DNV GL AS






ε












DNV GL AS

4245 Wind loads



[N]














DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS





4253 Sea lashing











Ed = Ek γm




DNV GL AS

432 Proofs required
















DNV GL AS


fyr = 037 ∙ (Rp 02 + Rm) le Rp 02













DNV GL AS









4372 Definitions






DNV GL AS



Ld = γP ∙ Lk


WGd = WGk γm
















DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS


441 General notes













DNV GL AS








σvSd σRd le 1

or

σvSd le σRd

σSd

τSd

σvSd




DNV GL AS













451 General notes






DNV GL AS












461 General notes



DNV GL AS



462 Application




463 Definitions





DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS







κ =





p 07 17 27 37 47 57 67


= 1 = constant


DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS


Q = log(ΔσR Δσ) - 069897 m0
















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS








= Δσk







DNV GL AS



S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 558 409 336 291 195 167

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 232 201 137 119

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 174 151 105 092

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 116 082 072

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 093 066 058

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 056 048

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 047 041

S7 470 345 275 191 151 127 089 070 059 043 037



S0 9341251 1

8181019 1

739873 1

620677 1

548574 1 496 391 333 296 209 184

S1775

983 1668

787 1595

665 1485 420 372 282 238 211 151 134

S2665

809 1568

638 1497

534 1394 333 290 217 182 161 117 105

S3562

665 1475

520 1414 320 266 230 171 141 125 093 083

S4475

555 1400

430 1350 262 217 188 138 114 100 076 068

S5407

473 1340

366 1300 222 183 159 116 095 084 063 056

S6354

412 1296

317 1260 191 157 136 100 082 071 054 048

S7325

377 1270

290 1235 174 143 123 090 074 064 049 043




DNV GL AS



S0778

883 1

1007 2

685732 1

848 2

620662 1

745 2

528560 1

598 2473

500 1436

458 1 365 322 293 219 195

S1647

693 1

809 2

562600 1

668 2

502536 1

580 2418

443 1372

388 1 339 275 240 217 161 145

S2554

594 1

674 2

475507 1

552 2

421449 1

473 2356

363 1 304 275 217 186 168 127 115

S3467

500 1

560 2

397424 1

453 2349

372 1 285 248 224 172 146 132 101 092

S4395

424 1

470 2

333356 1

377 2291

311 1 237 205 183 140 118 106 083 075

S5339

363 1

401 2

284304 1

320 2248

266 1 201 174 154 117 099 088 069 063

S6296

317 1

349 2

247265 1

278 2215

230 1 173 150 133 101 085 075 06 054

S7270

290 1

319 2

225241 1

254 2196

211 1 158 137 120 092 077 068 054 049





S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 314 291 230 209

S1 607 526 471 394 352 323 269 240 221 175 160

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 217 192 177 142 130

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 141 114 106

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 114 094 087


DNV GL AS


S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 079 073

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 068 063

S7 253 211 184 148 129 116 093 081 073 061 057



m0 = 3 m0 = 5 m0 = 4 m0 = 35

353 363 366 365


Δσmax le Δσp






471 General notes








DNV GL AS






48 Joints










DNV GL AS














Min Max 1







DNV GL AS






ασm = minimum of



mdash Rms Rm or

mdash 10


mm2]



ατe = 077



ReHs [Nmm2] 240 300 640 900 1080

Rms [Nmm2] 400 500 800 1000 1200


ΔFxd =

ΔFzd =

ΔFMd =


DNV GL AS













ΔτR = 100 Nmm2




DNV GL AS






S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 313 288 224 201

S1 607 526 471 394 351 323 269 238 218 167 151

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 216 191 173 132 119

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 138 103 094

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 113 082 076

S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 069 062

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 059 053

S7 253 211 183 147 128 116 093 081 073 053 046







nut


DNV GL AS












Fμd =







DNV GL AS








12 843 7625

14 115 1047

16 157 1441

18 193 1751

20 245 2252

22 303 2815

24 353 3243

27 459 4271

30 561 5190


33 668 617

36 786 723


DNV GL AS


39 943 873

42 1083 999

45 1265 1174

48 1426 1320

52 1707 1590

56 1971 1833

64 2599 2426

72 3372 3174

80 4245 4023

90 5479 5226

100 6858 6575



S235 260

S355 C45N 46G2N 46Cr4N 420


GG25 800







DNV GL AS








nut





DNV GL AS





= 0 for proofs in [49142] and [4915]


DNV GL AS






g lt dw+tf




FMmax le FMzul




DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS



FMmin = FMmaxαA














DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS



S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 555 406 333 287 182 151

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 229 195 123 103

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 172 146 089 076

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 114 068 058

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 092 054 046

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 045 037

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 039 031

S7 467 345 273 189 151 127 088 070 059 035 028






ba ge 075







DNV GL AS











γp = 134



DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS








DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS












[]



DNV GL AS








[mm]








DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS


51 General
















DNV GL AS







52 Crane groups

521 General notes




522 Crane group A









DNV GL AS



523 Crane group B









524 Crane group C












DNV GL AS

53 Design loads

531 General notes














DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS







FSa = fa middot LN





DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS



ψP = (1 + ψ) 2












DNV GL AS


541 General notes








A1 105 + 034 middot vh 117

B1

C1 115 + 051 middot vh 135




HD 1 HD 2 HD 3 HD 4





DNV GL AS






5432 Sea operation





DNV GL AS











Fixedinstallation



075 032middot(H13)075 038middot(H13)

075 050middot(H13)075 070middot(H13)

075 085middot(H13)067

Semi-sub-


090 040middot(H13)088 047middot(H13)

087 060middot(H13)083 073middot(H13)

080 090middot(H13)070


088 062middot(H13)090 070middot(H13)

090 080middot(H13)087 (H13)

078


094 075middot(H13)094 085middot(H13)

094 090middot(H13)094 120middot(H13)

080


094 118middot(H13) 097 120middot(H13)

097 130middot(H13) 094 140middot(H13)

091







DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS




551 General notes













DNV GL AS












Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 114


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5


Load Combinations


Loads i Reference






Regu

lar

load

s





Non

-reg

ular

load

s






cial

load

s




Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 115


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5

Load Combinations


Loads i Reference




DNV GL AS









Load combinations


γpi IA1 γpi IIIA1

Dead loads LE 1 4 321 122 1 10 110 1 10









DNV GL AS


Load combinations






Regular loads




Special loads



56 Proofs

561 General









DNV GL AS







Hatch cover crane


Provision crane

S6

S2

S2

20000

10000

20000

A1


Hose crane S6 50000

A3

Floating cranes




S2

S3

S4

80000

50000

20000

B1

Ship cranes






S3

S2

S3

S4

S4

350000

250000

100000

70000

50000

B3

Floating cranes





S2

S3

S4

S4

300000

125000

80000

60000

C1

Ship cranes



Pallet crane

S5

S5

S6

600000

450000

600000

C3

Floating cranes



Lighter crane

S5

S5

S5

700000

500000

2000000





DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS







a le 2 middot dℓ

b ge 15 middot dℓ

ba ge 075
















DNV GL AS







[N]

[N]

[N]



88 109 129









DNV GL AS






Znom =






DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS


tf ge 3 middot tw1


574133 Facing













DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS


61 General







621 General notes






DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS










6243 Accessories








DNV GL AS











6272 Certificates




DNV GL AS

6273 Register book



631 General notes





6322 Dimensioning








Trucks 5 kNm 05 m



DNV GL AS





f =

where











DNV GL AS







6343 Accessories









DNV GL AS








6372 Certificates



6373 Register book




DNV GL AS


641 General notes














DNV GL AS

6432 Marking








651 General notes












DNV GL AS



strong




6543 Register book









DNV GL AS





6632 Dimensioning












DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS


71 General




72 Loose gear









DNV GL AS


7222 Traverses














DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS










SWL ψ SWL ψ

le 10 t 16 le 1000 t 12

le 160 t 14 gt 1000 t 115

le 500 t 13




DNV GL AS



HS = (LNe + Le)10





Load combinations


Loads i Reference






5 4 Table 5-2 110 ψmax - -


Lateral impact 7 7 [23242] 110 - - 10





DNV GL AS


7234 Proofs





DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS








above 160 t



7252 Examinations




7261 Certification





DNV GL AS

7262 Register book






731 General notes












DNV GL AS








LNe ψzul

up to 60 t 16

above 60 t to 160 t

above 160 t 11







DNV GL AS

7342 Proofs









DNV GL AS












σd max le Rd

with



DNV GL AS

with







with

(base value)




and (radii ratio)




DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS

7362 Examinations











DNV GL AS






7372 Eye plates













over 1600 t


11 times SWL






DNV GL AS


ropes or chains




7422 Loose gear












DNV GL AS





15SWL 30 tWT 5 t





















DNV GL AS












751 Loose gear






DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


81 General

811 Scope






82 Wire ropes









DNV GL AS


W = Cr [] + 33 middot Mo [] ge 29


822 Definitions










823 Dimensioning







DNV GL AS








LNe ψzulS

up to 10 t 16


over 160 t 15





DNV GL AS




1 le Dd le 9










DNV GL AS




up to 10 t 5


over 160 t 3



up to 10 t 4


over 160 t 3



up to 10 t 6


over 160 t 36








DNV GL AS




8242 Rope-sheaves











A 18 ds 20 ds 16 ds 1770 Nmm2






proportionally


DNV GL AS







83 Fibre ropes






832 Definitions





DNV GL AS






10 ndash 13

14 ndash 17

18 ndash 23

24 ndash 39

40 and over

12

10

8

7

6











manila hemp

polypropylene

polyamide

polyester

carbon-fibre

55 ds

4 ds

6 ds

6 ds

14 ds


DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS








86 Documentation










DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


91 General

911 General notes

















DNV GL AS


921 General notes




922 Dimensioning








924 Lubrication





DNV GL AS






932 Main drives




941 Slewing gears








DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS

95 Winches

951 Design notes




952 Rope drums













DNV GL AS









953 Brakes






DNV GL AS














9542 Manual drives




DNV GL AS


955 Couplings




956 Gearing















DNV GL AS










963 Hydraulic tanks







DNV GL AS







972 Safety devices












DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS





99 Documentation

991 Marking




DNV GL AS










992 Certificates

















DNV GL AS














le 40 barle 32 DN











Explanations





DNV GL AS


101 General

1011 General notes
















DNV GL AS











1031 Driving power





DNV GL AS














1033 Brakes



DNV GL AS



1041 Supply line














DNV GL AS

10432 Cable trays



10433 Cable bundles









105 Switches





DNV GL AS


1052 Limit switches
















DNV GL AS













10622 Lighting




DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS


108 Documentation

1081 Marking





1082 Certificates





DNV GL AS


111 General














DNV GL AS











11233 Cold forming




DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


11242 Welders














DNV GL AS






113 Design details

1131 General notes










DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


Dmin = 170 + 3 (t ndash 10) ge 170 mm







DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS



















1141 Butt joints



DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS





1143 Fillet welds



DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS

1154 Workmanship





1157 Heat treatment









DNV GL AS















Remarks








DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS









117 Documentation

1171 Marking



inspection office


1172 Certification




DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS


121 General











DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS

123 Equipment

















DNV GL AS


124 Safety devices















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS

1246 Alarm devices



















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS



12715 Communication













DNV GL AS


131 General










13122 Equipment





DNV GL AS


13131 Tests



13132 Examination




1321 General






DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS














No 2

SWL 250 t

SWL 120 t

SWL 60 t

35 ndash 12 m

35 ndash 255 m

35 ndash 34 m


No 4SWL (G) 264 t

SWL 30 t

28 ndash 28 m

28 ndash 28 m

revolving cranes





No 2SWL 50 t

SWL 186 t

36 ndash 14 m



DNV GL AS



















13255 Location




DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS


1331 General notes




1332 Function test











DNV GL AS




over 50 t

SWL + 25SWL + 5 t















DNV GL AS











1335 Stamping




DNV GL AS










1341 General notes








13422 Load tests



DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS






1345 Load tests









DNV GL AS






1351 General notes












DNV GL AS

1353 Damage





1354 Renewals






1361 General notes





DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS









ℓ le d

b le 025 d

f le 05 t

where










DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS








13682 Brakes










DNV GL AS

13610 Repairs





1371 General notes












DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS





















DNV GL AS





1374 Rigging plans







1375 Survey reports






DNV GL AS





DNV GL AS


A1 General










DNV GL AS








DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS








2





DNV GL AS





FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A1


A2


90 36

A3


A4


71

80

25

28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A5


slope 15

slope 13

slope 12


slope 15

slope 13

slope 12



90

80

71

80

71

63

32

28

25

25

22

20

A6





71

36

80

28

12

28

A7


36 12

A8


50 18


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A9




Nominal stress

63 22

A10




Nominal stress

80 32

A11




90 36

A12



100 40


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B1





125

125

90

50

50

36

B2


125 50

B3


100 40

B4


90 36

B5


80 32


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B6



Note


71

63

28

25


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C1


ℓle 50 mm



ℓ gt 300 mm



80

71

63

56

28

25

20

18

C2


r ge 05 h





71

63

25

20


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C3





56

56

50

20

20

18

C4



c le 2 t max 25 mm

56

56

50

20

20

18

C5





56

50

45

40

20

18

16

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C6


c le 2 t2 max 25 mm

r ge 05 h




50

45

18

16

C6a



1 6 lt r h lt 1 3

r h lt 1 6


90

71

50

36

28

22

C7


C8




80 28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C9



tD gt 15 t





56

50

45

20

18

16


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D1


cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80

25

28

D2


cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

22

25

D3


a ge t 3

a lt t 3

Note


36

40

12

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D4


for tubular section



56

50

20

18

D5


for tubular section



45

40

16

14

D6


le 50 mm

d gt 50 mm

Note


71

63

25

22

D7



45 16


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

E1


160(m0 = 5)

71(m0 = 5)

E2a


150(m0 = 4)

---

E2


140(m0 = 4)

40(m0 = 4)

E3





125 (m0= 35)

100 (m0= 35)

36 (m0 = 35)

32 (m0 = 35)


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al


Δσmax = Kt ΔσN





Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 272


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B




TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel




D1


cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80



D2



cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 273


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



D3


36



D4





71



tD gt 15 t

71

63

56

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 274


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



C9

td le 081 t

08 t lt td le 15 t

tD gt 15 t

For d gt 150 mm


5063

56


For v lt 04 t

or vlt 04 tD

C9

02 t lt tD le 08 t

08 t lt tD le 15 t

15 t lt tD le 20 t

For d gt 150 mm


50

45

40


A7


36


C7


80


DNV GL AS


C1 General












DNV GL AS




mdash second area

mdash nth area





DNV GL AS



le 5 10 20 30 40 ge 50


box profiles

square h lt 04 m


13 135 16 165 17 18

07 075 08 085 09 10round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s

d middot v ge 6 m2s 06 065 07 07 075 08

hb 1

ge 2 155 175 195 210 22

1 15 155 175 185 19

05 10 12 13 135 14

Components

box profiles

square

h ge 04 m

rectangular

h ge 05 m025 08 09 09 10 10



beams

round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s


Machinehouses etc


11



DNV GL AS


Area ratio ABAU 1


05 075 04 032 021 015 01

10 092 075 059 043 025 01

20 095 08 063 05 033 02

40 10 088 076 066 055 045

50 10 095 088 081 075 068

60 10 10 10 10 10 10




DNV GL AS


Cha

nges

ndash h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS




CONTENTS

Changes - current


11 Introduction

12 Services


14 Type of services



22 Certification

Section 3 Materials

31 General





36 Forgings

37 Steel castings

38 Bolts and nuts


41 General







48 Joints



51 General

52 Crane groups

53 Design loads



56 Proofs



61 General







71 General

72 Loose gear





81 General

82 Wire ropes

83 Fibre ropes



86 Documentation


91 General


93 Power drives


95 Winches




99 Documentation


101 General




105 Switches



108 Documentation


111 General


113 Design details

114 Types of welds



117 Documentation


121 General


123 Equipment

124 Safety devices





131 General








A1 General




B1


C1 General





Con

tent

s

Standard mdash DNVGL-ST-0377 Edition May 2016 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances

DNV GL AS

CONTENTS

Changes - current3






Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS







Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS






Con

tent

s


DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


11 Introduction

111 Objective




112 Scope














DNV GL AS








113 Application













DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS













It is required that






DNV GL AS

It is required that
















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













12 Services

121 Introduction




DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS



131 General









DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS




14 Type of services











DNV GL AS




See also Figure 1-1


DNV GL AS



211 General







notation)






FI FI




AP AP




General





FI FI



DNV GL AS



notation)











213 Design analysis




See also [43]


22 Certification




DNV GL AS





















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

SECTION 3 MATERIALS

31 General















DNV GL AS














1st order







DNV GL AS


3rd order













DNV GL AS











3326 Marking




DNV GL AS


















VL-E over 50 mm














DNV GL AS













VL-A420 A460VL-A500 A550VL-

A620 A690le 25 mm le 50 mm

VL-D420 D460VL-D500 D550VL-

D620 D690le 50 mm le 70 mm

VL-E420 E460VL-E500 E550VL-

E620 E690le 70 mm



VL-F420 F460VL-F500 F550VL-

F620 F690le 70 mm

by specialagreement



022 055 160 004 004 030 008 030 040 008 1


Nb + V + Ti max 012





DNV GL AS


1











275

315036


390

045

040

420 048 045









DNV GL AS

3435 Impact energy













DNV GL AS






275 29 21

315 31 22


390 41 27

420 42 28

460 46 31

500 50 33

550 55 37

620 62 41


over 690 69 46






t le 125 Tp = TE + 30 2) minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 10 Tp = TE + 30







DNV GL AS





t le 125 minus 1)

125 lt t le 25 Tp = TE + 20 2)

25 lt t le 50 Tp = TE + 10

50 lt t le 70 Tp = TE + 10





351 General notes










DNV GL AS











3535 Impact energy








DNV GL AS




1st order 2nd order

t le 25 Tp = TE +30 2) minus 1)












36 Forgings

361 General notes




DNV GL AS










3634 Impact energy







1st order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE ndash 10 2)

2nd order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE + 10



DNV GL AS












37 Steel castings






DNV GL AS







3734 Impact energy











2nd order 27 (19) TE + 10



DNV GL AS





38 Bolts and nuts


382 Manufacture



383 Requirements








DNV GL AS







lt 800 Nmm2 32 30

ge 800 Nmm2 32 30


ge 1200 Nmm2 18 20

-10degC

Austenitic 41 minus



+20degC





DNV GL AS


41 General










or sea conditions





DNV GL AS






b) on the open deck











4232 Application




DNV GL AS




nlow le N 1000










4242 Dead loads



4243 Dynamic forces




DNV GL AS






ε












DNV GL AS

4245 Wind loads



[N]














DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS





4253 Sea lashing











Ed = Ek γm




DNV GL AS

432 Proofs required
















DNV GL AS


fyr = 037 ∙ (Rp 02 + Rm) le Rp 02













DNV GL AS









4372 Definitions






DNV GL AS



Ld = γP ∙ Lk


WGd = WGk γm
















DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS


441 General notes













DNV GL AS








σvSd σRd le 1

or

σvSd le σRd

σSd

τSd

σvSd




DNV GL AS













451 General notes






DNV GL AS












461 General notes



DNV GL AS



462 Application




463 Definitions





DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS







κ =





p 07 17 27 37 47 57 67


= 1 = constant


DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS


Q = log(ΔσR Δσ) - 069897 m0
















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS








= Δσk







DNV GL AS



S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 558 409 336 291 195 167

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 232 201 137 119

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 174 151 105 092

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 116 082 072

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 093 066 058

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 056 048

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 047 041

S7 470 345 275 191 151 127 089 070 059 043 037



S0 9341251 1

8181019 1

739873 1

620677 1

548574 1 496 391 333 296 209 184

S1775

983 1668

787 1595

665 1485 420 372 282 238 211 151 134

S2665

809 1568

638 1497

534 1394 333 290 217 182 161 117 105

S3562

665 1475

520 1414 320 266 230 171 141 125 093 083

S4475

555 1400

430 1350 262 217 188 138 114 100 076 068

S5407

473 1340

366 1300 222 183 159 116 095 084 063 056

S6354

412 1296

317 1260 191 157 136 100 082 071 054 048

S7325

377 1270

290 1235 174 143 123 090 074 064 049 043




DNV GL AS



S0778

883 1

1007 2

685732 1

848 2

620662 1

745 2

528560 1

598 2473

500 1436

458 1 365 322 293 219 195

S1647

693 1

809 2

562600 1

668 2

502536 1

580 2418

443 1372

388 1 339 275 240 217 161 145

S2554

594 1

674 2

475507 1

552 2

421449 1

473 2356

363 1 304 275 217 186 168 127 115

S3467

500 1

560 2

397424 1

453 2349

372 1 285 248 224 172 146 132 101 092

S4395

424 1

470 2

333356 1

377 2291

311 1 237 205 183 140 118 106 083 075

S5339

363 1

401 2

284304 1

320 2248

266 1 201 174 154 117 099 088 069 063

S6296

317 1

349 2

247265 1

278 2215

230 1 173 150 133 101 085 075 06 054

S7270

290 1

319 2

225241 1

254 2196

211 1 158 137 120 092 077 068 054 049





S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 314 291 230 209

S1 607 526 471 394 352 323 269 240 221 175 160

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 217 192 177 142 130

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 141 114 106

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 114 094 087


DNV GL AS


S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 079 073

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 068 063

S7 253 211 184 148 129 116 093 081 073 061 057



m0 = 3 m0 = 5 m0 = 4 m0 = 35

353 363 366 365


Δσmax le Δσp






471 General notes








DNV GL AS






48 Joints










DNV GL AS














Min Max 1







DNV GL AS






ασm = minimum of



mdash Rms Rm or

mdash 10


mm2]



ατe = 077



ReHs [Nmm2] 240 300 640 900 1080

Rms [Nmm2] 400 500 800 1000 1200


ΔFxd =

ΔFzd =

ΔFMd =


DNV GL AS













ΔτR = 100 Nmm2




DNV GL AS






S0 729 642 583 496 447 414 349 313 288 224 201

S1 607 526 471 394 351 323 269 238 218 167 151

S2 519 446 395 327 288 263 216 191 173 132 119

S3 438 371 327 267 235 214 174 153 138 103 094

S4 371 311 273 221 194 176 142 124 113 082 076

S5 317 266 233 188 164 149 120 105 095 069 062

S6 277 231 201 163 142 128 103 090 081 059 053

S7 253 211 183 147 128 116 093 081 073 053 046







nut


DNV GL AS












Fμd =







DNV GL AS








12 843 7625

14 115 1047

16 157 1441

18 193 1751

20 245 2252

22 303 2815

24 353 3243

27 459 4271

30 561 5190


33 668 617

36 786 723


DNV GL AS


39 943 873

42 1083 999

45 1265 1174

48 1426 1320

52 1707 1590

56 1971 1833

64 2599 2426

72 3372 3174

80 4245 4023

90 5479 5226

100 6858 6575



S235 260

S355 C45N 46G2N 46Cr4N 420


GG25 800







DNV GL AS








nut





DNV GL AS





= 0 for proofs in [49142] and [4915]


DNV GL AS






g lt dw+tf




FMmax le FMzul




DNV GL AS







DNV GL AS



FMmin = FMmaxαA














DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS



S0 1654 1294 1068 784 644 555 406 333 287 182 151

S1 1263 970 787 568 461 397 284 229 195 123 103

S2 1025 775 623 443 357 304 215 172 146 089 076

S3 836 623 500 352 282 240 168 134 114 068 058

S4 693 516 412 288 230 195 136 108 092 054 046

S5 592 438 348 244 194 164 114 091 077 045 037

S6 513 378 302 209 166 140 098 078 066 039 031

S7 467 345 273 189 151 127 088 070 059 035 028






ba ge 075







DNV GL AS











γp = 134



DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS








DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS












[]



DNV GL AS








[mm]








DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS


51 General
















DNV GL AS







52 Crane groups

521 General notes




522 Crane group A









DNV GL AS



523 Crane group B









524 Crane group C












DNV GL AS

53 Design loads

531 General notes














DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS







FSa = fa middot LN





DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS



ψP = (1 + ψ) 2












DNV GL AS


541 General notes








A1 105 + 034 middot vh 117

B1

C1 115 + 051 middot vh 135




HD 1 HD 2 HD 3 HD 4





DNV GL AS






5432 Sea operation





DNV GL AS











Fixedinstallation



075 032middot(H13)075 038middot(H13)

075 050middot(H13)075 070middot(H13)

075 085middot(H13)067

Semi-sub-


090 040middot(H13)088 047middot(H13)

087 060middot(H13)083 073middot(H13)

080 090middot(H13)070


088 062middot(H13)090 070middot(H13)

090 080middot(H13)087 (H13)

078


094 075middot(H13)094 085middot(H13)

094 090middot(H13)094 120middot(H13)

080


094 118middot(H13) 097 120middot(H13)

097 130middot(H13) 094 140middot(H13)

091







DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS




551 General notes













DNV GL AS












Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 114


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5


Load Combinations


Loads i Reference






Regu

lar

load

s





Non

-reg

ular

load

s






cial

load

s




Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 115


DN

V G

L AS

Section 5

Load Combinations


Loads i Reference




DNV GL AS









Load combinations


γpi IA1 γpi IIIA1

Dead loads LE 1 4 321 122 1 10 110 1 10









DNV GL AS


Load combinations






Regular loads




Special loads



56 Proofs

561 General









DNV GL AS







Hatch cover crane


Provision crane

S6

S2

S2

20000

10000

20000

A1


Hose crane S6 50000

A3

Floating cranes




S2

S3

S4

80000

50000

20000

B1

Ship cranes






S3

S2

S3

S4

S4

350000

250000

100000

70000

50000

B3

Floating cranes





S2

S3

S4

S4

300000

125000

80000

60000

C1

Ship cranes



Pallet crane

S5

S5

S6

600000

450000

600000

C3

Floating cranes



Lighter crane

S5

S5

S5

700000

500000

2000000





DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS







a le 2 middot dℓ

b ge 15 middot dℓ

ba ge 075
















DNV GL AS







[N]

[N]

[N]



88 109 129









DNV GL AS






Znom =






DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS


tf ge 3 middot tw1


574133 Facing













DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS


61 General







621 General notes






DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS










6243 Accessories








DNV GL AS











6272 Certificates




DNV GL AS

6273 Register book



631 General notes





6322 Dimensioning








Trucks 5 kNm 05 m



DNV GL AS





f =

where











DNV GL AS







6343 Accessories









DNV GL AS








6372 Certificates



6373 Register book




DNV GL AS


641 General notes














DNV GL AS

6432 Marking








651 General notes












DNV GL AS



strong




6543 Register book









DNV GL AS





6632 Dimensioning












DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS


71 General




72 Loose gear









DNV GL AS


7222 Traverses














DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS










SWL ψ SWL ψ

le 10 t 16 le 1000 t 12

le 160 t 14 gt 1000 t 115

le 500 t 13




DNV GL AS



HS = (LNe + Le)10





Load combinations


Loads i Reference






5 4 Table 5-2 110 ψmax - -


Lateral impact 7 7 [23242] 110 - - 10





DNV GL AS


7234 Proofs





DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS




DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS








above 160 t



7252 Examinations




7261 Certification





DNV GL AS

7262 Register book






731 General notes












DNV GL AS








LNe ψzul

up to 60 t 16

above 60 t to 160 t

above 160 t 11







DNV GL AS

7342 Proofs









DNV GL AS












σd max le Rd

with



DNV GL AS

with







with

(base value)




and (radii ratio)




DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS

7362 Examinations











DNV GL AS






7372 Eye plates













over 1600 t


11 times SWL






DNV GL AS


ropes or chains




7422 Loose gear












DNV GL AS





15SWL 30 tWT 5 t





















DNV GL AS












751 Loose gear






DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


81 General

811 Scope






82 Wire ropes









DNV GL AS


W = Cr [] + 33 middot Mo [] ge 29


822 Definitions










823 Dimensioning







DNV GL AS








LNe ψzulS

up to 10 t 16


over 160 t 15





DNV GL AS




1 le Dd le 9










DNV GL AS




up to 10 t 5


over 160 t 3



up to 10 t 4


over 160 t 3



up to 10 t 6


over 160 t 36








DNV GL AS




8242 Rope-sheaves











A 18 ds 20 ds 16 ds 1770 Nmm2






proportionally


DNV GL AS







83 Fibre ropes






832 Definitions





DNV GL AS






10 ndash 13

14 ndash 17

18 ndash 23

24 ndash 39

40 and over

12

10

8

7

6











manila hemp

polypropylene

polyamide

polyester

carbon-fibre

55 ds

4 ds

6 ds

6 ds

14 ds


DNV GL AS



















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS








86 Documentation










DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS


91 General

911 General notes

















DNV GL AS


921 General notes




922 Dimensioning








924 Lubrication





DNV GL AS






932 Main drives




941 Slewing gears








DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS

95 Winches

951 Design notes




952 Rope drums













DNV GL AS









953 Brakes






DNV GL AS














9542 Manual drives




DNV GL AS


955 Couplings




956 Gearing















DNV GL AS










963 Hydraulic tanks







DNV GL AS







972 Safety devices












DNV GL AS









DNV GL AS





99 Documentation

991 Marking




DNV GL AS










992 Certificates

















DNV GL AS














le 40 barle 32 DN











Explanations





DNV GL AS


101 General

1011 General notes
















DNV GL AS











1031 Driving power





DNV GL AS














1033 Brakes



DNV GL AS



1041 Supply line














DNV GL AS

10432 Cable trays



10433 Cable bundles









105 Switches





DNV GL AS


1052 Limit switches
















DNV GL AS













10622 Lighting




DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS


108 Documentation

1081 Marking





1082 Certificates





DNV GL AS


111 General














DNV GL AS











11233 Cold forming




DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


11242 Welders














DNV GL AS






113 Design details

1131 General notes










DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS


Dmin = 170 + 3 (t ndash 10) ge 170 mm







DNV GL AS












DNV GL AS



















1141 Butt joints



DNV GL AS











DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS





1143 Fillet welds



DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS

1154 Workmanship





1157 Heat treatment









DNV GL AS















Remarks








DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS









117 Documentation

1171 Marking



inspection office


1172 Certification




DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS


121 General











DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS



DNV GL AS






DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS

123 Equipment

















DNV GL AS


124 Safety devices















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS

1246 Alarm devices



















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS



12715 Communication













DNV GL AS


131 General










13122 Equipment





DNV GL AS


13131 Tests



13132 Examination




1321 General






DNV GL AS
















DNV GL AS















DNV GL AS














No 2

SWL 250 t

SWL 120 t

SWL 60 t

35 ndash 12 m

35 ndash 255 m

35 ndash 34 m


No 4SWL (G) 264 t

SWL 30 t

28 ndash 28 m

28 ndash 28 m

revolving cranes





No 2SWL 50 t

SWL 186 t

36 ndash 14 m



DNV GL AS



















13255 Location




DNV GL AS














DNV GL AS


1331 General notes




1332 Function test











DNV GL AS




over 50 t

SWL + 25SWL + 5 t















DNV GL AS











1335 Stamping




DNV GL AS










1341 General notes








13422 Load tests



DNV GL AS


















DNV GL AS













DNV GL AS






1345 Load tests









DNV GL AS






1351 General notes












DNV GL AS

1353 Damage





1354 Renewals






1361 General notes





DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS









ℓ le d

b le 025 d

f le 05 t

where










DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS








13682 Brakes










DNV GL AS

13610 Repairs





1371 General notes












DNV GL AS

















DNV GL AS





















DNV GL AS





1374 Rigging plans







1375 Survey reports






DNV GL AS





DNV GL AS


A1 General










DNV GL AS








DNV GL AS










DNV GL AS








2





DNV GL AS





FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A1


A2


90 36

A3


A4


71

80

25

28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A5


slope 15

slope 13

slope 12


slope 15

slope 13

slope 12



90

80

71

80

71

63

32

28

25

25

22

20

A6





71

36

80

28

12

28

A7


36 12

A8


50 18


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

A9




Nominal stress

63 22

A10




Nominal stress

80 32

A11




90 36

A12



100 40


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B1





125

125

90

50

50

36

B2


125 50

B3


100 40

B4


90 36

B5


80 32


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

B6



Note


71

63

28

25


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C1


ℓle 50 mm



ℓ gt 300 mm



80

71

63

56

28

25

20

18

C2


r ge 05 h





71

63

25

20


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C3





56

56

50

20

20

18

C4



c le 2 t max 25 mm

56

56

50

20

20

18

C5





56

50

45

40

20

18

16

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C6


c le 2 t2 max 25 mm

r ge 05 h




50

45

18

16

C6a



1 6 lt r h lt 1 3

r h lt 1 6


90

71

50

36

28

22

C7


C8




80 28


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

C9



tD gt 15 t





56

50

45

20

18

16


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D1


cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80

25

28

D2


cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

22

25

D3


a ge t 3

a lt t 3

Note


36

40

12

14


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

D4


for tubular section



56

50

20

18

D5


for tubular section



45

40

16

14

D6


le 50 mm

d gt 50 mm

Note


71

63

25

22

D7



45 16


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al

E1


160(m0 = 5)

71(m0 = 5)

E2a


150(m0 = 4)

---

E2


140(m0 = 4)

40(m0 = 4)

E3





125 (m0= 35)

100 (m0= 35)

36 (m0 = 35)

32 (m0 = 35)


DNV GL AS


FAT classΔσRType



Steel Al


Δσmax = Kt ΔσN





Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 272


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B




TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel




D1


cruciform joint

tee-joint

71

80



D2



cruciform joint

tee-joint

63

71

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 273


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



D3


36



D4





71



tD gt 15 t

71

63

56

Standard mdash

DN

VG

L-ST-0377 Edition M

ay 2016Page 274


DN

V G

L AS

Appendix B



TypeNo



FATclassΔσR

steel



C9

td le 081 t

08 t lt td le 15 t

tD gt 15 t

For d gt 150 mm


5063

56


For v lt 04 t

or vlt 04 tD

C9

02 t lt tD le 08 t

08 t lt tD le 15 t

15 t lt tD le 20 t

For d gt 150 mm


50

45

40


A7


36


C7


80


DNV GL AS


C1 General












DNV GL AS




mdash second area

mdash nth area





DNV GL AS



le 5 10 20 30 40 ge 50


box profiles

square h lt 04 m


13 135 16 165 17 18

07 075 08 085 09 10round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s

d middot v ge 6 m2s 06 065 07 07 075 08

hb 1

ge 2 155 175 195 210 22

1 15 155 175 185 19

05 10 12 13 135 14

Components

box profiles

square

h ge 04 m

rectangular

h ge 05 m025 08 09 09 10 10



beams

round profiles 2

d middot v lt 6 m2s


Machinehouses etc


11



DNV GL AS


Area ratio ABAU 1


05 075 04 032 021 015 01

10 092 075 059 043 025 01

20 095 08 063 05 033 02

40 10 088 076 066 055 045

50 10 095 088 081 075 068

60 10 10 10 10 10 10




DNV GL AS


Cha

nges

ndash h

isto

ric


DNV GL AS




CONTENTS

Changes - current


11 Introduction

12 Services


14 Type of services



22 Certification

Section 3 Materials

31 General





36 Forgings

37 Steel castings

38 Bolts and nuts


41 General







48 Joints



51 General

52 Crane groups

53 Design loads



56 Proofs



61 General







71 General

72 Loose gear





81 General

82 Wire ropes

83 Fibre ropes



86 Documentation


91 General


93 Power drives


95 Winches




99 Documentation


101 General




105 Switches



108 Documentation


111 General


113 Design details

114 Types of welds



117 Documentation


121 General


123 Equipment

124 Safety devices





131 General








A1 General




B1


C1 General





DNVGL-ST-0377 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances · 2016. 5. 19. · 9.6 Hydraulic systems...

Documents

Transcript of DNVGL-ST-0377 Standard for shipboard lifting appliances · 2016. 5. 19. · 9.6 Hydraulic systems...